OS8212EN16GLA00 StudentHandout PDF

NokiaNetworks
Network Operations and

Maintenance Tasks with
NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
Student Guide
OS8212-16A-NRM
2 NetworkOperationsandMaintenanceTaskswithNetAct(NetAct16.2)
Thispageisleftblankforyournotes.
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
NokiaSolutionsandNetworks.Allrightsreserved.
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................

LegalNotice 3
Legal Notice
IntellectualPropertyRights
AllcopyrightsandintellectualpropertyrightsforNokiaSolutionsandNetworkstrainingdocumentation,
product documentation and slide presentation material, all of which are forthwith known as Nokia
SolutionsandNetworkstrainingmaterial,aretheexclusivepropertyofNokiaSolutionsandNetworks.
Nokia Solutions and Networks owns the rights to copying, modification, translation, adaptation or
derivativesincludinganyimprovementsordevelopments.NokiaSolutionsandNetworkshasthesole
righttocopy,distribute,amend,modify,develop,license,sublicense,sell,transferandassigntheNokia
Solutions and Networks training material. Individuals can use the Nokia Solutions and Networks
training material for their own personal self-development only, those same individuals cannot
subsequentlypassonthatsameIntellectualPropertytootherswithoutthepriorwrittenagreementof
Nokia Solutions and Networks. The Nokia Solutions and Networks training material cannot be used
outsideofanagreedNokiaSolutionsandNetworkstrainingsessionfordevelopmentofgroupswithout
thepriorwrittenagreementofNokiaSolutionsandNetworks.
Indemnity
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product
defined in the introduction of this documentation. This document is intended for the use of Nokia
SolutionsandNetworkscustomersonlyforthepurposesoftheagreementunderwhichthedocument
issubmitted,andnopartofitmaybeused,reproduced,modifiedortransmittedinanyformormeans
without the prior written permission of Nokia Solutions and Networks. The document has been
prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full
responsibility when using it. Nokia Solutions and Networks welcomes customer comments as part of
theprocessofcontinuousdevelopmentandimprovementofthedocumentation.
The information or statements given in this document concerning the suitability, capacity, or
performanceofthementionedhardwareorsoftwareproductsaregivenasisandallliabilityarisingin
connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively in a separate
agreement between Nokia Solutions and Networks and the customer. However, Nokia Solutions and
Networkshasmadeallreasonableeffortstoensurethattheinstructionscontainedinthedocumentare
adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia Solutions and Networks will, if deemed
necessary by Nokia Solutions and Networks, explain issues which may not be covered by the
document.
NokiaSolutionsandNetworkswillcorrecterrorsinthedocumentassoonaspossible.INNOEVENT
WILL NOKIA SOLUTIONS AND NETRORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENT OR
FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY MONETARY LOSSES,SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY OR
DATA,THATMAYARISEFROMTHEUSEOFTHISDOCUMENTORTHEINFORMATIONINIT.
This document and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other
intellectualpropertyrightsaccordingtotheapplicablelaws.
NokiaisaregisteredtrademarkofNokiaCorporation.
Otherproductnamesmentionedinthisdocumentmaybetrademarksoftheirrespectiveowners,and
theyarementionedforidentificationpurposesonly.
CopyrightNokiaSolutionsandNetworks2013.Allrightsreserved.
AboutNokia
Nokia invests in technologies important in a world where billions of devices are connected. We are
focused on three businesses: network infrastructure software, hardware and services, which we offer
through Networks; location intelligence, which we provide through HERE; and advanced technology
development and licensing, which we pursue through Technologies. Each of these businesses is a
leaderinitsrespectivefield.
Through Networks, Nokia is the worlds specialist in mobile broadband. From the first ever call on
GSM,tothefirstcallonLTE,weoperateattheforefrontofeachgenerationofmobiletechnology.Our
globalexpertsinventthenewcapabilitiesourcustomersneedintheirnetworks.Weprovidetheworlds
most efficient mobile networks, the intelligence to maximize the value of those networks, and the
servicestomakeitallworkseamlessly.
http://www.nsn.com
http://www.company.nokia.com

Safety statements in Student Handouts
Presents information to identify and warn of a situation where improper

precautions will result in death or serious (irreversible) personal injury.
Presents information to identify and warn of a situation where improper

precautions could result in death or serious (irreversible) personal injury.
Presents information to warn of a potentially hazardous situation where

improper precautions could result in minor or moderate (reversible) personal
injury. This alert is also used to identify a situation where equipment damage
could occur and help you avoid damaging your equipment.
Presents information to identify and warn of a potentially hazardous situation

to help avoid the possibility of property damage.

Contents 5
Contents
Network Operations and Maintenance Tasks with NetAct (NetAct 16.2)
CourseDescription................................................................................................ 13
Getting started with NetAct ...................................................................................17
ModuleObjectives................................................................................................ 17
NokiaOperationsandSupportSystem................................................................ 17
What is NetAct?..................................................................................................17
Nokia Cloud Application Manager...................................................................... 18
Cloud Network Director ..................................................................................... 19
NetAct Managed Network Model........................................................................20
Knowledge Check: NetAct functionality..............................................................22
Knowledge Check: NetAct Managed Network Model.........................................23
NetActArchitectureandvirtualization....................................................................24
Three tiered Architecture.................................................................................... 24
Virtualization....................................................................................................... 25
NetAct Deployments...........................................................................................27
NetAct Interfaces ............................................................................................... 29
Knowledge Check: Virtualization........................................................................ 30
Knowledge Check: NetAct Deployments............................................................31
AccessingNetAct...................................................................................................32
NetAct Start Page...............................................................................................32
Lab exercise: Connecting to NetAct .................................................................. 34
Lab exercise: NetAct Start Page........................................................................ 35
NetActApplicationCategories.............................................................................. 36
Start page Applications Categories.................................................................... 36
Reporting category............................................................................................. 37
Configuration category....................................................................................... 40
NetAct Configurator............................................................................................ 42
Monitor category.................................................................................................43
User Assistance Category.................................................................................. 46
Administration category...................................................................................... 47
Security category................................................................................................49
Optimization category.........................................................................................50
Lab exercise: Application Categories................................................................. 51
ManagedObjects...................................................................................................52
Components of Network Topology..................................................................... 52
NetActUserAssistance........................................................................................ 55
Operating Documentation...................................................................................55
Nokia Online Service (NOLS).............................................................................58
Online Documentation........................................................................................ 59

Object Information Browser................................................................................ 61

Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (1/2)....................................................... 64
Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (2/2)....................................................... 66
Lab exercise: Object Information Browser..........................................................68
Summary:GettingstartedwithNetAct..................................................................69
Basic Fault Management with NetAct................................................................... 71
ModuleObjectives................................................................................................ 71
FaultManagementBasicConcepts......................................................................71
Strategies for Effective Network Monitoring....................................................... 71
Fault Management Events..................................................................................73
Alarm Flow Supervision......................................................................................75
Defining the Components of Network Topology................................................. 76
Knowledge Check: Fault Management Concepts ............................................. 79
CommonOperationsinNetActMonitorDesktop..................................................80
Fault Management System in NetAct................................................................. 80
Monitor Applications........................................................................................... 82
Common Desktop Functionality..........................................................................83
Managing the Workspace...................................................................................84
Managing tool windows...................................................................................... 85
Editing data and saving the changes..................................................................86
Using the clipboard.............................................................................................87
Using the Properties tool.................................................................................... 88
Using default keyboard shortcuts....................................................................... 89
Customizing keyboard shortcuts........................................................................ 90
Audible Alarms................................................................................................... 91
Lab exercise: NetAct Monitor Desktop............................................................... 94
MonitoringNetwork...............................................................................................96
Fault Management Workflow .............................................................................96
Alarm Monitoring Tools....................................................................................... 97
Alarm Monitoring using Alarm Lists.................................................................... 99
Special Columns in Alarm List..........................................................................101
Alarm Details.................................................................................................... 102
Alarm History.................................................................................................... 103
Warning List......................................................................................................104
Reconfiguring the Alarm and Warning Lists display......................................... 105
Immediate access to Alarm and Object Tasks from Alarm Lists...................... 106
Alarm Monitoring using Network Views ........................................................... 107
Loading Views in Network View....................................................................... 108
Network Views Monitor Modes......................................................................... 110
Switching between Monitor and Edit mode....................................................... 111

Contents 7
Navigating in the view hierarchy....................................................................... 112

Network Objects............................................................................................... 113
Topology view objects.......................................................................................114
Object States.................................................................................................... 116
Administrative State..........................................................................................117
Operational states.............................................................................................118
Maintenance Mode........................................................................................... 119
Tool tip and Notes indicator.............................................................................. 120
Alarm and Subview States............................................................................... 121
Single RAN Site View....................................................................................... 123
Site View...........................................................................................................125
Finding Managed Objects.................................................................................127
Object Explorer.................................................................................................128
Displaying the Managed Objects Attributes......................................................130
Alarm Operations in an Object......................................................................... 132
Searching for managed objects........................................................................135
Managed Objects List.......................................................................................137
Switching the view mode and selecting columns attributes..............................138
Filtering managed object classes..................................................................... 139
Object Search...................................................................................................141
Viewing objects associated with a Maintenance Region or Site.......................143
Navigating to other tools...................................................................................144
Lab exercise: Object Explorer Tool ..................................................................145
Lab exercise: Object Search ........................................................................... 148
Lab exercise: Configuration Database Modification......................................... 151
Lab exercise: Network Views........................................................................... 153
Lab exercise: Alarm Lists and Warning Lists....................................................155
AlarmStatisticsReporting.................................................................................. 157
Alarm Reports Dashboard................................................................................ 157
Alarm Reports Dashboard Configuration..........................................................158
Search Alarms.................................................................................................. 160
Search Result................................................................................................... 163
Scheduling Task List.........................................................................................165
Schedule Task Report...................................................................................... 166
Lab exercise: Alarm Report Dashboard........................................................... 167
Summary:BasicFaultManagement...................................................................169
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct..........................................................171
ModuleObjectives.............................................................................................. 171
AlarmFilteringandReductionofAlarmFlow...................................................... 171
Filtering the Alarm and Warning Lists...............................................................171

Creating an Alarm Filter....................................................................................172

Activating a Filter in Alarm or Warning Lists.....................................................174
Alarm Flow Reduction in NetAct.......................................................................175
Selecting the correct alarm reduction technique.............................................. 176
Implementing feasible alarm reduction techniques.......................................... 177
Configuring Alarm Reduction in NetAct............................................................ 178
Reducing alarms caused by network maintenance with Maintenance mode... 179
Managing Fault Management processing Rules.............................................. 181
Managing Rules and Rule Folders................................................................... 182
General Rules with Rule Editor........................................................................ 185
Alarm Definitions.............................................................................................. 186
Relation Conditions.......................................................................................... 188
Actions..............................................................................................................191
Scheduling Definitions...................................................................................... 193
Predefined Correlation Rules........................................................................... 194
Other Predefined Rules.................................................................................... 196
Rule Analyzer................................................................................................... 199
Lab exercise: Rule Explorer and Rule Editor....................................................201
Lab exercise: Alarm Filters............................................................................... 203
Lab exercise: Alarm Rules................................................................................205
TopologyManagement........................................................................................ 206
Managing Network Views................................................................................. 206
Network Views Monitor Modes......................................................................... 207
Creating and Editing Network Views................................................................ 209
Adding a link between two objects....................................................................211
Linking and unlinking a sub-view......................................................................212
Saving a view................................................................................................... 215
Creating Children Objects Subviews............................................................... 216
Automatic View Generation.............................................................................. 217
Working Set Manager.......................................................................................218
Creating managed objects................................................................................221
Associating a Managed Object to Maintenance Region...................................223
Associating a Managed Object to Site..............................................................224
Editing object attributes in the Properties tool.................................................. 226
Object Deletion................................................................................................. 228
Deleting managed objects in the operational state...........................................229
HandlingofAlarmProcessing............................................................................. 231
Fault Management Pipe Status........................................................................ 231
Manual upload of Alarms..................................................................................233
Deleting Alarms of an Object............................................................................235

Contents 9
Lab exercise: Enabling the FM Pipe Status......................................................236

Summary:AdvancedFaultManagementwithNetAct......................................... 237
Basic Performance Management with NetAct....................................................239
PerformanceManagementPrinciples.................................................................239
Counters, Measurements and Observations.................................................... 239
Logical Counters and KPIs............................................................................... 241
Key Performance Indicators and Reports.........................................................242
Knowledge Check: Performance Management Concepts................................243
NetActPerformanceManagertools.....................................................................244
Performance Management system ..................................................................244
Performance Manager tools............................................................................. 245
Performance Manager start page.....................................................................247
Lab exercise: Performance Manager tools.......................................................249
Knowledge Check: Performance Manager applications...................................250
Create,customizeandgenerateperformancemanagementreportsand
dashboards.......................................................................................................... 251
Creating reports................................................................................................251
Saving and generating reports......................................................................... 255
Lab exercise: Create report for active user equipment with category 5 for
MRBTS............................................................................................................. 257
Creating Dashboards........................................................................................259
Viewing and customizing reports......................................................................261
Report Navigator.............................................................................................. 263
Report Suite Publisher......................................................................................264
Lab exercise: Report Creator........................................................................... 265
Summary:BasicPerformanceManagementwithNetAct....................................266
Advanced Performance Management................................................................. 267
Create,modifyandpublishKPIs........................................................................ 267
KPI Creator introduction................................................................................... 267
Creating a KPI.................................................................................................. 269
Create KPIs...................................................................................................... 274
KPI Publisher....................................................................................................275
Lab exercise: Creating, modifying and publishing KPI .................................... 276
Managepreferencesandschedulereporting...................................................... 277
Preferences...................................................................................................... 277
Report Scheduler .............................................................................................278
Lab exercise: Scheduling a report.................................................................... 279
Setthresholdvaluesforalarms........................................................................... 280
Thresholder and Profiler .................................................................................. 280

Lab exercise: Object selection..........................................................................281

Lab exercise: Time Selection........................................................................... 282
Lab exercise: Alarm Settings............................................................................283
Lab exercise: Threshold information and notification....................................... 284
Createandactivatemeasurementplans............................................................. 285
Administration of Measurements...................................................................... 285
Creating plan.................................................................................................... 287
Activating plan.................................................................................................. 290
Lab exercise: Creating new measurement plan for LTE cell load ................... 292
Summary:AdvancedPerformanceManagement................................................293
Configuration Management..................................................................................295
ConfigurationManagementinNetAct.................................................................295
Overview...........................................................................................................295
Configuration Management Process................................................................ 296
Configurator Basic Concepts............................................................................297
Managed Objects............................................................................................. 298
Working sets.....................................................................................................299
Configuration Types..........................................................................................300
Configuration Rules and Checks...................................................................... 304
NetActConfiguratorApplications.........................................................................305
Configurator Architecture..................................................................................305
CM Editor..........................................................................................................306
CM Analyzer..................................................................................................... 307
CM Rule Editor................................................................................................. 308
Selecting a template type................................................................................. 309
Filling in the templates parameters...................................................................310
CM Operations Manager.................................................................................. 311
CM Reference.................................................................................................. 312
Flexible CM Search.......................................................................................... 313
CM History........................................................................................................314
Hardware Management functionality................................................................ 315
ConfiguratorBasicUserTasks............................................................................ 317
General Workflow............................................................................................. 317
Sychronize Network Data................................................................................. 318
Hardware Configuration Upload / Export..........................................................321
Viewing Actual Configuration............................................................................323
CM Editor: View Filter.......................................................................................326
Managing Working Sets................................................................................... 328
Selecting Working Set to be used as filter........................................................330

Contents 11
Adding managed objects to working set(s).......................................................332

Creating working set from CM Query............................................................... 334
Modifying Parameters via Working Set............................................................ 335
Deleting Objects from the NetAct CM Database ............................................. 340
Exporting Configuration.................................................................................... 345
Export / Import data with CM Editor..................................................................347
Exporting relationship plan using CM Editor - Table Editor.............................. 348
Importing relationship plan using CM Editor.....................................................351
Displaying plans............................................................................................... 352
Mass parameter changes and plan creation.................................................... 353
Changing Mass Parameter...............................................................................354
Creating Plan....................................................................................................357
Checking Plans.................................................................................................359
Provisioning Plans............................................................................................ 362
Procedure: Provisioning plans..........................................................................364
Comparing plans to actual configuration.......................................................... 366
Searching Managed Objects with Flexible CM Search.................................... 368
Operations with CM History..............................................................................370
Generating report on parameter changes........................................................ 371
Viewing historical configuration snapshots of NEs........................................... 374
Lab exercise: HW Inventory Management....................................................... 376
Lab exercise: CM tools..................................................................................... 377
Optimizer............................................................................................................. 380
Optimizer Overview.......................................................................................... 380
Optimizer main user interface...........................................................................382
Summary:ConfigurationManagement................................................................ 386
License management in NetAct...........................................................................387
NetActlicensingconcepts....................................................................................387
NetAct Licensing...............................................................................................387
NetActsoftwareassetprotection......................................................................... 390
NetAct hard lock............................................................................................... 390
LicenseManagertochecklicenses....................................................................395
License Management Overview ...................................................................... 395
Licensing Concepts: Pool License....................................................................398
Licensing Concepts: License Sets....................................................................399
License States.................................................................................................. 400
License Management Tasks............................................................................. 402
License Import.................................................................................................. 403
Viewing Licenses..............................................................................................405

Uploading Licenses.......................................................................................... 408

Exporting Licenses........................................................................................... 409
Distributing Licenses........................................................................................ 410
Feature Templates............................................................................................414
Network Element Audit against Feature Template........................................... 415
License Pool Substitution................................................................................. 416
Licenses Reports..............................................................................................417
Viewing Recent Operations.............................................................................. 419
SoftwareAssetMonitoring...................................................................................420
Introduction to Software Asset Monitoring........................................................420
Software Asset Monitoring Notifications........................................................... 423
Software Asset Monitoring Reports.................................................................. 424
LTEandSRANLicenses..................................................................................... 427
LTE and SRAN License Management..............................................................427
Summary:LicensemanagementinNetAct......................................................... 430
Software Management.......................................................................................... 431
SoftwareManagement.........................................................................................431
Software Management in NetAct......................................................................431
Software Manager............................................................................................ 433
Software Manager Operations..........................................................................435
Software Manager Graphical User Interface.................................................... 436
Network Software Status.................................................................................. 437
Viewing Details of a Managed Object...............................................................439
Uploading software configuration information from NE to NetAct.................... 441
Network Operations- Tasks.............................................................................. 444
Software Archive.............................................................................................. 446
Attaching / Viewing Software Package Documentation....................................448
Viewing Compatible Managed Objects.............................................................450
Changing status of software package in Software Archive.............................. 452
NetworkElementBackup.................................................................................... 454
Network Elements Remote Backup from NetAct..............................................454
Network Elements Backup Archive.................................................................. 455
Summary:SoftwareManagement....................................................................... 457

CourseDescription 13
Course Description
Course name
NetworkOperationsandMaintenanceTaskswithNetAct(NetAct16.2)
Target Group
Audience
Thiscoursewascreatedfor:
Personnelwhowhooperateandmaintain:
TelecomnetworksusingNetAct.
NetActwhentheyareNetActKeyusers.
Objectives
Uponcompletionofthismodule,theparticipantwillbeableto:
ExplaintheroleoftheNetActinthemobilenetwork.
DescribetheNetActarchitectureandvirtualizationconcept.
AccesstheNetActstartpage.
DescribethemainfunctionalitiesofNetAct.
Describethecomponentsofthemanagedobject.
UseNetActDocumentation.
ExplainhowtouseFaultManagementandTopologybasedtools.
UsetheCommonDesktopwithinMonitortoarrangeacustomizeduser
interface.
UsetheNetActMonitorToolstofindproblemswithintheNetworkandbegin
tofindasolutiontofixthem.
Createreportsonthemostfrequentalarmsandthemostalarmednetwork
elementsinthenetworkorinapartofit.
Managethealarmprocessingusingalarmfilteringandalarmreductionin
NetAct.
ManagetheNetActTopology.
RevisethestatusofthealarmsprocessinginNetAct.
ExplainthepurposeofPerformanceManagementdescribewhatisaKPI.
ExplainthePerformanceManagertools.
dashboards.
Create,modifyandpublishKPIs.
Managepreferencesandschedulereporting.
Setthresholdvaluesforalarms.
Createandactivatemeasurementplans.
ExplainthepurposeofConfigurationManagement.
ListtheNetActConfiguratorapplicationsandexplaintheirpurpose.

UsetheConfiguratortoolsforexecutingbasictasksforconfiguration
management.
ExplaintheRadioOptimizationProcessinNetActandthemain
functionalitiesofOptimizer.
DescribeNokialicensingconcepts.
DescribeNetActSoftwareAssetProtection.
UseLicenseManagertochecklicense.
UseSoftwareAssetmonitoring.
DescribeLTEandSRANlicense.
UseSoftwareManagerfornetworkelementsoftwaresynchronization,
reportingandimport.
Performbackuptasksforthesupportednetworkelements.
Duration
4days
Delivery method
CLT
Prerequisites
Thefollowingtrainingcourse(s)orknowledgeisrecommended:
PCliteracy
Workingexperienceintelecomsenvironment
Learning Modules
GettingstartedwithNetAct
BasicFaultManagementwithNetAct
AdvancedFaultManagementwithNetAct
BasicPerformanceManagementwithNetAct
AdvancedPerformanceManagement
ConfigurationManagement
LicensemanagementinNetAct
SoftwareManagement

Learning module objectives
Getting started with NetAct
DescribetheNetActarchitectureandthevirtualizationconcept.

CourseDescription 15
Basic Fault Management with NetAct

interface.
UsetheNetworkMonitorToolstofindproblemswithintheNetworkandbegin
tofindasolutiontofixthem.
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct

NetAct.
Basic Performance Management with NetAct

ExplainthepurposeofPerformanceManagementanddescribewhatisa
KPI.
dashboards.
Advanced Performance Management

Configuration Management
management.
ExplaintheRadioOptimizationProcessinNetActandthemainfunctionalities
ofOptimizer.
License management in NetAct

DescribeNetActlicensingconcepts.
UseLicenseManagertochecklicenses.
UseSoftwareAssetMonitoring.
DescribeLTEandSRANLicenses.

Software Management
reportingandimport.

GettingstartedwithNetAct 17
Getting started with NetAct

Module Objectives
DescribetheNetActarchitectureandthevirtualizationconcept.
Nokia Operations and Support System

What is NetAct?
NetActistheNetworkElementmanagerintheNokiaandOSSportfolio.
PerformanceManager,AdvancedMonitorandAdvancedConfiguratorareusingthe
sameplatformasNetActandhavesomeapplicationsincommon.
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheNokiaandOSSportfolio.
Figure 1: Nokia and OSS portfolio

Nokia Cloud Application Manager

ThefollowingfigureillustratesthekeyfeaturesofNokiaCloudApplicationManager.
Figure 2: Nokia Cloud Application Manager Overview

Cloud Network Director

ThefollowingfigureillustratestheCloudNetworkDirector.
Figure 3: Nokia Cloud Network Director

NetAct Managed Network Model

TheroleofNetActinmanaginganetworkcanbeclassifiedintotwocategories:
NetActoperationsystem
NetActGlobalLevel(umbrella)products
Aclusterisanetworkedgroupingofoneormoreserversanddiskdrivesthatare
designedtosupporteachotherifafailureoccursinoneserverornetwork
component.Aclusterconsistsofseveralco-operatingnodesthatareinterconnected
inaredundantwaytodistributeinformationandresources.
ANetActclusterisahierarchical,highlyavailable,andsecuredcomputingsystem
thatconsistsofmultipleinternalcomponents,suchasservers,asharedstorage
system,LANswitches,androuters.Itcontainsthenecessarysecuritycontrol,such
asencryptioncapabilityindatacommunication,firewallprotection,andahardened
systemplatform.
Regional Cluster
ARegionalClustermanagesaspecificregionandprovidesaviewtoaparticular
networkareaortechnology.Thenetworkelementsofacertainsub-networkare
connectedtoandmanagedbyaRegionalCluster,whichcontainsthenetwork
managementsystemforthatregion.
NetActcancontainseveralRegionalClusters,whichcanbeconnectedtothe
NetActProductsthatworkinaGloballevel.
EachRegionalClusterrunsadatabasethatstoresthedataarrivingfromthe
networkelementsinthemanagedregion.IntheRegionalClusteryoudonothave
accesstothedatathatarrivesfromnetworkelementsbelongingtoanotherRegional
Cluster.Youcanhaveanoverviewofallthemanagedobjectsinthenetworkonlyin
theGloballevel.
Global Level Products

TheGlobalLevelProductsareumbrellasolutionsthatprovideanentireviewofthe
networkinareasofFaultManagement,PerformanceManagementand
ConfigurationManagement.
Thegloballevelproductsareintendedforcentralized,network-widemanagement
tasks.Theyarenotconnecteddirectlytothenetworkelementsbutcommunicate
withoneormoreRegionalClusters.Becausetheseplatformsareconnectedtoall
theRegionalClusters,youcanhaveaviewofallthenetworkelements.
MultipleNetActinstancesandotherNetworkManagementSystemsorother
vendors,forexampleMVI,canbeconnectedtoasingleNetActGlobalProduct
instance.
TherearethreeNetActGloballevelProducts:
NetActAdvancedMonitor
NetActAdvancedConfigurator
NokiaPerformanceManager
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheNetActManagedNetworkModel.

Figure 4: NetAct Managed Network Model

Knowledge Check: NetAct functionality

ThissectiontestthestudentsondifferentiationofthefunctionsofNetActProducts
forRegionalClustersandGlobalLevel.
1. WhatisthemainfunctionalityofNetAct?
Notes
1. __________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

Knowledge Check: NetAct Managed Network Model

ThissectiontestthestudentsondifferentiationofthefunctionsofNetActProducts
forRegionalClustersandGlobalLevel.
1. WhatistherelationshipbetweenNetAct(regionallevel)andtheNetAct
AdvancedMonitor,AdvancedConfiguratorandNokiaPerformanceManager
Systems?
Notes
1. __________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

NetAct Architecture and virtualization

Three tiered Architecture
ThehardwareplatformofNetActconsistsofthreemainparts,namelyservers,
storagedevicesandnetworkequipment,suchasswitchesandrouters.
NetActssoftwarearchitectureisthree-tiered:thetiersare
Presentation tier Presentationtierhostsclientapplications.Theclient
applicationsaccessBusinesslogictierandreside
typicallyonauserworkstation,forexample,alaptopora
desktopcomputer.Therecommendedworkstationisan
officePCwitheitherWindowsorLinuxoperatingsystem.
Business logic tier Businesslogictierhoststhebusinesslogicanddata

accessspecificforNetAct.
Data tier DatatierhostsNetActdatastorages,thatis,thedatabase

anddirectoryservers.
BusinesslogicandDatatiersareseparatedfromPresentationtierbyfirewallsand
resideinsidethesecuredomain.
BothBusinesslogictierandDatatierutilizevirtualmachinesrunningononeor
morehostserversdedicatedtoNetAct.
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheNetActarchitecture.
Figure 5: NetAct Architecture

Virtualization
WithNetAct,wearesteppingintoavirtualizedenvironment.Inavirtualized
infrastructure(VI),softwareissetupinsuchawaythatitcanoperateindependently
fromtheunderlyinghardware.Thephysicalresourcesofmultiplemachinesare
sharedacrossthewholeinfrastructure,andtheyactasaresourcepool.InaVI,the
physicalhardwareresourcesaredividedintosmallerunits,virtualmachines(VMs)
thathavetheirownallocatedvirtualCPUandmemory.
Thevirtualizationlayer(HWvirtualizationcapability)isprovidedbytheVMware
hypervisor.ServerssimplyaddI/O,CPUandRAMcomputingresourcestotheHW
poolandvirtualizationprovidesalogicalviewofdata,computingpower,storage
capacityandotherserverresources.
Therearenolongerdedicatedhardwareroles.Instead,NetActapplications,
mediations,andservicesrunningonanumberofVMsarepoweredbyahardware
resourcepool.EachVMisdimensionedandoptimizedfortheserviceorservices
runninginit.Inthisway,thesameNetActfunctionscanbeprovidedbutwithbetter
highavailabilityandscalabilityoptions.
ThefollowingfigureillustratesthevirtualenvironmentofNetActarchitecture.
Figure 6: NetAct Architecture - Virtual environment
Benefits of virtualization in NetAct

VirtualizationinNetActbringsthefollowingbenefits:
ReducedCAPEXandOPEXbyconsolidation,forexample,improvedHW
utilization,andthepossibilitytoco-locateNokiaproducts.
Nearzerodowntimeupgrade:Upgradecanbeperformedbycloningthesystem
withinthevirtualizedinfrastructure.Upgradesareperformedonthecloneside
andthenafterupgradetesting,theclonesystembecomesthelivesystem.
Zerodowntimehardwaremaintenanceandcapacitycanbeaddedwithout
businessimpact.
Efficienthighavailabilityanddisasteravoidancesolutionsbyusingshared
redundancyresources.
AllHWresourcesareinefficientuse:Nomorefixedamountofphysicalservers
orstandbynodesasvirtualmachinesaredistributedbyload.Inaddition,
decouplingNetActand3rdpartyHW/SWmakesHWplanningmoreflexible.
Increasedelasticity,inotherwords,scalabilityinavirtualenvironment.
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthebenefitsofvirtualization.

Figure 7: Benefits of virtualization
Scalability in virtualized infrastructure

ScalabilityisanimportantfeatureofthevirtualNetActenvironmentsincethereare
softwarecomponentsthatcanbelocatedonmorethanoneVM,andconversely,
oneVMcancontainmorethanonesoftwarecomponent.
Iftheloadincreasesbeyondavirtualmachinesabilitytohandletheload,thenthe
softwarecomponentand/orvirtualmachinemustbescaledtocopewiththe
increaseddemand.However,notallsoftwarecomponentsscaleinasimilarway:
Somesoftwarecomponentsaredesignedtoscalehorizontally,whichmeans
thatadditionalvirtualmachinesneedtobeprovisionedinordertoenablethe
softwarecomponenttodistributeitsload.Horizontalscalabilityisenabledby
placingsoftwarecomponentsbehindloadbalancers.
Othersoftwarecomponentsscalebettervertically,whichmeansthatadditional
resources(CPUandmemory)needtobeallocatedtothevirtualmachinewhere
thesoftwarecomponentishosted.

NetAct Deployments
NetActisdeliveredonthreestandardconfigurations:Small,Mainstream,andLarge
usingHPbladeservers.
Table 1: NetAct Deployments: EMC solution

NetAct Server Model No. of Storage System
Configuration Blades
Small 23 HPBL460cGen91p12c 4 VNX Small:
VMs 96GB VNX5200:3x100GB
Optional extra 1xIntelE5-2680v3twelve SSDSSF+9x600GB
15 VMs coreprocessors96GB SASSFF+13x1TB
memory NL_SASSFF
Diskless 3PAR7200:8x480GB
2x10GbELAN;fccontroller SSD+8x900GBSAS
SFF
(16G)
VNX Backup:
VNX5200:5x600GB
SASSFF+Nx
(8x1TBNL-SASSFF)
Mainstream HPBL460cGen92p8c 6 VNX Medium:

29 VMs 128GB VNX5200:5x100GB
Optional extra 2xIntelE5-2680v3eightcore SSDSSF+
22 VMs processors128GBmemory 13x600GBSASSFF
Diskless +21x1TBNL_SAS
SFF
2x10GbELAN;fccontroller
VNX Backup:
(16G)
VNX5200:5x600GB
SASSFF+Nx
(8x1TBNL-SASSFF)
Large 35 HPBL460cGen92p12c 6 VNX Large:

VMs 256GB
VNX5200:5x200GB
Optional extra 2xIntelE5-2680v3twelve SSDSSF+
26 VMs coreprocessors256GB 17x600GBSASSFF
memory +27x1TBNL_SAS
Diskless SFF
2x10GbELAN;fccontroller VNX Backup:

(16G) VNX5200:5x600GB
SASSFF+Nx
(8x1TBNL-SASSFF)

Table 2: NetAct Deployments: HP solution

NetAct Server Model No. of Storage System
Configuration Blades
Small 23 HPBL460cGen91p12c 4 HP Small:
VMs 96GB 3PAR7200:8x480GB
Optional extra 1xIntelE5-2680v3twelve SSD+8x900GBSAS
15 VMs coreprocessors96GB SFF
memory HP Backup:
Diskless
P2040G4:6x2TB
2x10GbELAN;fccontroller MDLLFF
(16G)
Mainstream HPBL460cGen92p8c 6 HP Medium:

29 VMs 128GB 3PAR7200:8x480GB
Optional extra 2xIntelE5-2680v3eightcore SSD+16x900GB
22 VMs processors128GBmemory SASSFF
Diskless HP Backup:
2x10GbELAN;fccontroller P2040G4:6x2TB
(16G) MDLLFF
Large 35 HPBL460cGen92p12c 6 HP Large:

VMs 256GB 3PAR7200:
Optional extra 2xIntelE5-2680v3twelve 12x480GBSSD+
26 VMs coreprocessors256GB 24x900GBSASSFF
memory HP Backup:
Diskless P2040G4:6x2TB
2x10GbELAN;fccontroller MDLLFF
(16G)

NetAct Interfaces
InNetAct,interface-relatedissuesareveryimportant,sincedependenciesare
controlledviainterfaces,andcontrolleddependenciesareakeyenablerof
modularity-animportantpropertyoftheNetActarchitecture.
NetActcanbeintegratedintoexternalsystemsviaNorthboundinterfaces.External
systemsareemployedforsimilarmonitoring,reportingandnetworkplanningtasks
asNetAct,butatahigherabstractionlevel.Thesehigher-levelsystemscanbe
eitherNokiaorthird-partymanagementsystems.
Lower-levelsystemsornetworkelementscanbeintegratedintoNetActvia
Southboundinterfaces.Again,theselower-levelsystemscanbeeitherNokiaor
third-partyelementmanagementsystems.
Mediationsareresponsiblefortheinterworkingorconversionbetweentheprotocols
ordataformatsusedinthelower-levelorhigher-levelsystemsandtheprotocolsor
dataformatsusedintheNetActsystem.
Protocolsusedinthelower-levelorhigher-levelsystemsare,forinstance,SNMP,
SOAPorHTTP,anddataformatsare,forinstance,ASCIIorXML.
Figure 8: NetAct Interfaces - Northbound and Southbound
RefertotheNetAct documentationtocheckwhatarethesupportedfunctions
foreachNetworkElementsandinformationontheNorthboundinterfaces.

Knowledge Check: Virtualization

ThissectiontestthestudentsonthedescriptionofNetActvirtualization.
1. Listtwobenefitsofvirtualization.
Notes
1. __________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________

Knowledge Check: NetAct Deployments

ThissectiontestthestudentsonthedifferentiationofthethreeNetActhardware
deploymentsandexplainationonhowsystemscalabilityisimplemented.
1. ListthethreeconfigurationtypesofNetAct.Howisthesystemsizescaled
takingintoaccountthevirtualization?
Notes
1. __________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

Accessing NetAct
NetAct Start Page
NetActStartPageisacentralizedlaunchpadforstartingNetActuserinterface
applications.YoucanstartalltheNetActapplicationsthathavebeenconfiguredand
forwhichyouhavepermissiontolaunchfromNetActStart.
NetActusesSingleSign-On(SSO)foraccessingapplicationsthroughNetActStart.
TobeabletoaccessapplicationsthroughNetActStart,ausermusthaveavalid
usernameandpassword.Theuseralsomustbegrantedthepermissionsfor
accessingtheneededapplications.Dependingonthepermissionsgrantedforthe
user,alistofpublishedapplicationsisvisibletotheuser.
Fromtheright-handdropdownmenutheusercanselectbetweentwodifferent
views.
Folderviewshowsthedifferentfragmentsasfolders.Theapplicationsaregrouped
intothefollowingfunctionalareas:
Administration:Applicationsforadministeringadaptations.
Configuration:NetActCMapplications,LicenseManagerandSoftware
Manager.
Optimization:ApplicationsfornetworkOptimization.
Monitoring:NetActMonitor.
Reporting:NetActReporter.
Security:Certificate,UserManagementandNEUserManagementapplications.
UserAssistance:Operatingdocumentationlibrary.
ClickingtheOnlineHelpiconopenstheOnlineHelpBrowser.ByselectingShow all
applicationsfromthedropdownmenutheusercanseealltheapplicationsinone
viewandaccessthembymouseclick.
AlltheJavaapplicationsareinstalledontheapplicationserverclusterwhenNetAct
isdeployed.WhenaJavaRichClientisaccessedforthefirsttime,itisdownloaded
bytheJavaServiceWrapper(JWS)touserworkstationandlaunchedfortheuser.
Thenexttimeitisaccessed,theapplicationisstartedfromthelocalJWScache.
JWScheckstheversionoftheapplicationeverytimeitislaunchedontheuser
workstation,andifnecessary,updatestheapplicationfromtheapplicationserver.
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheaccessingNetAct.

Figure 9: Accessing NetAct
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheNetActstartpage.
Figure 10: NetAct Start Page
New applications visualization modes

Thefollowingfigureillustratesthestartpageviewmodes.
Figure 11: Start Page View modes

Lab exercise: Connecting to NetAct

Context
ThissectiontestthestudentsforsettinguptheconnectiontoNetActsystemand
functionsoftheNetActStartPage.
Figure 12: Lab exercise: Connecting to NetAct
Procedure
1 Logintolab.
2 OpensessiontoNetActsystemasomcuser.
Result of this step

DescribetheaccesstoNetAct.
DidyouneedtoinstallNetActSWinyourlocalmachinetoaccessthesystem?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Lab exercise: NetAct Start Page

Context
ThissectiontestthestudentsonsettingupconnectiontoNetActsystemand
functionsoftheNetActStartPage.
Figure 13: Lab exercise: NetAct Start Page
Procedure
1 LogintoNetActandnavigatetoStart Page.
Result of this step

DescribethepurposeoftheNetActStartPage.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
2 ChangethevisualizationmodeofNetActStartPagefromShow All Application

toShow Applications by folder.
Result of this step

Whatisthedifferencebetweenthetwovisualizationmodes?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

NetAct Application Categories

Start page Applications Categories
EachapplicationthatausercanlaunchfromNetActisgroupedintothefollowing
categoriesaccordingtowhatkindoftasksitisusedfor:
Table 3: NetAct Applications Categories

Categories Description
Administration ApplicationsusedfortheadministrationofMediationsand
AdaptationsinNetAct.ProvidesaswellaccesstoElement
Managers.
Deployment ForAddOnsManagement.AddOnsareenterpriseapplications
thatcanbedeployedtotheNetActserver.
Configuration Setofapplicationsusedtomanagethenetworkconfiguration.
Optimization Setofapplicationsusedtooptimizethenetworkconfiguration.
Monitoring Thisisthegroupforfaultmanagementapplicationstomonitor
andtroubleshootthemanagednetwork.
Reporting Usetheseapplicationstostartmeasurementsandgenerate
reportsontheperformanceofthemanagednetwork.
Security ApplicationsforUserAccountManagement,NetworkElements
UserManagementandCertificationAuthority(Certificates
generation).
UserAssistance ApplicationstoaccessUserDocumentationandInformation
AdaptationBrowser.
Someapplicationsareoptionalandrequirealicense,otherwisetheyarenotvisible
inNetActGUI.Theapplicationsaregroupedintofunctionalityareas.
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheNetActapplicationcategories.
Figure 14: NetAct Application Categories

Reporting category
ThePerformance ManagerintheReportingcategoryisdescribedasfollows:
Performance Manager
PerformanceManagerisacentralized,multi-vendor,multi-technologydatareporting
solution,providingeasyandaccurateinformationonnetworkwideperformance,
usageandqualitystatistics.
Theneweasy-to-useGUIallowsadvancedreporting,thresholdsupervision,profiling
andtrendingonlongtermrawandaggregateddata.ByusingPerformance
ManagertoolstheNetActusersareableto:
Createandeditreports,forprivateorpublicusage
CreateandeditKPIs,forprivateorpublicusage
CrowseforexistingKPIsandreports
Customizedashboardswithtablesandmultiplecharttypes
SchedulereportsanddistributethemthroughemailinCSVorXLSformat
Customizethewebportallookandfeelandsetupyourpreferences
PerformanceManagerismultivendor-capableandcollectsdatafromtheentire
networkthatconsistsofnetworkelementsfromNokiaandfromothervendors.
PerformanceManagerincludesalsoseveralready-madereportpackages.
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheReportingcategory.
Figure 15: NetAct Applications Categories - Reporting
Administration of Measurements (AoM)

AoMapplicationenablesthePMAdministratorusertomanage(enable/disable)
measurementsonnetworkelementstoallowdatacollectionfromnetworkelements
toNetAct.
Thisapplicationcanbeusedtoview,create,modifyanddeletemeasurementplans
andtemplates.
Measurementplanscanbeusedtostartandstopthemeasurementsonthenetwork
elements.AoMalsohelpstouploadmeasurementplansfromthenetworkelements
toNetAct.
Thistoolcontainsthefollowingtabs:

NetworkOverview:Itenablestheusertoviewtheactivationstatusof
measurementsinthenetwork.
Plans:Itenablestheusertocreate,modify,delete,activateanddeactivate
plans.
Templates:Itenablestheusertocreate,modifyanddeleteatemplate.Italso
allowstheusertocreateaplanbasedonanexistingtemplate.
UploadOverview:Itenablestheusertoviewasummaryofalltheupload
operationscarriedoutduringaspecifictimeperiodforspecificNETypes.
Thresholder and Profiler

ThresholderandProfilerareNetActapplicationsthatareintegratedwithNetAct
PerformanceManager:theyallowsettingandmanagingthresholdsorprofiles,
respectively,forthecountersorKPIscalculatedinPerformanceManager.
ProfilercapitalizesontheobservationthatthemeasuredvaluesofaKPIoftenfollow
apattern.Profilertracksthispatternandprovidesareliableapproximationofthe
typicalvalueoftheKPIbasedonaweek'sdata.
Nevertheless,theusercandefineathresholdandaprofileforthesameKPI
independentlyfromeachother:ifauserenablethresholdingandprofilingbutthe
thresholdisnotaprofiledthreshold,ProfilerstillmaintainstheprofilefortheKPI.
ThiswayausercanmonitortheKPIactively(withthethresholdandbyreceiving
violationnotifications)andatthesametimeusercanalsogatherlonger-term
informationontheKPI(withtheprofile).
Software Asset Monitoring

SoftwareAssetMonitoringapplicationcollectsandprocessestheconfigurationand
measurementdatabasedoncustomerspecificsettings.Itgeneratesareportonthe
featureusageandforwardstheformattedmonitoringdatatothecustomerand
NokiaCustomerTeamthroughanencryptede-mail.Theencryptede-mailcanbe
readandvalidatedbyCustomerandNokiaCustomerTeamonly.Thereportonthe
featureusageisusedtogenerateaninvoice.Onesoftwaremonitoringreport
comprisesinformationrelatedtooneNetActcluster.
ForLTEandFlexiDirect,softwaremonitoringistheonlywayofusage
controlasLicenseKeysarenotimplementedforthesetechnologies.
SoftwareAssetMonitoringenablesspeedandefficiencywithfastsoftware
activationsthroughbypassingthepre-activationprocurementprocess,andapplying
alternativepricingmodelswhereinvoicingisbasedonnetworkconfigurationoron
usedfunctionality.ThisresultsinOPEXsavingsandinanincreasedflexibility.
ThefollowingfigureillustratesthefunctionsofPerformanceManagement.

Figure 16: Performance Management Functions

Configuration category
ThisfollowingsectiondescribestheNetActConfigurator.
NetAct Configurator
NetActConfiguratorisacomponentinthescalableNetActframeworkforoperating
mobilenetworks.Configuratorgivesaccesstoreal-timenetworkconfigurationdata
andprovidestoolstomanagenetworkconfiguration.Thebasicfunctionalityof
NetActConfiguratoristodefineandmanageparameterdatainthenetwork.
Networkarchitecturecanbefunctionallygroupedintotheaccessnetworkandthe
corenetwork.Theaccessnetworkhandlesallradio-relatedfunctionalitywhilethe
corenetworkisresponsibleforroutingcallsanddataconnectionstoexternal
networks.WithConfigurator,theaccessnetworkandcorenetworkaremanagedin
acentralizedway.
ThemainfunctionalitiesofConfiguratorare:
Storingthenetworkparametersinthedatabase
Dataexchangewithexternaltools
Setting,modifying,viewing,andcomparingnetworkconfigurationdata
Massmodificationsonthenetwork:integratingsites,extendingandoptimizing
thenetwork
Smallscaletuningofthenetworkconfiguration
Software Manager, License Manager

SoftwareManagerandLicenseManagerarecentralizedNetActapplicationsforthe
networkmanagementofSoftware(NetActandNEsSoftware)andLicenses(NetAct
andNE'slicenses).
Self-Organizing Networks (SON) Scheduler

SONSchedulerallowsusertoviewandconfigureoperationsrelatedtoWideband
CodeDivisionMultipleAccess(WCDMA)FlexiBTS(s)aswellasautoconnection
andautoconfigurationfeaturesbothinthenetworkandplannedconfiguration.SON
SchedulerfunctionalitymanagesthefourfollowingfeaturesinLong-TermEvolution
(LTE)networks:
PeripheralComponentInterconnect(PCI)ConflictResolution
MobilityRobustness
SynchronizationofInter-RadioAccessTechnologies(RAT)Neighbors
OptimizationofIntraLTENeighborRelations
Itprovidesadvancedfilteringoptionstoimprovedisplayingrequiredinformationas
wellasanarrayofschedulingoptions.
Plan Editor
PlanEditorallowstheusertoeditradionetworkplansoffline,makingitpossibleto
modifyallnetworkparameterslocallyonaPC.Changestothenetworktopologyor
eithersingleparameterchangesormassoperationsonlargegroupsofparameters
canbeplannedinaformatthatcanbeusedbynetworkplanningandmanagement
systems.

PlanEditorGraphicalUserInterface(GUI)displaysmanagedobjectsina
hierarchicalorderandprovidesadrag-and-dropfunctionalitytoeasetheplanning
work.
PlanEditorincludesareportingfunctionality,ParameterDictionary,foronline
referenceandhelponparametervalueranges,andthepossibilitytostoreseveral
defaultparametersets.
Figure 17: NetAct Applications Categories - Configuration

NetAct Configurator
ThissectiondescribestheNetActconfigurator.
Maintaining up-to-date picture of the network

Workingwiththelatestdataisapreconditionforexploitingthefullpotentialofany
network.Configuratornotonlyretrievesconfigurationdatafromnetworkelements
wheneverdesired.Italsosavesthisinformationtoallowoperatorscreateanarchive
ofconfigurationstagestogivethemvitalinsightandthusenablesthemtooptimize
theirnetwork.Built-inNorthboundinterfacecapabilityallowsfortheexportofdata
towardsthird-partypost-processingapplications.
Configuring the network

Configuratorprovidesofflineplanningcapabilitiestopreventanymistakestobe
madeonarunningnetwork.Currentandplannedconfigurationscanbecompared
toidentifythebestsolution.Plausibilitycheckspreventerrorsfromthestart.An
Importfunctionalityisavailablewhichenablestoprocessnetworkplanswhichhave
beenpreparedoutsideofConfiguratorinanoperatorsplanningenvironment.
IntheconfigurephaseallthreeConfiguratorcomponentsworkhand-in-hand:
CMEditorisusedfordisplayingconfigurationdataandforcomfortableeditingof
datawhencreatinganetworkplan.
CMAnalyzerisusedforusecasespecificrunningofconsistencychecks.
CMOperationsManagercomesintothegamewhenexternallycreatednetwork
plansareimportedintotheConfiguratorapplicationforfurtherprocessing.With
theCommandManager,CMOperationsManagerallowsthedirectexecutionof
commandsandcommandfiles(on-demandorscheduled)tonetworkelements.
Onceanewconfigurationhasbeendefinedautomaticdeltacommandgeneration
takescareofspellingoutallnecessarychangesintherelevantnetworkelement
specificdataformats.Controlleddeploymentofalladministrationisprovidedbythe
provisioningcapability.
Theautomationofalldownloadtasksensuresnetworkconsistencyandminimizes
operationalefforts,allowingacompletetransparencyofallplanningandwith
minimizedmarginforerror.AllprovisioningstepsarecontrolledbytheCM
OperationsManager.
Figure 18: Configurator Functionality

Monitor category
TheMonitoring isdescribedasfollows:
NetAct Monitor
NetActMonitorprovidesanewdesktopandanewtoolsetformonitoringtasks.The
faultmanagementmonitoringtoolsinNetActMonitorcanbeusedtomanagealarms
fromvariousnetworkelementsandtypes,toperformrootcauseanalysis,to
troubleshootfaultsthatcausedisruptionsinnetworkservices,andtoimprovethe
qualityofthenetworkservicesforsubscribers.
NetActMonitorprovides:
Listandviewbasedalarmmonitoring
Objectmanagementtools
Rulemanagementforautomatedalarmhandlingandcorrelation
Alarmfiltering
Alarmforwardingtoe-mail
TroubleTicketmanagementtools
OSS/JTroubleTicketNorthboundinterface
3GPPCORBAFaultManagementNorthboundinterface
ApplicationlaunchforallNetActtools,includingNetActOSS5levelapplications
NetActMonitortoolsetacceleratesthemonitoringworkflowbyprovidingcentralized
monitoringtoolsonasinglescreenfordifferentnetworks.
Alarmfilteringandcorrelationruleshelptoautomatetheregularfaultmanagement
actionsandreducethealarmflowtoNetActMonitoralarmtoolsandupperlevel
systemsintegratedthrough3GPPCORBAFaultManagementNorthboundinterface.
OSS/JTroubleTicketinterfacetogetherwithtroubletickettoolsenhancesthe
troubletickethandlingwithinmonitoringtools.
NetActMonitorsupportsuserspecificcustomizationontoolviewsandtoolset-ups
anditspermissionmanagementsupportsusergroupspecifictoolandoperation
permissions.
WiththisintegratedtoolsetNetActMonitorprovidesexcellentsupportfordaily
monitoringtasksinoperationshelpingoperatortogainOPEXsavingswhentools
areinfulluse.
Figure 20: NetAct Applications Categories - Monitoring
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheAlarmReportDashboard.

Figure 21: Monitoring Category: Alarm Reports Dashboard
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthetroubleshootingwithmonitortools.
Figure 22: Troubleshooting with Monitor Tools
Trace Viewer
TracingisaconceptnameforanoptionalNetActfunctionality,whichisperformedby
theTraceViewerapplication,andallowsthetracingofmobileequipmentand
subscribersinmobilenetworks.
TraceViewerenablesglobaltracing,whichmeansthatausercantracean
InternationalMobileEquipmentIdentity(IMEI)numberorInternationalMobile
SubscriberIdentity(IMSI)numberthroughoutthenetwork.Additionally,the
TraceViewerapplicationprovidesamechanismforadministering,collectingand
viewinginformationrelatedtoaspecificsubscriberormobileequipment.
TraceViewercanactivatetracesinseveralnetworkelements,includingNokiaRNC,
FlexiNS.Inaddition,TraceViewerreceiveseventsfromNokiaBSCandMGW
networkelements.
TracedataiscollectedfromthenetworkelementsandissenttoTraceViewer,where
itcanbeviewedintheformofreports.
TraceViewercanbealsousedtosupportnetworkplanningandoptimization.After
changingthenetworkparameters,userscaneasilyverifythatallsitesareworking
asplanned,byusingTraceViewersgraphicalandtextualpresentations.Thistoolis
alsousedforreal-timetroubleshootingtofollowthefunctionalityofthenetworkand
possibleproblemswithacall.

Operatorscanusetracingtotroubleshootproblemswithmobileequipmentor
subscribersconnectionsandtofollowupcustomercomplaints.Tracingcanbealso
usedtomonitorthenetworkandtochecktheresultsofthenetworkoptimization.

User Assistance Category

Thefollowingsectiondescribestheuserassistancecategory.
Operating Documentation
NetActoperatingdocumentationcontainstheuserassistanceneededforthedaily
networkmanagementoperations.ThedocumentationisavailableonNetActuser
workstationsinabrowsableformat.TheNetActapplicationOnlineHelpsare
availableinthesameNetActOperatingDocumentationset,andtheycanbe
launchedviacontext-sensitivelaunchfromtheNetActapplications.
Object Information Browser (OIB)

ObjectInformationBrowser(OIB)isanapplicationusedforbrowsingofalarm,
measurement,counter,andbothradioandcorenetworkparameterdescriptions,as
wellasobjectclassinformationandchangesbetweennetworkelementreleases.
OIBuserinterfaceprovidesfollowingfunctionsforutilizingtheadaptationreference
information:
Search
View
Browse
Compare
ExporttospreadsheetorXML
Print
Viewreleasechanges
SelectGUIcolumnsforbrowsingandexport
Thefollowingfigureillustratestheuserassistance.
Figure 23: NetAct Applications Categories User Assistance

Administration category
Thesectiondescribestheadministrationcategory.
Adaptation Manager
AnadaptationisasetoffragmentssuchasConfigurationManagement(CM),
PerformanceManagement(PM),FaultManagement(FM),andotherfragments.
ThesefragmentscontaindatathatenablesNetActtocommunicatewithany
NetworkElement(NE).Severalreleasesofanadaptationcanbedeployedto
NetActtosupportmultipleversionsofnetworkelements.
AdaptationManagerallowstomanageadaptations.Auserwithadequaterolesand
permissionscanperformthefollowingactionswithAdaptationManager:
Deployingadaptations,Un-deployingadaptations,Redeployingadaptations
Viewingadaptations
Dynamic Adaptation
DynamicAdaptationGUIisawebapplication,whichprovidesaninterfacetoview
andtriggertheDynamicAdaptionprocess.Itallowsaswellmonitoringthedynamic
adaptationstatus.ThenetworkelementsintegratedviaDynamicAdaptationare
thosemanagedby@vantageagent,genericagentorne3sagent.
WhenDynamicAdaptationistriggeredforanetworkelementfromtheWebUI,the
requestisdispatchedtoDynamicAdaptationMediation.Afterthat,mediationstarts
touploadmetadataforthenetworkelement.Thesemetadatacontentsare
processed,andthenadaptationsaregenerateddynamically.Adaptationsfor
@vantageagentorgenericagentsaregenerateddynamicallybasedonthefault
management,performancemanagement,andconfigurationmanagementmetadata
presentonthenetworkelement.Adaptationsforne3sagentaregenerated
dynamicallybasedonthefaultmanagementandperformancemanagement
metadatapresentonthenetworkelement.Thegeneratedadaptationsarethen
deployedintoNetActSystemdynamically.OncetheAdaptationprocessis
completed,DynamicAdaptationGUIisupdatedwiththestatusoftheadaptation.
NE Integration Wizard
Networkelementintegrationwizardapplicationisusedbysystemadministratorto
automaticallyintegrateanetworkelementtoNetAct.
SNMP FM Mediator
SNMPFMMediatorapplicationallowssystemadministratortoactivate,deactivate,
andconfigureparametersofagentsupervision,trapreliability,andalarmupload
functionsforallnetworkelements.Parametersassuchastimeout,retries,number
ofmessagestobehandledandsooncanbeconfiguredwiththistool.
WithSNMPFMMediator,youcan:
Configureglobalparametersforagentsupervision
Configureglobalparametersfortrapreliability
Configureparametersforagentsupervisionbynetworkelements
Configureglobalparametersforalarmsynchronization

SNMP PM Mediator
SNMPPMMediatorallowssystemadministratortoactivate,deactivate,and
configureparametersofPMmediation(forexample,timeout,retriesandnumber
messageshandledinparallelmode).
UsingSNMPPMMediator,administratorusercan:
Configureglobalparameters
ConfigureparametersforPMPollingbynetworkelement
Configurepollingforexistingnetworkelements
SNMPPMMediatorapplicationallowsadministratortoconfigureperformance
managementmeasurementdatapollingfortheSNMPbasednetworkelementsand
storestheperformanceindicatorsinthesystem.Theperformanceindicatorsare
configuredintheperformancemanagementadaptationandthemappingbetween
SNMPvariablesandperformanceindicatorsisdefinedbytheSNMPPMfragment
oftheadaptation.ThenetworkelementshavingSNMPPMfragmentsdeployedon
NetActcanbepolledbytheSNMPPMmediation.Ifperformancemanagement
adaptationexists,thenthedataisusedbyperformancemanagementandstoredin
performancemanagementdatabase.
Map Administrator
MapAdministratorisanadministrationtooldesignedformanagingtheGeographic
InformationSystem(GIS).GIScombinesdatawithlocation.Themainusagesfor
suchasystemaredataretrievalandvisualizationbasedonthelocation,for
example,showingcomputednetworkcoverageordominanceonamap.
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheNetActApplicationsCategories-Administration.
Figure 24: NetAct Applications Categories - Administration

Security category
ThefollowingsectiondescribestheUserManagement.
User Management
Usermanagementisawebbasedmanagementsystemformonitoring,managing
andadministeringusersandgroups.Theusermanagementapplicationmanages
userprofileinformation,groupsandpasswordpoliciesandensuresthesecurityofa
user.
UsermanagementisintegratedwithPermissionManagement(PEM)ofthedifferent
NetActtoolsforthecorrespondingauthorizationstobeassignedtousers.The
authenticationofauserisbasedonuserprofileinformationstoredinthesystem
specificauthenticationrepository.
Thefollowingoperationsaremanagedbyusermanagement:
Creating,deletingandupdatinguserandloginprofile
Creating,deletingandupdatingagroup
ImportingandExportingusersandpermissions
Resettinguserpasswords
Configuringpasswordpolicy
Certification Authority
CertificationAuthorityisthetoolusedtodownloadthesecurityserverCAcertificates
usedbythetier1tocommunicateconNetActapplications(launchNetActdesktop).
Network Element Access Control

WebapplicationusedtoadministerNetworkElementcredentialsfortheusersthat
NetActusestoaccessNetworkElements.
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheNetActApplicationsCategories-Security.
Figure 25: NetAct Applications Categories - Security

Optimization category
Theoptimizationprocessusuallytakesplacewhenthemonitoredperformance
dropsbelowthesettargets,whenaperiodicaltuningtaskistobestartedorwhen
thereisneedtooptimizethebehaviorofnewnetworkelementsinthenetwork.The
existingnetworkconfigurationandperformanceneedstobetakenintoaccount
whenaddingthenewelements.Measurementsareusedforanalyzingthenetwork
andserviceperformancedevelopmentagainstsettargets.Adetailedanalysisis
performedtofindthereasonsbehinddecreasedperformanceandtoselectthe
appropriatecorrectiveactions.Inthisphase,therelationsbetweenperformance
indicatorsandelementparametersareanalyzed.Aftertheanalysisphase,the
configurationparametersettingsareoptimizedandthesetqualitycriteriaare
checked.Whenthecorrectionsareverifiedandimplementedintothenetwork,the
qualitymonitoringcyclestartsfromthebeginning.
ThefollowingapplicationsandtoolsareusedinnetworkoptimizationwithNetAct:
Optimizer NetActOptimizerisdesignedforautomated,
measurementbasedoptimizationofoperationalGSM,
WCDMAandLTEnetworks.Itprovidesthefunctionality
forviewing,analyzingandoptimizingtheactualnetwork
performanceandcapacity.
Map Administrator MapAdministratorisanadministrationtooldesignedfor

managingtheGeographicInformationSystem(GIS).Map
AdministratorislocatedintheAdministrationfolder
ontheNetActStartPage.
Antenna Data Editor AntennaDataEditorisanOptimizerfunctionalityusedfor

importingsiteandantennarelationstothecellsandbase
stationsoftheactualnetwork.Thetoolisrunbythe
administratoruserwhenevernewsitesandantennasand
relationstothecellsinthenetworkneedtobeupdated.
AntennaDataEditorsupportsdataimportfromany
externalsystemproducingaCSV(CommaSeparated
Values)datainputfilethatcomplieswiththeimportformat
definition.
Configurator ThefollowingConfiguratorapplicationsareusedinthe
optimizationprocess:CMAnalyzer,forrunning
consistencychecks,CMOperationsManager,for
downloadingandactivatingplansandforrunning
workflow-basedoptimizationoperations,CMEditor,for
editingplansandtemplates,SONScheduler,forrunning
scheduledworkflow-basedoptimizationoperations.
Performance Manager Optimizerusesmobilemeasurementreportscollectedby

PerformanceManagerininterferencematrixcreation.
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheNetActApplicationsCategories-Optimization.
Figure 26: NetAct Applications Categories - Optimization

Lab exercise: Application Categories

Context
ExplainthepurposeofNetActcategoriesgroups.
Figure 27: Lab exercise: Application Categories
Procedure
1 LogintoNetAct.
2 NavigatetoStart Page.
Result of this step

ListtheNetActStartPageCategories.
Explainthepurposeofeachcategory?
Explainthemainfunctionalitiesofthefollowingapplications.Indicatetowhich
categorytheybelongto:
NetActMonitor
PerformanceManager
CMOperationsManager
OnlineDocumentation
TraceViewer
Optimizer
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Managed Objects
Components of Network Topology
Topology
Thetopologyofanetworkistherepresentationoftheactualphysicalelementsof
thenetwork,wheretheyarelocated,andhowtheyarerelatedtoeachother.Toget
anaccuraterepresentationofthenetworkitisimportanttokeepthetopologyas
consistentwiththeactualphysicalnetworkaspossible.
Managed Object (MO)

Amanagedobjectrepresentsaphysicaloralogicalnetworkelement,orapieceof
equipmentthatbelongstothenetwork.ThiselementmustbeconnectedtoNetAct,
sothatNetActcanbeusedtomanageitbygatheringinformation,suchas
informationonalarms,fromit.Insomecasesinformationcanbedownloadedfrom
NetActtothemanagedobject.
EveryManagedObjectbelongstoaspecificManagedObjectClass(MOC)which
definesitscharacteristics,suchasitsparameters,operations,notificationsand
behavior.
Managed Object Class

Allmanagedobjectsofthesametypearegroupedtogethertoformaclass.This
enablesNetActtorepresenttheelementsinthenetworkinalogicalway.InNetAct
softwareeachclassisrepresentedbyitsownsymbol.Thesesymbolscanbeused
intheNetActMonitortomakegraphicalviewsofthenetwork.
ItdefinesthecharacteristicsoftheMO,suchasitsparameters,operations,
notificationsandbehavior.
Object Instance
TheObjectInstanceandtheassociatedManagedObjectClassoftheMOuniquely
identifytheMOwithinitsParentObject.
Parent and child objects

Managedobjectsareoftenhierarchicalwithcertainobjectscontrollingand
containingothers.ThishierarchyisshownintheNetActobjectmodelaswell.A
parentobjectcontrolsorcontainsachildobject.
Site object
Asiteisaplacewhereoneormoreoftheelementsofthenetworkarelocated.One
sitecancontainmorethanonemanagedobject.Iftherearemultipleelementson
onesite,thesiteobjectrepresentstheelementwhichishighestinthehierarchyon
thatsite.Forexample,asitemaycontainanOMCaswellasoneofitsworkstations.
Distinguished Name (DN)

DistinguishedNameisaneffectiveidentifierofaparticularmanagedobjectinstance.
ItcontainstherelativeDistinguishedNameoftheobjectinstanceinquestion,plus
therelativeDistinguishedNamesofallitsparentobjects.Theseareshownasa
pathofelementsarrangedinahierarchicalorderandseparatedbyaslash(/).
Forexample,ClassName-InstanceValue/ClassName-
InstanceValue/ClassName-InstanceValue

Global Identifier (GID)

TheGlobalIdentifierisanumberwhichuniquelyidentifiesaMOintheTopology.
ThesameMOalwayshasthesameGIDinanyNetActsystem.
Internal ID
TheinternalIDisanumberwhichuniquelyidentifiesaMOwithinoneNetActsystem
(withinaregionalortheglobalsystem).ThesameMOusuallyhasnotthesame
internalIDindifferentNetActsystems.
Object State
TheObjectStatespecifieswhethertheMOexistsintheactualconfiguration
(operationalorcreated from networkstate)ornot(non-operationalstate).
Working Sets
Managedobjectreferstoanabstractrepresentationofanetworkresource,which
canbeeitheraphysicalorlogicalentity,inanetworkmanagedbyNetAct.
Workingsetreferstoasetofmanagedobjectstowhichrecurringmanagement
tasksareapplied.Workingsetsfacilitatenetworkmanagement,forexample,when
certainconfigurationchangesareappliedtoasetofnetworkelementsrecurrently.
Forexample,networkoperatorsoftenwanttoconfigureasetofbasestationswith
thesameradionetworkparameters.Inthiscase,theuseofworkingsetscan
facilitateconfigurationmanagementsignificantly.
Maintenance Regions
AmaintenanceregionisalogicalmanagedobjectinNetActObjectModel.Itisa
collectionofmanagedobjectsthataregroupedtogether,normallytorepresentsome
geographicalpartofthenetwork.
Figure 28: Managed Objects, Maintenance Regions and Working Sets
NetActMonitorapplicationsallowtodefinemaintenanceregionsthatshouldbe
monitored.Dividingthenetworkviewintotwoormoremaintenanceregions
facilitatesonlinemonitoringbecausethatwaythenumberofalarmsthatdifferent
groupsresponsiblefornetworkoperationneedtoanalyzeisreduced.
Usingmaintenanceregions:
ThesystemadministratorcancreateseparateMaintenanceregionswithinthe
network.

Dividingthenetworkviewintotwoormoremaintenanceregionsmakesonline
monitoringeasierasitreducesthenumberofalarmsthatpersonnelinoperation
needtoanalyze.
Forexample,itmaybeusefultohaveseparatemaintenanceregionsfordifferent
geographicalareas,forprioritizedareas,orforcertaintypesofalarms.
Youcansetupmonitoringcriteriathatnarrowthefocusofmonitoringsothatthey
canconcentrateonlyonthenetworkareasoralarmnumbersneeded.

NetAct User Assistance

Operating Documentation
NetActoperatingdocumentationcontainstheuserassistanceneededforthedaily
networkmanagementoperations.ThedocumentationisavailableonNetActuser
workstationsinabrowsableformat.
TheNetActapplicationOnlineHelpsareavailableinthesameNetActOperating
Documentationset,andtheycanbelaunchedviacontext-sensitivelaunchfromthe
NetActapplications.
Browsing the content

1. FromContentsframeexpandthecategorybyclickingtheplusiconordouble-
clickingthecategoryname.
2. Clickthedocumentname.
Thecontentappearsinmainframe.
Additionalinformation:
OnthetopofContentsframeclickCollapseallbuttontocollapseallopened
topics.
OnthetopofContentsframeclickLinkwithContentsbuttontolinkviewed
contentinmainframewithrelatedtopicinContentsframe.
OnthetopofContentsframeclickMaximizebuttontomaximizetheContents
frame.ClickRestorebuttontorestoretheview.
OnthetopofmainframeclickMaximizebuttontomaximizethemainframe.
ClickRestorebuttontorestoretheview.
Searching in the publication

1. AbovetheContentsframefillintheSearchfieldwiththesearchedexpression.
2. ClickSearch scopeifyouwanttochoosewhichcategoriesanddocuments
needtobesearchedthrough.
3. ClickGObuttontorunthesearching.
TheresultsaredisplayedinSearchresultsframe.
4. Clickonchaptername.
Thecontentappearsinthemainframe.
YoucanreturntobrowsingthecontentbyclickingContentsbuttonatthebottomof
Searchresultsframe.
Thefollowingfigureillustratestheoperatingdocumentation.

Figure 29: Operating Documentation
Operating Documentation: Browsing documentation

Thefollowingfigureillustratesthebrowsingdocumentationinoperating
documentation.
Figure 30: Browsing Documentation in Operating Documentation
Searching currently browsed content

Whenbrowsingthecontent(publicationcategory)youcanquicklyrunthesearch.
1. OnthetopofContentsframeclicktheSearch selected topicandallsubtopics
button.
TheSearchselectedtopicandallsubtopicsdialogappears.
2. Typethesearchedexpression.
3. ClickOKbuttontorunthesearching.
TheresultsaredisplayedinSearchresultsframe.
4. Clickondocumentorchapter name.
Thecontentappearsinmainframe.

YoucanreturntobrowsingthecontentbyclickingContentsbuttonatthebottomof
Searchresultsframe.
Navigating
OnthetopofmainframeclicktheGo Backbuttontoreturntopreviously
viewedpage.
OnthetopofmainframeclicktheGo Forwardbuttontogoforwardinthe
historyofviewedpages.
OnthetopofmainframeclicktheHomebuttontogotothetopofthe
publication.
Adding viewed page to favorites

ThisinstructionisavailableonlyforInternetExplorerbrowser.
OnthetopofmainframeclicktheBookmark Documentbutton.
TheAddaFavoritedialogappears.
Typethenameofthebookmarkandselectitslocationinfavoritesfolderofyour
browser.
ClickAddbutton.
Results page options

Thefollowingfigureillustratestheresultspageoptionsinoperatingdocumentation.
Figure 31: Results page options in Operating Documentation

Nokia Online Service (NOLS)

TheNokiaOnlineService(NOLS)provideseasyandsecureaccesstosolutionand
productdocumentation,downloadablesoftware,projectmanagementtools,online
entryandtrackingofHelpDeskcases,onlineordering,e-learningandcollaboration
tools.
ThefollowingscreenshotdisplaystheNOLS.
Figure 32: NOLS: Nokia Online Services
Product Information Center

ThefollowingfigureillustratesthefeaturesofProductInformationCenter.
Figure 34: Product Information Center

Online Documentation
Thefollowingsectiondescribestheonlinedocumentation.
Online Documentation: Infocenter and Operating Documentation Library

NetActoperatingdocumentationisavailableinInfocenterasbrowsableHTML-
library.
Thebrowserwindowisdividedtotwoparts:ontheleftsideisthetableofcontents
whichcanbeusedforfastaccesstoanyoperatingdocument,orpartofa
document.Ontherightsidethedocumentitselfisvisible.
Thetopicscanbeopenedandsearchedusing:
Thetableofcontents
Searchfunctions
TheNetActoperatingdocumentationsetcontainsthedocumentsneededforgetting
familiarwithNetActandthedailyoperations.Thetopicscoveredinclude:
OverviewstoNetActfunctionality
Releasechangedocumentation
OperatingconceptstonetworkmanagementandNetActsystemadministration
Networkelementintegrationinstructions
Systemtechnicalreferences
Troubleshootingprinciples
Openinterfacespecification
Thefollowingscreenshotdisplaystheonlinehelp.
Figure 35: Online Help
Rich Media in Operating Documentation

HTML-formatdocumentationisaccompaniedbyrichmedia(Flash)presentations
andsortabletables.
Thefollowingscreenshotdisplaystherichmediainoperatingdocumentation.

Figure 36: Rich Media in Operating Documentation

Object Information Browser

ObjectInformationBrowserisacustomerdocumentationbrowserdesigned
specificallyforbrowsingofAdaptationmetadatainformationonobjectclasses,and
performancemanagement,configurationmanagementdata,andfaultmanagement
metadata.
ThecontentinObjectInformationBrowsercoversthedescriptionsofPM
measurementsandcounters,CMparameters,alarmdescriptions,andobject
classesfortheAdaptationsdeployedinNetAct.
Informationonalarming,measuredandconfigurable(CM)objectsisavailablevia
managedobjectclassmetadatainAdaptationInformationBrowser.
AdaptationInformationBrowserisaWebUIapplicationwhichisaccessedfromthe
NetActStartPage.ThebasicfunctionalityinAdaptationInformationBrowser
includes:
Searchingbydatatype(PM,CM,FM,ObjectClass)andbyrelease,basedon
thefreetext.
Viewingthedescriptionofanindividualcounter,measurement,parameter,alarm
manual,orobjectclassbasedonsearchresults,forexample,viewingthe
descriptionofanindividualmeasurement.
Browsingcounters,measurements,parameters,alarmmanualsandobject
classesbyreleaseorbyuser-definedcriteriaanddrillingdowntodetails.
Comparingselectedadaptationdescriptions,forexample,comparingthe
descriptionsoftwomeasurements,counters,orparameters.
ExportingtoExcelandXML,basedonsearchresults.
Printingofsearchresults.
ThefollowingscreenshotdisplaystheObjectInformationBrowser.
Figure 37: Object Information Browser OIB
Search functionalities
Tosearchforandbrowse measurementsinformation:
1. Inthemainwindow,clickMeasurements.

2. Clickthedrop-downlistofAdaptationtochooseaspecificadaptation.The
correspondingdataaredisplayedintheresultpanel.Ifyoudonotwantto
designateaspecificadaptation,youcanchooseall,anduseLookforbelow
directly.
3. Clickthedrop-downlistofReleasetochooseaversion.Thecorrespondingdata
aredisplayedintheresultpanebelow.Again,ifyoudonotwanttodesignatea
specificversion,youcanchooseall.
IfyoudonotchooseaspecificadaptationinAdaptation,youcannot
chooseaspecificversioninRelease.
4. EnterthekeywordsinthesearchboxofLookfor,andclickSearch.
Keywordscanbeanypartoftheattributesofthedata.Tonarrow
downthesearchscope,entertwoormorekeywordsseparatedby
white-spaces.
Thesearchrulesarelistedbelow:
Thesearchsupportsfuzzymatch.
Ifthereisnopreciselymatchedresultaccordingtothekeyword,itemswith
similarkeywordsaredisplayed.Ifthereisevennosimilarresult,norecordis
displayed.
Theorderofthesearchresultsisdeterminedbythepriorityoftheattributes.
Forexample,youentertwokeywordsforattributes,oneforIDandtheotherfor
Description.AsthepriorityofIDishigherthanthatofDescription,thesearched
itemsforIDarelistedabovetheitemsforDescription.
5. Toshowmoredetailedinformationaboutthemeasurements,followthesteps
below:
ClickColumnsettingsatright-topoftheresultpaneltochoosetheinformation
neededinthedrop-downlist,andthenclickApply.
YoucanalsochooseDefaulttoresetthesettingsasdefaultvalue.
ClicktheattributewithhyperlinkinID,andthenthedetailsaredisplayedina
pop-updialoguebox.
ClicktheattributewithhyperlinkinManagedobjects,andthedetailed
informationoftheselecteditemisdisplayedinthesamewindow.
Clickthearrowiconnexttotheattributenametoviewthewholedescriptionof
theattribute.
6. Todefinehowmanyitemstoshowperpage,clickthedrop-downlistofitems
perpageattheright-bottomoftheresultpanel.
7. Toexportthemeasurementsofthepage,followthestepsbelow:
Navigatetothepageyouwanttouseforexporting.
ClickExporttoexportthemeasurementsofthecurrentpageinaspecific
format.
Choosetheformatyouwantinthepop-upbox,andthenclickExportinit.
Bydefault,theexportingisinxmlformat.
Saveoropentheexporteddatafile.
ThefollowingscreenshotdisplaystheObject Information Browsersearch.

Figure 38: Object Information Browser Search
ThefollowingscreenshotdisplaysthemanagedobjectbrowsinginOIB.
Figure 39: Managed Object Browsing in OIB

Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (1/2)

Context
1. ListthedifferentdocumentationreferencesinNetAct.
2. UsetheOnlinedocumentationforsearchingmainNetActtopics.
3. UsetheOnlineHelpforsearchingforspecificNetActOperativeprocedures.
Figure 40: Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (1/2)
Procedure
1 LogintoNetAct.
Result of this step

ListtheapplicationsavailableinNetActtoprovidedocumentationand
informationaboutNetActandthesupportedNetworkElements.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
2 GotoUser AssistanceCategory.
a) OpentheOperating Documentation.
Result of this step

ListthesomeoftheMain Contentsitems.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

3 SearchfortheNetActMonitorApplicationandsavethecorrespondingpagefor
theOverviewofthisapplication.
Result of this step

Listthestepstodothistask.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (2/2)

Context
UsetheOnlinedocumentationRichMediatoviewvideosonconceptsandtasks
executioninNetAct.
Figure 41: Lab exercise: NetAct User Assistance (2/2)
Prerequisites
YouneedtobeloggedintoNetActandatstartpage.
Procedure
1 OpentheNetActMonitorapplication.
a) GotothemenuHelpContents andfindthecorrespondinghelpforusing
Network Views.
Result of this step

________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

2 OpentheOperating Documentation.
Result of this step

FindaRichmediaitemtogetanoverviewoftheConfigurationManagement
OperationsinNetAct.
Describetheformatandcontentofsuchoverview.
WhatcanbeadvantagesoftheRichMediainformationcomparedwiththe
standardhtmlOnlineHelp?
WhenwouldyouuseofRichMediaandwhenyouusethestandard
documentation?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Lab exercise: Object Information Browser

Context
UsetheObjectInformationBrowserapplicationtobrowse,visualizeandexport
detaileddataofthesupportednetworkelementsinNetAct.
Figure 42: Lab exercise: Object Information Browser
Prerequisites
Procedure
1 OpentheObject Information Browserapplication.
Result of this step

Listthetypesofinformationaboutnetworkelementsthatyoucanfindusingthis.
Explainhowyoucanfindinformationforcertaintypeandversionofnetwork
element.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
2 BrowsetheMeasurementsfortheRNCnetworkelementandexportthe
results.
Result of this step

WhataretheoptionsforexportingtheMeasurementsList.
HowcanyoufindthecountersthatbelongofthoseMeasurementsusingOIB.
UsingOIB,findouthowmanyalarmscanbereceivedinNetActMonitorforthe
LTEBaseStartions.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Summary: Getting started with NetAct

Module Summary
Thismodulecoveredthefollowinglearningobjectives:
DescribetheNetActarchitectureandvirtualizationconcept.
Describethecomponentsofthemanagedobject


BasicFaultManagementwithNetAct 71
Basic Fault Management with NetAct

Module Objectives
interface.
UsetheNetworkMonitorToolstofindproblemswithintheNetworkand
begintofindasolutiontofixthem.
Fault Management Basic Concepts

Strategies for Effective Network Monitoring
Theprimaryaimofeffectivenetworkmonitoringistopreventcriticalfaultsinthe
networkandtoidentifytheproblemsthatdirectlyaffectthequalityoftheservice,
thatis,thecriteriabywhichsubscribersjudgethequalityofthenetwork.
Networkmonitoringcanbeareactiveprocesswhereahighnumberofalarmsarrive
duringaday,causingalotofmanualroutineworkinalarmhandling.Theoperator
can,however,developanetworkmonitoringprocesssothatitbecomesaplanned,
controlledprocesswheremonitoringpersonnelcanfocustheirattentiononthe
essentialproblemsinthenetwork.Therearedifferentwaystomakenetwork
monitoringmoreeffective.
Using Views hierarchies

Aviewisalogicalrepresentationoftheobjecthierarchythatincludesparentand
childobjects.Amainviewvisualizestheparentobjectsofthenetworkandthe
subviewcontainsthechildobjectsthatarecontrolledbythesameparentobject.
Subviewscanbecreatedtomonitor,forinstance,prioritizedgeographicalareas,
workstationnetworks,ortransmissionnetworks.Foreasynavigationintheview
hierarchy,therecanbelinksbetweentheviews,forexample,fromthemainviewto
theworkstationnetworkviewortothetransmissionnetworkview.Properplanningof
thenetworkmainviewandsubviewsmakesitpossibletotraceanalarmtothe
correctsourceoftheproblem.
Alarm Flow Reduction

Alarmsituationscanbeanticipatedandoperatorscanmakeplanstoreducethe
alarmflow.Thereducedalarmflowmakesiteasiertospottherealsourceof
problemsandtostartworkingonsolutionsasquicklyaspossible.Theflowof
alarmscanbereducedbymeansofalarmfiltering,alarmreclassification,andalarm
correlation.
Alarm Trigger
TheAlarmTriggerfeaturecanbeusedforautomatingcertainexternalandinternal
processesthatsupportthedailyroutinesofalarmhandling.Thedefaultprocesses
thatcanbetriggeredautomaticallyvary.Theoperatorscandefinethetriggerrules.
Maintenance Mode
TheMaintenanceModecanbeusedtoblockalarmsthatarrivefromsitesunder
maintenance.Alarmsthatarrivefromobjectsinmaintenancemodearenot
processedbyNetAct.Thismodecanbeactivatedforamanagedobjectorfora
managedobjectanditssubordinatenetwork.

Figure 43: Strategies for an Effective Network Monitoring

Fault Management Events

ThefigureillustratestheFaultManagementEvents.
Figure 44: Fault Management Events
Table 4: Fault Management Events

Alarm Class Required Actions
Critical(***) Thistypeofalarmislikelytocausedisturbancesintraffic.You
musttakeactionwithinonehour
Major(**) Youmusttakeactionwithinworkinghours
Minor(*) Youdonothavetotakeactionunlessthealarmoccurs
repeatedly
Warning(W) Youdonothavetotakeanyaction
Alarm number Eachalarmhasanalarmnumberforidentification

purposes.Thealarmnumbercanhaveavaluebetween1
and99999.
Alarms
Analarmisamessagethatnotifiesthemanagementsystemofanabnormal
conditioninthemanagedsystem.Themessagecarriesinformationontheorigins,
time,andpossiblereasonsfortheabnormalcondition.InNetActthisinformationis
brokendownintodifferentfields.Thefieldsareputtogethertoconstructthealarms
whichareshowninthealarmhandlingapplications.
Allalarmshaveanalarmnumberthatidentifiesthepossiblereasonforthealarm.
Alarmsareplacedintoaclassthatindicatestheirseverity.
Alarm Acknowledgement
Ifanalarmisraisedanoperatorhastoacknowledgetheerrorconditiontoindicate
thatappropriatecorrectiveactionwillbetaken.
Alarm Cancel
AlarmCancelisamessagethatclearsanalarmwhenthefaultsituationisover.In
managingatelecommunicationsnetworkitisveryimportanttoclearlyindicatethe
endofanalarmsituation.Ifalarmsarenotcanceledisnotpossibletohavean
accurateandup-to-dateviewofthenetworksituation.
Warnings
NetActalsosupportswarningsthatprovideinformationontransienterrorsituations.
Unlikealarms,warningsdonothavestartandendtimesandarenotcanceled.

Alarm Upload
Toensureconsistencyofalarminformationbetweenthedifferentdatabases,you
canuploadalarmsfromthenetworkelementstotheNetActCluster.

Alarm Flow Supervision

AlarmFlowSupervisionfeatureensuresthatalarmsfromnetworkelementsarenot
lostordelayedontheirwaytoNetAct.Thesupervisioninvolvesheartbeatalarms,
whicharesentbyanetworkelementifnootheralarmshavebeensentfor15
minutes(bydefault).
TheheartbeatalarmsarenotstoredintheNetActdatabase,noraretheyrelayedto
NetActalarmhandlingapplications.Ifnoheartbeatalarmsareraisedduringthe
specifiedperiod,analarmisgeneratedandshownintheActiveAlarmsList.
Alarm Types
Theeventtypeprovidesmoreinformationontheproblemthatcausedthealarm.
ThefollowingeventtypesareusedinNetAct.
Table 5: Fault Management Alarm Types

Alarm Type Explanation
Communication Analarmthatisassociatedwiththeproceduresand/or
processeswhicharerequiredtoconveyinformationfromone
pointtoanother(forexample,lossofframeorcall
establishmenterror)
Environmental Analarmthatisassociatedwithaconditionrelatingtoan
enclosureinwhichtheequipmentresides(forexample,door
openorelectricityfailure)
Equipment Analarmthatisrelatedtoanequipmentfault(forexample,
powerproblem,receiverfailureorI/Odeviceerror)
Eventprocessing Analarmtypethatisassociatedwithasoftwareordata
processingfault(forexample,storagecapacityproblem,
versionmismatch,corruptdata,fileerrororoutofmemory)
QualityofService Analarmthatisassociatedwithcertaindegradationinthe
qualityofservice(forexample,responsetimetoolong,
resourcelimitsnear,orcongestion)

Defining the Components of Network Topology

Topology
Thetopologyofanetworkistherepresentationoftheactualphysicalelementsof
thenetwork,wheretheyarelocated,andhowtheyarerelatedtoeachother.Toget
anaccuraterepresentationofthenetworkitisimportanttokeepthetopologyas
consistentwiththeactualphysicalnetworkaspossible.
Managed object
Amanagedobjectrepresentsaphysicaloralogicalnetworkelement,orapieceof
equipmentthatbelongstothenetwork.ThiselementmustbeconnectedtoNetAct,
sothatNetActcanbeusedtomanageitbygatheringinformation,suchas
informationonalarms,fromit.Insomecasesinformationcanbedownloadedfrom
NetActtothemanagedobject.
Managed object class

Allmanagedobjectsofthesametypearegroupedtogethertoformaclass.This
enablesNetActtorepresenttheelementsinthenetworkinalogicalway.InNetAct
softwareeachclassisrepresentedbyitsownsymbol.Thesesymbolscanbeused
intheNetActMonitortomakegraphicalviewsofthenetwork.
Managed object instance

Inthesamewaythatamanagedobjectclassrepresentsatypeofnetworkelement,
amanagedobjectinstancerepresentsoneuniqueelement.Forexample,
workstationisanobjectclass,whileaworkstationphysicallylocatedinthe
monitoringroomisaninstanceoftheworkstationclass.
Eachmanagedobjectclasscanhaveseveralinstances,dependingonthe
configurationofthenetwork.IntheNetActdocumentation,managedobjectinstance
isoftenreferredtoasmanagedobjectorobject.
Parent and child objects

Managedobjectsareoftenhierarchicalwithcertainobjectscontrollingand
containingothers.ThishierarchyisshownintheNetActobjectmodelaswell.A
parentobjectcontrolsorcontainsachildobject.
Site object
Asiteisaplacewhereoneormoreoftheelementsofthenetworkarelocated.One
sitecancontainmorethanonemanagedobject.Iftherearemultipleelementson
onesite,thesiteobjectrepresentstheelementwhichishighestinthehierarchyon
thatsite.Forexample,asitemaycontainanOMCaswellasoneofitsworkstations.
Distinguished Name
DistinguishedName(DN)isaneffectiveidentifierofaparticularmanagedobject
instance.ItcontainstherelativeDistinguishedNameoftheobjectinstancein
question,plustherelativeDistinguishedNamesofallitsparentobjects.Theseare
shownasapathofelementsarrangedinahierarchicalorderandseparatedbya
slash(/).Forexample:
ClassName-InstanceValue/ClassName-InstanceValue/ClassName-
InstanceValue
whichcorrespondsto:
PLMN-PLMN/OMC-2/WS-4

ClassNameisanabbreviationforamanagedobjectclassnameandconsistsof
numbersorcapitalletters.ThemaximumlengthofInstanceValueistencharacters
andthevaluemustcontainprintablecharacters.Theseareoftennumbers,butthey
donotnecessarilyhavetobe.
DistinguishedNamemustcontainatleasttwoClassName-InstanceValuelevels.
InterfacescansettheirownlimitationsforthelengthoftheDistinguishedName.
ThefollowingfigureshowshowtheDistinguishedNameisformedintheNetAct
ObjectModel.
Global Identifier (GID)

TheGlobalIdentifierisanumberwhichuniquelyidentifiesaMOintheTopology.
ThesameMOalwayshasthesameGIDinanyNetActsystem.
Internal ID
TheinternalIDisanumberwhichuniquelyidentifiesaMOwithinoneNetActsystem
(withinaregionalortheglobalsystem).ThesameMOusuallyhasnotthesame
internalIDindifferentNetActsystems.
Object State
TheObjectStatespecifieswhethertheMOexistsintheactualconfiguration
("operational"or"createdfromnetwork"state)ornot("non-operational"state).
Figure 45: Network Topology, Managed Objects and Distinguished Names
Working Sets
Managedobjectreferstoanabstractrepresentationofanetworkresource,which
canbeeitheraphysicalorlogicalentity,inanetworkmanagedbyNetAct.
Workingsetreferstoasetofmanagedobjectstowhichrecurringmanagement
tasksareapplied.Workingsetsfacilitatenetworkmanagement,forexample,when
certainconfigurationchangesareappliedtoasetofnetworkelementsrecurrently.
Forexample,networkoperatorsoftenwanttoconfigureasetofbasestationswith
thesameradionetworkparameters.Inthiscase,theuseofworkingsetscan
facilitateconfigurationmanagementsignificantly.
Maintenance Regions
AmaintenanceregionisalogicalmanagedobjectinNetActObjectModel.Itisa
collectionofmanagedobjectsthataregroupedtogether,normallytorepresentsome
geographicalpartofthenetwork.

NetActMonitorapplicationsallowtodefinemaintenanceregionsthatshouldbe
monitored.Dividingthenetworkviewintotwoormoremaintenanceregions
facilitatesonlinemonitoringbecausethatwaythenumberofalarmsthatdifferent
groupsresponsiblefornetworkoperationneedtoanalyzeisreduced.
Usingmaintenanceregions:
ThesystemadministratorcancreateseparateMaintenanceregionswithinthe
network.
Dividingthenetworkviewintotwoormoremaintenanceregionsmakesonline
monitoringeasierasitreducesthenumberofalarmsthatpersonnelinoperation
needtoanalyze.Forexample,itmaybeusefultohaveseparatemaintenance
regionsfordifferentgeographicalareas,forprioritizedareas,orforcertaintypes
ofalarms.
Theuserscansetupmonitoringcriteriathatnarrowthefocusofmonitoringso
thattheycanconcentrateonlyonthenetworkareasoralarmnumbersneeded.
Figure 46: Managed Objects, Maintenance Regions and Working Sets

Knowledge Check: Fault Management Concepts

Findtherightanswerunderthefollowingstatement.

Common Operations in NetAct Monitor Desktop

Fault Management System in NetAct
ThisfigureillustratestheFaultManagementandTopologyManagementinNetAct.
Figure 47: Fault Management and Topology Management in NetAct
ThefaultmanagementmonitoringtoolsinNetActMonitorareusedtomanage
alarmsfromvariousnetworkelementsandtypes,toperformrootcauseanalysis,to
troubleshootfaultsthatcausedisruptionsinnetworkservices,andtoimprovethe
qualityofthenetworkservicesforsubscribers.
TheNetActMonitorfaultmanagementsystemconsistsof:
FMeventcollectionengine
FMeventcorrelationengine
FMadaptationfragments
Mediationinterfaces
FMmonitoringtools
Event Collection Engine

Itcollectsandpreprocessesthealarmevents.Dependingonselectedfiltering
attributes,thealarmeventsareloadedintothealarmdatabaseandmonitoringtools
atdefinedintervals.Separateforwardingfilterscontrolthealarmforwardingto
northboundmediations.
Event Correlation Engine

Itisusedtoconsolidatethevolumeofalarmsproducedinthenetwork.Thenumber
ofalarmeventsinanetworkcanbehigherthanthenumberofactualfaults.The
EventCorrelationEnginecombinesthealarmsthatareassociatedwithoneanother.
Insteadofdisplayingeachalarmseparately,itdisplaystherootcausetotheend
user.Userscanimplementoperator-specificcorrelationrulestobestsuittheir
needs.

Fault Management Monitoring tools

NetActSystemprovidesfaultmanagementfunctionalitieswithversatilemonitoring
toolsintegratedontopoftheMonitorCommonDesktop.Theavailableviewsand
editingpermissionsfordifferentrulesdependofpre-defineduserrights.

Monitor Applications
ThefigureillustratestheNetActMonitorapplications.
Figure 48: NetAct Monitor Applications
MostoftheNetActMonitorApplicationscanbeaccessedfromtheToolsmenuin
NetActMonitorgraphicaluserinterface.Someofthetools(forexample,Properties)
canbelaunchedcontext-sensitivelyfromapop-upmenuinanothertool.
Authorization in the Monitoring Desktop applications

SeveralMonitoringDesktopapplicationsrequireanauthorizationprocess.This
processisusedtodetermine,ifyouhavepermissionstoaccessthedata,
functionality,orservice.
Whenyoulogintotheapplication,thelogincredentialsarevalidated.Ifyourlogin
credentialsarevalid,youwillbeprovidedaccesstotheapplication.Thepermissions
toperformcertainoperationsarebasedonthespecificrolesassignedtoyou.
Authorizationisgivenbythesystemadministrator.
Wizards
NetActMonitorprovideswizardsthatsupportthecreationofdifferentitems,for
exampleobjectsorrules.
ThefollowingwizardsareavailableintheFilemenu:
NewRule
NewAlarmFilter
NewView
NewViewFolder
NewObject
NewGroup
NewRole
Thesewizardscanalsobeaccessedviaothertools.Forexample,theNewRule
wizardcanbestartedfromRuleExplorerandtheNewObjectwizardfromObject
Explorer.

Common Desktop Functionality

CommondesktopfunctionalityreferstothegenericfunctionalityoftheDesktop,
sharedbyalltheindividualtoolsandthemainapplicationwindow.Itincludes
generalprinciplesofhowoperations(suchascopyandpasteorsorting)work
throughouttheuserinterface.
TheNetActMonitortoolsareintegratedintheDesktopFramework.OntheDesktop
theusercanflexiblychangetheviewthatisusedforthemonitoring.Changingfrom
onetooltoanother,andfindingtherelevantcontentaremadeeasyfortheuserby
context-sensitivenavigation,drag-and-dropsupportanduseofthemenuentry.
Eachusercanalsosetupthetoolstomatchtherequirementsoftheiractualtask
andtostorethatsetup.
TheDesktopFrameworkprovidesthefollowingtool-independentservicestosupport
thedailyworkflow:
Forwardandbackwardnavigationinsub-windowsforfastworkflownavigation
Objectmenuofferingcomprehensivecontextrelatedservicesfromother
integratedtoolsandapplications
Draganddropsupport
Quicksearchfordatafiltering
Fieldinformationandtooltipwhenhoveringovergraphicaluserinterface
components
Automatedinformationupdateforobjectpropertiesandalarmhelpincasethe
instanceselectionschangeswithinatool
Easyandflexiblewindowmanagement
Thetoolutilizationprinciplesarethesameacrossalltools,whichmeansthatwhen
theuserhaslearnttouseonetool,heorshecansuccessfullyusealltheothertools
inDesktopFramework.
Figure 49: NetAct Monitor Common Desktop Workspace

Managing the Workspace

InthecontextoftheDesktop,workspacereferstohowtheapplicationisdisplayed
intheapplicationwindow.
Thedefaultconfigurationoftheworkspacecontainsfourareas:
Explorerarea
Propertiesarea
Editorarea
Outputarea
Desktoptoolsopeninwindowsthataredisplayedintheseareas;thedefault
locationofatoolwindowdependsonthesettingsforthetoolandtheworkspace.
Toolsthatyouopeninthesameareaaredisplayedontabs.
Whichtools(toolwindows)areavailabledependsonhowthedesktophasbeen
previouslyconfigured.
Theworkspaceiscustomizableandyoucansaveyourcustomizedsettings.

Managing tool windows

IntheDesktopworkspace,toolsdisplaytheirdataintoolwindows.Youcanmove
thetoolwindowsaroundintheworkspaceintheExplorer,Properties,Editorand
Outputareasanddocktheminplacewhereyoulike.Thewindowscanalsobe
stackedontopeachotherintheExplorer,Properties,EditorandOutputareasso
thatarowoftabsisvisible.
Youcandisplaysomeofthetoolsinseveralwindowsatonce,andchangesmadein
onewindowareinstantlyreflectedinallopenwindowsforthattool.
Figure 50: Managing the Workspace
Moving a tool window

Clickthewindowheaderanddragittothedesiredposition.
Apreviewboxshowswherethewindowwillreside.
Dropthewindow.
Maximizing a window and restoring window size

Double-clickthewindowheader.
Thewindowismaximizedorrestoredtoitsoriginalsize.
Browsing through tool windows

Ifthereareseveralwindowsopeninanarea,theyarestackedanddisplayedas
tabs.
Tobrowsethroughstackedwindows,clickonthetabsalongthetopedgeofthetool
window.Ifmorewindowsarestackedinthesameareathancanbedisplayed(in
otherwords,ifallthetabsdonotfitinthewindowandsomearehidden),youcan
usetherightandleftarrowstotherightoftherowoftabstodisplaythehiddentabs.
Youcanalsoclickthedownward-pointingarrowtodisplayalistofallavailabletabs
andthenclickthenameofthetabyouwant.

Editing data and saving the changes

Whenyouedittheproperties,locationsorotheraspectsofDesktopentities,the
changeshavetobesaved.Youhaveseveraloptionsavailableforsavingyour
changes:usingtheSaveandSaveAllmenuitemsorbuttonsandsavingyour
changeswhenexitingtheDesktop.
Figure 51: Saving changes in Workspace
Menu items, buttons and keyboard shortcuts

ToperformastandardSaveoperationontheactivetool,youcanusetheSave
menuitem,theSavetoolbarbuttonortherelatedkeyboardshortcut.ThisSave
operationsavesthechangesmadeintheactivetoolonly.
TheSaveAllfunctionalityaccessedusingtheSaveAllmenuitem,SaveAlltoolbar
buttonortherelatedkeyboardshortcutsavesdatachangesmadeinallcurrently
opentools,notjusttheactiveone.
Whenyouclickthemenuitemortoolbarbutton,theworkspaceconfiguration
isnotsaved.
The Save dialog on exit

Whenyouclosethemainwindowwithoutexplicitlysavingyourchanges,aSave
dialogopens,allowingyoutoselectwhichchangestosave.
Tosavechangestosomeitemsonly,selectanitemoritemsinthedialog(hold
downtheCtrlkeytoselectmultipleitems)andclickSave.Whenthesaveoperation
iscomplete,clickDiscard Alltoexitwithoutsavinganyotherchanges.
Savesavesthechangesmadetoselecteditems.
Save Allsavesallchanges.
Discard Allsavesnochanges.

Using the clipboard

TheDesktopsupportscopyingandpastingdatawithintheapplication.Sometools
evensupportpastingoperationstootherapplications,suchasatextorspreadsheet
editor.
Toplaceanitemontheclipboard,selecttheiteminthetoolwindowandthen,on
theEditmenu,clickCopyorCut.
Toinsertthecontentsoftheclipboard,placethecursororactivatethetoolwhere
youwantthedatatobeinsertedandthen,ontheEditmenu,clickPaste.

Using the Properties tool

ToopenthePropertiestool,clickToolsProperties.
Sometoolsalsooffertheoptionofviewingthepropertiesofanobjectbyright-
clickingandselectingPropertiesonthepop-upmenu.
Figure 52: Using the Clipboard and Properties Tool
Sorting in the Properties tool window

1. Right-clickanywhereinthePropertiestoolwindow.Apop-upmenuopens.
2. Sortbycategorysortsthepropertiestodifferentcategoriesdependingonthe
setofpropertiesthatcanbeshown.
3. Sortbynamesortsthepropertiesbythenameoftheproperty.
Showing the description area of the Properties tool

Todisplayadditionalinformationabouttheselectedproperty,
1. Right-clickanywhereinthePropertiestoolwindow
2. ClickShowdescriptionarea.

Using default keyboard shortcuts

Table 6: Using Windows navigation shortcuts 1/2
Keys Command Action
File Menu
Ctrl + P Print Printsthecurrentselection
Ctrl + S Save Savesthechangesontheselection
Edit Menu
Ctrl + F Find Findstherequiredelement
Ctrl + X Cut Cutstheelementyouwanttoremove
ormovetoanewlocation
Ctrl + C Copy Copiestheelementtoanewlocation
Ctrl + V Paste Pastesthecutorcopiedelementtoa
newlocation
Ctrl + A Select All Selectstheentirecontentofawindow
Tools Menu
Ctrl + 1 Properties OpensthePropertiesTool
Table 7: Using Windows navigation shortcuts 2/2

Keys Action
Home InTableviews,goestothefirstfieldonthecurrentrow.Intree
view,goestothefirstnode.
End InTableviews,goestothelastfieldonthecurrentrow.Intree
view,goestothelastnode.
Ctrl + Tab Togglesthroughwindowsthatarecollectedinasetoftabinthe
orderthattheywerelastused.Totogglethroughthetabs,hold
downtheCtrl keyandpressTABasmanytimesasrequiredto
reachthetabyouwanttoactivate.
Shift + Maximizesthecurrentwindoworrestoresamaximizedwindowto
Escape itsprevioussize
Ctrl + W Closesthecurrenttabinthecurrentwindow.Ifthewindowhasno
tabs,thewholewindowisclosed
Alt + Right Displaysthenexttabinthecurrentwindow
Arrow
Alt + Left Displaystheprevioustabinthecurrentwindow
Arrow

Customizing keyboard shortcuts

Thefigureillustratescustomizingkeyboardshortcuts.
Figure 53: Customizing keyboard shortcuts
Adding or changing keyboard shortcuts

Theseinstructionsareforaddingorchangingkeyboardshortcutsforactionsthatare
locatedinthemenusofthemainwindow.
1. Inthemainwindow,selectToolsOptions.
2. Inthebarontheleft,clickKeymap.
3. Selecttheactionthatyouarecreatingashortcutfor.
Theactionsaregroupedaccordingtocategories.Someofthecategoriesdonot
correspondtothenamesofthemenusinthedesktop.
4. ClickAdd.
IntheAdd Shortcutdialog,pressthekeysyouwanttousefortheselected
action.
Asyoupressthekeycombination,thecorrectsyntaxforthatcombination
automaticallyappearsintheShortcuttextfield.
Example:Ifyoupressthekey,thewordBackspaceappears.Ifyousimultaneously
holddownthekey,thekey,andthekey,Alt+Ctrl+Jappears.Thedialogletsyou
specifyonlyakeyboardshortcutthatisnotbeingusedbyanotheraction.
Removing keyboard shortcuts

Theseinstructionsareforremovingkeyboardshortcutsforactionsthatarelocated
inthemenusofthemainwindow.
Resettingyourworkspacesettingsalsoremovescustomizationfrom
keyboardshortcuts.
1. Inthemainwindow,selectToolsOptions.
2. Inthebarontheleft,clickKeymap.
3. Selecttheactionthatisassociatedwiththeshortcutyouwanttoremove.
Notethattherecanbemorethanoneshortcutattachedtoanaction.Selectthe
correctshortcuttoberemoved.Thefirstshortcutisselectedbydefault.
4. ClickRemove.

Audible Alarms
ThefigureillustratesthemanagingAudibleAlarms.
Figure 54: Managing Audible Alarms
TheMonitorusercanconfiguredifferentalarmsoundsfortheincomingalarmsinthe
AlarmList.UsercanalsoconfigurethedurationforwhichtheAlarmSoundshould
beplayed.
Whentwoormorealarmsareraised,theAlarmSoundisplayedforallthealarms
thatmatchthecriteriainthesoundrulesconfigured.
ThesoundstopswhentheAlarmSoundisacknowledged.
ThefollowingAlarmSoundparametersareavailableforconfiguration:
TypeofSound:Beep,MidiNoteandAlarmTone.
MidiNoteandAlarmToneissupportedonlyinWindows
environment.
Severity:Critical,Major,Minor
AlarmNumber:Alarmnumber
Beepdelay:0-500ms
SoundPollingInterval:10to60seconds

TheAlarmSoundcriteriaisapplicableonlytotheuserswhoconfigure
alarmsoundsettings.
Whenthealarmmatchesboththeseverityandalarmnumbercriteria,
thesounddefinedforthealarmnumbercriteriatakesprecedence.
TheAlarmSoundisnotplayedforalarmsiftheyarenotdisplayedinthe
AlarmListduetofiltering.
IftheAlarmSoundcolumnisaddedtotheAlarmList,soundiconis
displayedonlyforthenewalarmsappearinginthealarmlistaspartof
polling.Soundiconisnotdisplayedforthealarmsthatalreadyexistsin
theAlarmListeventhoughtheymatchasoundrule.
FilterDragandDrop,managedobjectDragandDrop,reopeningalarm
listorclickingonShow correlated alarmsorHide correlated alarms
buttonrefreshestheAlarmListandremovesthesoundiconandthe
alarmsound.
Whenanalarmiscanceled,thealarmsoundforthatalarmstops.
TheAlarmSoundisplayedonlyonceeveniftherearemultiplealarms
withthesamealarmattribute(severityoralarmnumber)forwhichthe
soundisplaying.
Example
WhentheAlarmSoundisconfiguredforcritical,major,andminoralarms,the
followingscenariosareapplicable:
1. Whenonecritical,onemajorandoneminoralarmisraised(afteryouconfigured
theAlarmSoundcriteria)andonlyAlarmSoundforthecriticalalarmis
acknowledged.
Result:TheAlarm List playsonlyconfiguredsoundforbothmajorandminor
alarms.
2. Anewcriticalalarmisraised.
Result:TheAlarm Listplayssoundforthecriticalalarm.Italsocontinuesto
playsoundforbothmajorandminoralarms.
3. AlarmSoundforthemajoralarmisacknowledged.
Result:TheAlarm Listcontinuestoplaytheconfiguredcriticalandminor
AlarmSound.
Forthenewchangesorsettingstobeeffective,closeandreopenallthe
AlarmListinstances.
Adding Alarm Sound Rule

ToaddanewSoundRule,followthestepsmentionedbelow:
1. LogintoNetActStartPage.
2. ToopenNetActMonitor,clickMonitoringMonitor.
3. OpenOptions,clickToolsOptions.
4. Intheleftpane,clickAudibleAlarm.
5. IntheAudible Alarmpane,clickAdd Sound Rule.

Add Sound Ruledialogopens.

6. FromtheAlarmCriterialist,selecteitherSeverityorAlarm Number.
7. Basedontheselectedcriteria:
a. SelectthealarmseverityfromtheValuelist.
b. EnterthealarmnumberintheValuefield.
AlarmNumberrangeisfrom0to2147483647.
8. Youcanentermultiplealarmnumbersseparatedbycomma(,).
Forexample,9255,9633,andsoon.
9. SelectthetypeofsoundfromtheTypelist.
Forexample,Beep.
10. TochecktheAlarmSound,clickPlay.
11. ClickOK.
12. Tosetthesoundinterval,enterthevalueinSound Polling Interval field.
13. Tosave,clickOK.
Result: AlarmSoundRuleisdefined.
IfAlarmSoundRuleisadded,AlarmSoundcolumninAlarmListdisplays
thespeakericononlyiftheincomingalarmsmatchestheAlarmSoundRule.

Lab exercise: NetAct Monitor Desktop

Context
Thissectionteststhestudentsonthefollowingskills:
IdentifythepartsoftheMonitordesktop.
IdentifytheToolsgroups.
DescribethepurposeofeachToolgroup.
Rearrangethetoolsinthedesktop.
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthemonitordesktop.
Figure 55: NetAct Monitor Desktop

Procedure
1 IdentifythedifferentpartsoftheGraphicalUserInterface:MenuTools,Explorer
window(accordinglytoselectedtool:forexamplemanagedobjecttab)and
WorkingArea(MonitoringDesktop).
Result of this step

WhichapplicationsgroupscanyoufindundertheToolsmenu?
Whatisthepurposeofeachgroup?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
2 Openthefollowingtools(ifnotpreviouslyopened):ObjectExplorer,Alarm
Monitor,AlarmHistory,Details.
Information
Thetoolswillopeninapredefinedpositionintothedesktop.
a) Rearrangethepositionofthetoolsinthedesktopandsavethechangesin
theworkspace.
Result of this step

Describetheprocedure.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Monitoring Network
Fault Management Workflow
Thebasicrequirementforkeepingtelecommunicationservicesupandrunning,isa
goodunderstandingofthenetworksituation.Networkelementscontainmonitoring
anddiagnostictoolsfordetectingvarioustypesoffaultsituations.Inatypical
situationanetworkelementrecognizesmalfunctionandsendsanalarmtoNetAct.
Asinglefaultinthenetworkcancauseanumberofvariousalarmsinseveral
networkelements.Thereliabilityofthealarmdatabaseandefficientnetwork
troubleshootingpracticesformabaseforsuccessfulnetworkmanagement.
Establishedalarmanalysispracticesareapartofthetroubleshootingprocess.
Faultsthataffectthequalityofserviceand,therefore,arevisibletothesubscriber
havetoberecognizedandcorrectedassoonaspossible.NetActoffersnetwork
managementtoolsforreliablealarmcollectionandmonitoring.Itprovidesasetof
toolsforpre-processing,storing,anddisplayingalarmandeventinformationfrom
thenetworkinrealtime.
NetActMonitorofferstoolsforcollectingandstoringreal-timeinformationfromthe
networktodetectandanalyzefaultsinnetworkelementsandformonitoringthe
qualityofserviceprovidedbythenetwork.
Thereareanumberofcommonfaultmanagementworkflows.Faultmanagement
usuallybeginswithroutinemonitoringandthediscoveryofafaultorfaultsinthe
systemwhichtriggersanalarmoraseriesofalarms.Theworkflowexamplebelow
illustratesatypicalmonitoringworkflowandcombinesservicesfromdifferentNetAct
ManagedObjectandMonitoringtoolsliketheAlarmList,NetworkView,Trouble
TicketList,ObjectExplorer,andTroubleTicketDetails.
AlarmsaredisplayedintheAlarmListtool.UsercanselectanalarmfromAlarmList
todisplaytheexistingtroubleticketsforthemanagedobjectorthesite.TheFind
functionintheTroubleTicketListtoolprovidesthisoutputdirectlyfromtheselected
alarm.Todisplayfurtherobjectattributes,theusercannavigatetotheobject
propertiesinObjectExplorer.Fromtheretheycannavigatetoviewsthatincludethe
objectandinvestigatetheconnectivityorstatusoftheobjectandenvironment.After
collectingalltherequiredinformation,theusercancreateanewticket,ifneeded,or
attachthealarminformationtoanexistingticketinonesinglestep.
Figure 56: Fault Management Workflow

Alarm Monitoring Tools

Alarmmonitoringisexecutedbyverifyingthealarmstatusofthemanagedobjects,
identifying,prioritizingandprocessingthenewincidentsandexecutingtherelated
actionsinordertosolvethefaults.
InNetAct,AlarmMonitoringtaskscanbeexecutedfromtwoapplications.Usingthe
networkviews,incomingandexistingalarmscanbevisualizeddirectlyonthe
symbolsoftheaffectednetworkelementsinasummarizedway.UsingAlarmList,
theactivealarmsarepresentedasatableinwhicheachrowrepresentsonealarm
receivedbyNetActandthecompletegroupofalarmsprovidesaninstantoverview
ofalarmstatus.
Withthenetworkviewsoralarmlist,theactivealarmsareshowninstantlyasthey
appearinthenetwork.Thecontextmenufunctionalitiesavailableinthetwo
applications(rightclickpop-upmenuineachmanagedobjectoralarm)workasa
platformforinvestigatingproblemsfurther,providingtheoperatorwiththeabilityto
reactimmediately.
Inthefollowingsectionsthealarmmonitoringviaalarmlistwillbeexplainedin
detail.
Alarm List Monitoring Tools

ThereisagroupofapplicationsinNetActthatprovidethesupportfortheAlarm
Monitoringusingalarmlists:
AlarmList
AlarmHistory
WarningList
AlarmDetails
AlarmFilterExplorer
RuleExplorer
RuleAnalyzer
FMPipeStatistics
TheaccesstotheseapplicationsisprovidedfromthemenuToolsMonitoring
Desktop ordirectlyfromdifferentcontextmenusinotherapplications.
Managed Objects Tools

TheManagedObjects(MO)toolsallowcreation,modification,andmanagementof
networktopologydata.ManagedObjectsutilizestheconceptofmetadatathat
definesthetypesnetworkelementobjectsinthenetworkandtheirrelations.The
MOtoolscanbeusedtomodelmanagedobjectsandnetworktopology.
Theobjectdataisavailableinthemonitoringtoolstosupportthemonitoringprocess
withtherelevantinformationupontheobjects.Thedesktopincludesasetof
integratedtoolstoadministrateandconfigurethemonitoredobjects.

Figure 57: Alarm Monitoring Tools and Managed Objects Tools

Alarm Monitoring using Alarm Lists

TheAlarmListtoolgivestheuseranoverviewofallalarmsthatarecurrentlyactive.
TheAlarmListispresentedasatableandeachrowofthetableshowsonealarm
receivedbyEventCollectionEngine.
Alarmsaredataobjectsthatreceiveserviceactionsfromothertools.Byright
clickinganalarmitwillbedisplayedalltheactionsthatarecurrentlypossibleand
offeredbyallthetoolsavailable.WithAlarmListtheusercan:
Acknowledge,unacknowledgeorclearanalarm
Create,delete,attach,orqueryrelatedtroubletickets
Launchcontextrelatedexternalapplicationorelementmanager
Navigatetorelatedobjectinformationinexplorerorviews
DisplayprobleminstructionsinAlarmDetails
Consolidateusingfilterorquickfilter
Selecttheattributestobedisplayedandconfigurerowappearance.
Sortbyseveralattributes
Managethemaintenancemodeoftheobject
Requestalarmsynchronization
Itisimportantthatallrelevantinformationfortheongoingtaskisshown.Forthis
purpose,theusercanadjusttheappearanceofthetableaccordingtohis/her
needs.
Foraquicksearchinsidethetable,theQuickfilterfeaturehelpstoselectanycellof
thetableandshowonlytherowswhosecolumncontentmatchestheselectedcell.
TheQuicksearchoptionfilterstheloadedalarmdataforaselectedattributeusing
symbolslike<,>,and<>.
AlarmListinteractswithothertools.Forexample,toviewthealarmssentbythe
selectedobject,theusercandragamanagedobjecttoanopeninstanceofAlarm
ListorselectamanagedobjectinanyothertoolandselectFindinAlarmListfrom
thepop-upmenu.
FromAlarmListthereisalsoaccesstoactionsandservicesfromothertools.For
example,theusercanselectanalarmingobjectandFindinNetworkViewtoopena
listofviewscontainingthisalarmingorcontrollingobject.Toopenanexistingtrouble
ticket,theusercandragthealarmtotheTroubleTicketDetailstool.

Figure 58: Monitoring the Network Using Alarm Lists

101
Special Columns in Alarm List

TherearethreecolumnsintheAlarmListsthatallowsabettervisualizationofalarm
handlingandalarmbehavior:
Instancecountercolumn
ConsecutiveNumber
AlarmInsertionTime
Instance counter columnshowsthenumberoftimesanalarmhasbeenraised

repeatedly(duplicates).Forexample,analarmwhichhasbeenrepeatedlyraised10
timesmayindicateacriticalproblem,althoughtheseverityisonlyMajor.
Howeveritisnotclearwiththiscounteralonehowrecentoroldtheduplicateshave
been.
WiththeadditionofAlarm Update Timecolumnusercanseeifthealarmwas
repeatedrecentlyorwasitanolderduplicate,therebygainingavaluableinsight
abouttheproblem.
Consecutive Numberisanattributethatuniquelyidentifiesthealarmatthe
Northbound(NB)system.Soifauseratthehighermanagementsystemwantsto
refertoNetActandconfirmthattheissueisstillactive(andnotcleared)onthe
NetActside,itbecomeseasiertocomparetheConsecNumberofthealarmonthe
NBsystemandonNetActusingthisuniquevalue.Earlier,theuserhadtocompare
thisusingthreeattributes(DistinguishedName,AlarmNumberandNotificationId).
Alarm Insertion Timeisthetimeatwhichthealarmwasactuallyinsertedintothe
AlarmDatabase,whereasAlarmTimeisthetimeatwhichthealarmwasoriginally
raisedontheNEside.InsertTimegivesvaluableinsightwhethertherearedelays
betweenthealarmgettingraisedandthetimethatitgetsstoredintotheAlarm
Database.
Figure 59: Special Columns in Alarm List

Alarm Details
TheAlarmDetailstoolhelpstheusertotroubleshootalarms.Itprovidesadeeper
insightintothedetailsofthealarmthatcannotbeshownaseffectiveinthetable
viewofAlarmList.
Becausethenameofanalarmisoftennotmeaningfulenoughtofullyexplainits
origin,theAlarmDetailstoolexplainsthesenseofeachalarmindetail.Additional
parameterslikeSupplementaryInfoandDiagnosticInfoaredetailed,andunclear
valuechainsaretranslatedtocleartext.
Forinexperiencedpersonnel,aninstructionssectionexplainsforeachalarmwhatto
donextwiththisalarminordertotroubleshootit.
Forcorrelatedalarms,AlarmDetailsshowsthesourcealarmstotheuser.The
instructionssectioncanbeextendedwiththeuserownfindingstoreflectlocal
workingprocedures.
AlarmDetailsautomaticallydisplaysthedetailsofeveryalarmselectedinAlarm
List.WhenAlarmDetailsislaunchedwithinthecontextofagivenalarm,thescope
ofthetoolremainsfixed.Itispossibletolaunchanumberofinstancesofthetool.
WithAlarmDetailstheusercan:
Compare,matchandexpandalarmfields
Addoredituserinformation
Acknowledge,Un-acknowledgeandCancelalarms
Draganddropmanagedobjects
Deletealarmsofanobjectanditssubnetwork
Uploadalarms
Checkactivealarmsoffaultyobjects
Figure 60: Alarm Details

103
Alarm History
TheAlarmHistorytoolisusedtoexaminethehistoricalalarmdataofoneormore
managedobjects.
UnliketheAlarmListtoolthatonlyshowscurrent(notcanceled)alarms,Alarm
HistoryshowsallthealarmscontainedintheFMdatabasethatmatchthegivenfilter
criteria.
TheAlarmHistorytooldisplaysallthealarmsincludingwarningsandcanceled
alarmscontainedintheFaultManagement(FM)database.
WithAlarmHistory,theusercanperformthefollowingtasks:
Acknowledge,unacknowledgeandcancelthealarms
ViewAlarmproperties
Performaquicksearchfortherequiredalarm
FilteranAlarm
Customizethetool
Applyaquickfilter
Addnoteforanalarm
InAlarmList,AlarmHistoryandAlarmDetails,theuserneedsauthorizationrightsto
acknowledge,unacknowledge,andcancelanalarm.
Figure 62: Alarm History

Warning List
Thewarningsprovideinformationontemporaryerrorsituationsoralarmsthat
indicatepotentialproblemsandunusualsituations.Unlikeproblemalarms,warnings
donothavestartandendtimesandarenotcanceled.
TheWarningListtoolisusedtoexaminethewarningsofoneormoremanaged
objects.Thecancel,acknowledgeandunacknowledgeoperationsarenotavailable
whentheobjectmenuofanobjectisselected.
ThefeaturesandtheappearanceoftheWarningListtoolcorrespondtothose
describedintheAlarmListsection.
WithWarningListtool,theusercanperformthefollowingtasks:
Viewpropertiesofawarning
Performquicksearchforarequiredwarning
Filteranalarm
Customizethetool
Applyquickfilter
Addnotesforalarm
Figure 63: Warning List

105
Reconfiguring the Alarm and Warning Lists display

Thefigureillustratesthereconfiguringalarmsandwarninglistdisplay.
Figure 64: Reconfiguring Alarms and Warning List Display
Displaying, hiding and reordering columns for Table views

Toselectwhichcolumnstodisplay,clickthebuttonjustabovethescrollbarorright-
clickontheheaderrowtoopentheSelectVisibleColumnsdialog.TheAvailable
ColumnslistontheleftshowshiddencolumnsandtheSelectedColumnslistonthe
rightshowsthecolumnsthataredisplayed.Todisplayacolumn,clicktoselectitin
theAvailableColumnslistandthenclickthearrowbuttonpointingtotheright.To
hideacolumn,clicktoselectitintheSelectedColumnslistandthenclickthearrow
buttonpointingtotheleft.
Tochangetheorderinwhichcolumnsaredisplayed,clickthecolumnnameinthe
AvailableColumnslistoftheSelectVisibleColumnsdialogandthenusetheupand
downarrowstotherightofthelisttoadjusttherelativepositionofthecolumn.Inthe
Tableitself,youcanalsoclickthecolumnheaderanddragthecolumnintoanew
location.
Sorting data in Tables

TosortdatainTables,clickthecolumnheaderyouwanttouseassortcriterion.The
currentsortingcriterionisindicatedbyasmallarrowinthecolumnheader.The
directionofthearrowinthecolumnheaderindicatesthesortorderupfor
ascendinganddownfordescending.
To sort data by using many columns as criteria,holddownthekeyandclickthe
columnheadersintheorderthatyouwantsortingtobeapplied.Yourfirstclickisthe
primarysortcriterion,yoursecondclickthesecondaryandsoon.

Immediate access to Alarm and Object Tasks from Alarm Lists

Userscanlaunchapplicationsthroughcontext-sensitivemenusforaselectedalarm.
ThesemenusarevisibleinalltheAlarmListstools(AlarmList,AlarmHistoryand
WarningList)andprovideaccesstoalarmprocessingtasks,managedobjectstasks
andalarmprocessingfortheaffectedobjectandmanagedobjecttasksandalarm
processingforthecontrollingobjectoftheaffectedMO.
Context-sensitive launch
Right-clickanalarmandselectthedesiredapplicationeitherfromtheshortcut
menu,orfromthecorrespondingsubmenu(forexample,thesubmenuforElement
Management).
Fastaccesstomanyfunctions
Menuadaptstothecontext
Menuforalarms,workingsets,networkelementsandsoon.
Figure 65: Alarm List and Alarm Tasks

107
Alarm Monitoring using Network Views

ManagedObjectsinNetActcanbemonitoredbyusingNetworkViewsinthe
NetworkViewTool.Thefollowingsectionsexplainhowthemanagedobjectsare
visualizedandtheviewsandthemeaningofcolorsandornamentsinthe
correspondingsymbolsrepresentingtheobjects.
Hierarchicalandscalableviewsovertheentiremanagednetworkarevisualizedin
theNetworkViewtool.Thegraphicalviewscanbeadjustedtothedifferent
monitoringneedsfromnetwork-widemonitoringtoobject-levelandtechnology-
specificmonitoring.Intheupper-levelviews,userscanquicklyseethegeneral
situationofthemanagednetwork.Movingtoasubviewshowsthealarmingobjects.
MonitoringDesktopprovidesarangeofmonitoringtoolsthatcanbeaccessedfrom
NetworkView.
Acommonconceptinnetworkmanagementistohaveviewstothemanaged
networkthatistypicallyarrangedaccordingtotheobjecthierarchy,connectivity,or
otherinformationlevels.Theseviewscanmodeleitherlogicalorgeographical
aspectsoftheunderlyingnetwork.
ViewExplorervisualizestheviewhierarchythathasbeenimplemented.Itshowsthe
viewsinfoldersthatcanbeusedtostructureviewsforabetteroverview.TheView
Explorertoolprovidesasearchfacilitythatcanbeusedtofindviewsfordifferent
aspects,forexampleforcontainedmanagedobjects.
Youcanselectaviewformanipulationordisplaythedifferentattributesofthe
chosenviewinthePropertieswindow.Youcanalsocreatenewfoldersfornew
viewsormoveviewsfromonefoldertoanother.
Network View Tool

TheNetworkViewtoolprovideshierarchicalandscalableviewsovertheentire
managednetwork.Thegraphicalviewsallowdrillingdownfromanetwork-wide
overviewtothelowestmodeledelements.Intheupperlevelviews,userscan
quicklyvisualizethegeneraltopologyofthemanagednetwork.Thedetailed
relationshipsbetweenobjectsareshownwhenmovingtoasub-view.
Aviewcontainsthefollowingtypesofviewobjects:
ASymbolrepresents,forexample,amanagedobject,aservice,oragrouping
object.
ALinkrepresentsaphysicalorlogicalconnectionbetweentwosymbols.Links
donothaveanyrelationtothemanagedobjectdatabase.
Backgroundgraphicscover,forexample,rectangles,polygons,lines,andtext
labels.
Sub-viewscanbeattachedtoallkindsofviewobjects.Thelabeloftheviewobject
isdisplayedsimilartoahyperlink.

Loading Views in Network View

Context
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheViewExplorer.
Figure 66: View Explorer
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheViewExplorerandNetworkView.
Figure 67: View Explorer and Network View

YoucanopenaviewbyselectingitintheViewExplorertool,right-clickingitand
selectingOpeninthepop-upmenu.TheNetworkViewtoolstartswithanew
instance.Theviewisloadedintothetool,andtheobjectscontainedinthevieware
displayedwiththeirstates.YoucanalsoopenviewsbydraggingthemfromNetwork

109
ViewExplorertotheopenNetworkViewtool.
Procedure
1 OntheDesktopmenubar,selectToolsManaged ObjectsView
Explorer.
2 Browsetotheviewyouwanttoopen.
Information
Viewsareloadedinanyoneofthefollowingsub-step:
a) DragtheviewwiththemouseanddropitontheNetworkViewtool.
Information
ForthisyoumusthaveaninstanceofNetworkViewopen.
b) DraganddropaviewontothecurrentlyopenedNetworkViewtool.
c) Right-clickaviewandselectOpenfromtheshortcutmenu.
d) Double-clickaview.
3 Youcanselectseveralviewsatonceandopenthemfromtheshortcutmenu.
Information
IfaviewisalreadyopenedintheDesktop,itisbroughttothefrontandnot
openedasecondtime.TheNetworkViewopensontherightsideofthescreen.
UsetheBackandForwardbuttonsonthetoolbartoswitchbetween
theviewsinthesamepanel.

Network Views Monitor Modes

YoucanviewtheNetworkViewtoolintwomodes:
Monitoring mode
Viewsareconstructedfromtheviewobjectsandrepresentthemonitorednetwork.
Inthismode,youcanmonitorcompletestateinformationofthemonitoredobjects.
Thetooldisplaystwostates:
Topologystate
Alarmstate
Inthismode,youcanalsosearchformanagedobjects.Draganddropmanaged
objectfromObjectExplorertonetworkviewtoviewallthenetworkviewsinwhich
theobjectexist.Ifthemanagedobjectdoesnotexistinanyview,amessageis
displayed.
Edit mode
IntheEditmode,youcanmodifytheviews.Inthismodethestateinformationis
suppressed.
Editmodeisrestrictedtosomeusers,requiresadditionalauthorization.
Whenanotherusermodifiestheviewsinthedatabase,amessagetoreloadthe
viewisdisplayedandtheviewsareautomaticallyupdated.
ThetoolsinthelowertoolbarareavailableonlyintheEditmode.Inthe
toolbar,youcanselectonetoolatatime.Bydefault,deselectingatool
activatestheSelecttoolandtheMoveandResizetool.
Sometoolsareactiveonlyforasingleoperationandgetde-activated
automatically,whileothersarepermanentandhenceyoumustactivatea
differenttool(usuallytheSelecttoolandtheMoveandResizetooltoswitch
itoff).

111
Switching between Monitor and Edit mode

OpentheshortcutmenuofthetoolbyrightclickinganywhereandselectingSwitch
toEditModeorSwitchtoMonitorMode,dependingonthecurrentoperationmode
WhenchangingaviewandswitchtoMonitormode,theusersarestillpromptedto
savechangeswhenclosingtheview.
Figure 68: Network View Window: Switching from Edit to Monitor Mode

Navigating in the view hierarchy

Objectsandlinksinviewscanbeassociatedwithsub-views.Thisisindicatedby
bluelabelsandasmallsub-viewindicatorshowstheaggregatedalarmstateofthe
sub-view.
Thelabelsofviewobjectswithanassociatedsub-viewarebluewhenthey
appearforthefirsttime.However,thelabelsarepinkwhenthesub-viewhas
beenpreviouslyloaded.
Youcannavigateinviewhierarchyinthreeways:
1. Toopenitssub-view,clickthelabelorsub-viewindicatorofanobject.Thesub-
viewindicatorprovidesatooltipwiththenameoftheassociatedview.
2. Usethebackwardnavigationbuttontoreturntothepreviousview.Similarly,use
theforwardnavigationbuttontoloadthesub-viewagain.
3. Opentheshortcutmenuoftheobjecthavingasub-viewandselectOpenand
viewview name.
Figure 69: View Tool: Navigating in the View Hierarchy

113
Network Objects
Objectsarerepresentedbyiconsintheview.Thecolorandthedifferentvirtual
decorationsoftheiconrepresentthestateoftheobject.TheNetworkViewtool
supportsthefollowingstatesvisualizedbygraphicsorcolorcode:
AlarmingState
AdministrativeState
OperationalState
MaintenanceMode
TroubleTicketexisting
Noteexisting
Subviewexisting/subviewstate
Transmissionobjectscanbevisualizedbydifferentindicatorsforthetransmission
type.Complextransmissionnetworkscanbemodeledandvisualizedbynetwork
viewssupportingefficientmanagement.
Contextrelatedactionsonobjectscanbeinitiatedbyselectingtheobjectsandthen
right-clickingonthem.Dependingonthetoolsavailablefortheuser,theseactions
canincludeshowingallalarmsfortheobject,findingtheobjectintheobject
hierarchy,oropeninganelementmanagersessiontotheobject.
Thecolorsofthesymbolsforthenetworkelementschangeinrealtimeaccordingto
theactivealarmsituation,thatis,theincomingnewalarmchangesthecolorofthe
symbolindicatingthenetworkelementandanumbercanbedisplayedforamountof
alarmswithhighestseverity.Whenthefaultsituationiscleared,thecolorchanges
backtonormal.
Alarmsaredividedintofourdifferentseverityclass,eachclassisrepresentedbya
specificcoloronthenetworkelementsymbol:
***Critical(red)
**Major(orange)
*Minor(yellow)
WWarning(blue)
Figure 70: Network Objects in the Network View

Topology view objects
Figure 71: Topology Network View
Themanagedobjectsaredisplayedassymbolsorlinks.Itispossibletogroup
objectsandusethemasanchorsforsub-views.
Groupedobjectsarenotmanagedobjects;theyonlyrepresent,forexample,
anofficeoratransmissionequipmentintheview.
Symbols
Amanagedobjectsymbolprovidesthefollowinginformation:
Theobjectclassisrepresentedbythesymbolitself.Iftheobjecthasnoname,
therelativedistinguishednameisused.Therelativedistinguishednamehasthe
form <object class>- <object instance>.
Theobjectinstanceisshownontopofthesymbol.
Grouped objects are only available as symbols.Groupingsymbolsaretypically

usedasanchorsofsub-views.Theyarebasicallyvisualizedlikemanagedobjects,
butwiththefollowingdifferences:
Thesymboliswhite.
Asymbolhasnoobjectinstance,soonlythenameisshownbelowthesymbol.
Links
Linkscaneitherbesymboliclinks,orbeassociatedwithamanagedobject.Alink
thatisassociatedwithamanagedobjectprovidesthefollowinginformation:
Theobjectclassisrepresentedbythesymbolinthemiddleofthelink.
Thenameoftheobjectisshownbelowthesymbol.Iftheobjecthasnoname,
therelativedistinguishednameisused.Therelativedistinguishednamehasthe
form <object class>- <object instance>.
Theobjectinstanceisshownontopofthesymbol.

115
Symboliclinkscanhavealabelandatype.Theiconrepresentingthelinktypeand
thelabelarebothplacedatthecenterofthelink.Thefollowinglinktypesare
supported:
Cable
Leasedline
Microwave

Object States
Theobjectstaterepresentsdifferentphasesinthelifecycleofamanagedobject.It
showsifthemanagedobjectisoperationalandcanbemonitored.Theobjectstates
areupdatedautomaticallyandnomanualinteractionisrequired.
Table 8: Object States

Object Details Visualization
state
Non- Theobjectisfullyconstructedinthe Thedefaultmanaged
operational database,andrepresentseitheranon- objectsymbolisused.
networkobjectoramanagednetwork Alarmsarenotshown.
resourcethatiscurrentlyinthedisabled
state.Theresourceistotallyinoperable
andunabletoprovideservicetothe
user(s).TheobjectexistsintheTopology
database,buthasnoactualvalue
parameters.
Created Theobjecthasbeenpartially Thedefaultmanaged
from constructedfromanactioninitiatedbya objectsymbolisused.The
Network networkelement.Forexample,an exclamationmarkshows
incomingalarm,performance thatmaintenanceworkis
measurementoranuploadoperation required.Alarmsarenot
fromthenetworkelementcoveringonly shown.
asmallsubsetoftheobject'sattributes.
Thisstateindicatesthatnotallattributes
mayhavebeensetandthattheobject
instancemaybeviolatingsemantic
constraintchecks.Typicallythisisa
temporarystate,whichwillmoveto
Operationalassoonasacomplete
synchronizationoftheobjectwithits
uploadagenthasbeenperformed.
Operational Thisstateisafully-constructedobjectin Thedefaultmanaged
thedatabase,whichrepresentsa objectsymbolisused.
managednetworkresourcethatis Alarmsareshown.
currentlyinenabledstateaccordingto
CCITTrecommendationX.731
InformationTechnologyOSI:The
resourceispartiallyorfullyoperable.

117
Administrative State
Theadministrativestateindicateswhethertheobjectcancarrytrafficornot.Itis
automaticallyupdatedintheview.Theadministrativestatesoftheobjectarevisible
onlywhentheobjecthasAdministrativeStateTypeattributedefinedinthecore
adaptation.Thefollowingstatesaresupported:
Table 9: Administrative State
Object Details Visualization
state
Locked Theresourceisadministratively Identifiedbyasmallpad
prohibitedfromperformingservicesfor lockattheupperleftcorner
itsusers. ofthemanagedobject
symbol.
Shutting Useoftheresourceisadministratively Identifiedbyasmallarrow

Down permittedtoexistinginstancesofuse attheupperleftcornerof
only.Whilethesystemremainsin themanagedobjectsymbol.
shuttingdownstate,themanagermayat
anytimecausethemanagedobjectto
reverttotheunlockedstate.
Unlocked Theresourceisadministratively Notvisualized

permittedtoperformservicesforits
users.Thisisindependentofitsinherent
operability.
Nostate NetworkViewtoolhasnoinformationon Notvisualized

available thestateoftheobject.

Operational states
Theoperationalstatedescribeswhetherornottheobjectisphysicallyinstalledand
working,andisabletoprovideservice.Thefollowingtabledescribestheoperational
statesofamanagedobjectsandtheirvisualization.
Table 10: Operational States

Operational Details Visualization
state
Enabled Theresourceisfullyoperationaland Thedefaultmanaged
availableforuse objectsymbolisused
Disabled Theresourceisunabletoprovide Identifiedbyaredcross

servicetoitsclientsandthereissome markattheupperleft
correctionrequired cornerofthemanaged
objectsymbol.

119
Maintenance Mode
IfyoursystemincludestheoptionalMaintenancemodefeature,objectscanalsobe
inthefollowingstates:
Table 11: Maintenance State

Object state Details Visualization
Maintenance Theobjectfromwhichthe Identifiedbyasmallindicatorinthe
ModeRoot maintenancemodehasbeen upperrightcornerofthemanaged
activatedandcanbe objectsymbol.Whenamanaged
deactivated objectisoperationalandsetto
maintenance,themanagedobject
symbolisdisplayedinpurplecolor
Maintenance Theobjectwhichhasbeenput Identifiedbyasmallindicatorinthe

ModeChild intothemaintenancemodeas upperrightcornerofthemanaged
apartofthesubnetworkof objectsymbol.
MaintenanceModeRoot.
Maintenance Theobjectisnotunder Novisualization

ModeOff maintenance

Tool tip and Notes indicator
Figure 72: Tool Tips and Notes
Tool tip
ForeverymanagedobjectintheNetworkViewtool,theTooltipdisplaysthename
oftheobjectandthefollowingstates:
AdditionalStateInfo:
TheTooltipdisplaysthisinformationonlyifthemanagedobjectsupports
ResourceState.
OperationalState:
ResourceState.
CommunicationState:
CommunicationState.
Notes indicator
WhentheNotesIndicatorisswitchedONforamanagedobject,clickingtheNotes
Indicatoricondisplaysthelatestnoteaddedforthatmanagedobjectinaballoon.
NotesIndicatorON
TheNotesIndicatoriconinthemiddleleftcornerofthemanagedobjectindicates
thattheNotesIndicatorisswitchedONfromtheNotestoolforthemanagedobject.
WhenyouclickontheNotesIndicatoricon,thelatestnoteaddedforthemanaged
objectisdisplayedinaballoon.
NotesIndicatorOFF
TheusercannotviewtheNotesIndicatoricon.Thisindicatesthatnonoteis
availableforthemanagedobject.

121
Alarm and Subview States

Thealarmstatesofthemanagedobjectcanbemonitoredinthenetworkviews.
Alarm state
Ineachnetworkelementtheworst-casealarmsituationisshown,thatis,the
severityoftheworstactivealarmisdisplayed.Alarmstatesareupdated
automatically,nomanualinteractionisrequired.IntheMaintenancemodethe
alarmsfornetworkelementsundermaintenancearesuppressed.
ThetablebelowcontainsthealarmseverityusedbyFaultManagement.
Severity Details Visualization

Critical Oneormorecritical(***) Red
alarmsactiveintheobject.
Major Oneormoremajor(**) Orange
Minor Oneormoreminor(*) Yellow
Unknown Undefinedalarmseverity. Gray
Indeterminate Thesystemcannot None
determinethecurrent
alarmstate.
NoAlarmsActive Theobjecthasnoactive Notvisualized
alarms.
A small sub-view indicator shows the aggregated alarm state of all network
elements in the sub-view (sub-view state).Thesub-viewstateincludesalarms
fromthewholesub-viewhierarchy,thatis,fromalllevelsofsub-views.
Thisallowstheconstructionofaviewhierarchythataggregatesthealarmstateof
manynetworkelements.
Thesub-viewindicatorusesthesamealarmcolorsasthealarmstate,theonly
differencebeingthatasub-viewindicatordoesnotblink,butusesbrightordark
colorstovisualizenewandacknowledgedstates.
Sub-viewstatesaredisplayedinasmallinformationiconatthebottomrightcorner
oftheviewobject.Thesub-viewstateisvisualizedbychangingthecolorofthesub-
viewindicator.
Alarm modes
Therearetwomodesforvisualizingthealarmstate.Thesetwomodesare
applicableonlyfornetworkelementsoranyobject(includinglogicaldevices)which
havetheirobjectstateasOperational.Networkelementswhichhavetheirobject
stateasNon-operationalorCreatedfromNetworkwillnothaveanyvisualizationof
thealarmstate.Thedifferentalarmseverityaremappedtocertaincolorsinboth
modes.IntheOptionsdialog,thealarmmodecanbeconfigured.
Themodesdifferinvisualizing,acknowledgedandnewalarms:
BlinkingMode
Thenetworkelementoranyobject(includinglogicaldevices)inOperational
stateblinksinthealarmcolorwhenthealarmisnew.Itstopsblinkingwhenall
alarmsareacknowledged.

Theblinkingmodehastheadvantageofusinglessspace.
Blinkingisvisibleonlyifthecolorofthenetworkelementandalarm
colorisdifferent.
BalloonMode
ThenetworkelementinOperationalstatedisplaysanalarmballoonshowingthe
numberofalarmsofthemostcriticalseverity.Theseverityofthemostcritical
acknowledgedalarmisshownasalarmborderaroundthenetworkelement.
Theballoonmodehastheadvantageofprovidingmoredetailedinformationon
thealarmstate.Itrequireslessconcentration,sincethehumaneyecan
distinguishdifferentshapesmoreeasilythandifferent(flashing)colors.
Toswitchbetweenthetwoalarmmodes,usethemonitordesktopTools
OptionsNetwork View.
Figure 73: Alarm Visualization Modes

123
Single RAN Site View

SingleRadioAccessNetwork(SingleRAN)Siteviewliststhemulti-radiosites
(MRSITEandSRANSITE)andtherelatedobjectswithacorrespondingsummary
viewofalarmstatesinatree-tableformat.
SingleRANviewenablesyoutoviewalarmsummaryatMRSITEorSRANSITE
level.YoucanalsovisualizetheRFsharingBTSsandthecorrespondingalarm
summarybyexpandingtheMRSITEorSRANSITE.
ThecompletehierarchyofBTSscanbeviewedbyfurtherexpandingtheMRSITEor
SRANSITEview.
Inthisview,youcanperform:
Elementmanagerlaunch
Statemanagementfunctions
OpenfilteredAlarmList,AlarmHistory,WarningList
AnalyzefaultsinaRFsharedBTSs
Thefollowingobjectparametersaredisplayedinthesiteview:
Objects
TheobjectsparameterconsistsofMRSITEandSRANSITEobjects.MRSITE
objects,BTSsassociatedtothatMRSITEandthecontainmenthierarchyof
BTSsinthetreeformat.ForobjectsunderMRSITE,nameoftheobjectis
shown.Iftheobjectnameisnotavailable,thentherelativedistinguishedname
isshown.
SRANSITEisalogicalobjectwhichhasaone-to-onemappingwith
SBTSandisaspecialcasewhereitdoesnothaveanameofits
own.ObjectsunderSRANSITEfollowtheusualnamingconvention
(thatis,iftheobjectnameisnotavailable,thentherelative
distinguishednameisshown).TheObjectsparameterinSingleRAN
Siteviewhasthefollowingnamingconvention:
RDN<Space>[Name].TheMRSITEisdisplayedas:MRSITE-mrsiteId
[mrsiteName]wheremrsiteIdistheinstanceIDoftheMRSITEand
mrsiteNameisthepresentationnameoftheMRSITE.The
SRANSITEisdisplayedas:SRANSITE-sbtsId[sbtsName]where
sbtsIdistheinstanceIDoftheSBTSmappedtotheSRANSITEand
sbtsNameisthepresentationnameoftheSBTS.
DistinguishedName
Thefullyqualifieddistinguishednameofanobject.
MaxAlarmSeverity
Thehighestseveritylevelofanyactivealarmoftheobject.
CriticalAlarmCount
Thetotalnumberofactivecriticalalarmspresentfortheobject.
MajorAlarmCount
Thetotalnumberofactivemajoralarmspresentfortheobject.
MinorAlarmCount
Thetotalnumberofactiveminoralarmspresentfortheobject.
UnacknowledgedAlarmCount

Thetotalnumberofactiveunacknowledgedalarmspresentfortheobject.
OperationalState
Theoperationalstateofthemanagedobject.
AdministrativeState
Theadministrativestateoftheobjectafterobjectcreationormodification.
ForobjectsassociatedtoMRSITE,MaxAlarmSeveritydisplaysthe
highestseverityofallalarmsagainsttheselectedobjectanditschildren
andthesamewillbedisplayedattheMRSITElevel.
InObjectExplorertool,theFind InSingleRAN Site View optionis
enabledonlyforobjectsassociatedtoMRSITEorSBTS.
Figure 74: Single RAN SiteView

125
Site View
Siteviewliststhesitesandtheassociatedobjectswithacorrespondingsummary
viewofalarmstatesinatree-tableformat.Youcanexpandasiteoranobjectto
viewitschildrenandcorrespondingalarmstates.Siteviewdisplaysthealarmstates
ofalltheassociatedmanagedobjectsandtheirchildrenforeachsiteinahierarchy.
Thefollowingobjectparametersaredisplayedinthesiteview:
Objects
DistinguishedName
MaxAlarmSeverity
CriticalAlarmCount
MajorAlarmCount
MinorAlarmCount
UnacknowledgedAlarmCount
Forobjectsassociatedtoasite,MaxAlarmSeveritydisplaysthehighest
severityofallalarmsagainsttheselectedobject.
Forasite,MaxAlarmSeveritydisplaysthehighestseverityofallalarms
againstalltheobjectsoftheselectedsite.
Thefigureillustratesthesiteview.
Figure 75: Site View
Finding alarms and objects

Right-clickasiteandselectFind intolistthealarmsrelatedtothesitewith
AssociatedObjectsandAssociatedObjectsanditsSubNetwork.Thistaskcan
beperformedtofindalarmsinAlarmList,AlarmHistoryandWarningList.
Right-clickanobjectandselectFind intolistthealarmsrelatedtotheobject.
ThistaskcanbeperformedtofindalarmsinAlarmList,AlarmHistoryand
WarningList.
Right-clickanobjectandselectFind intolisttheobjectinObjectExplorer.This
taskcanbeperformedtofindobjectsinObjectExplorerandNetworkView.

Filtering Site View

YoucanfiltertheSiteViewonsitesbyspecifyingthefiltercriteria.Inthefilter,enter
thesitenameorrelativedistinguishednameofthesite.Forexample,ifthefully
qualifieddistinguishednameofthesiteisSITEC-1/SITE-1thentherelative
distinguishednameisSITE-1.
Youcanenhancethefiltercriteriausing*and?wildcardcharacters.
Refreshing data
Clickthe icontoviewtheupdatedlistofmanagedobjects,theirchildrenandthe
alarmcountdetailsassociatedwithasite.Ifafilterisappliedtothesiteview,the
filteredresultisupdateduponrefreshing.

127
Finding Managed Objects

TheObjectExplorertoolallowsbrowsingthroughandconfiguringthenetwork
topology.Itisanintegralpartofthemostworkflowsinvolvingnetworktopology.The
tooldisplaysnetworktopologyinatreedefinedbytheObjectExplorer.
Besidesthetreehierarchy,thebrowsercandisplaythemainattributesofthe
correspondingobjects.Theresultisamixtureoftreeandtabledisplaythatusers
canfreelyarrange:thecontentofthetablecolumnstobedisplayedcanbeselected
fromavailableattributes,thesequenceofthecolumnscanbechangedwithdrag-
and-drop,andthesequenceofrowsinsideonehierarchylevelcanbesorted.This
featureallowstohavealltherequiredinformationinoneview.

Object Explorer
ObjectExplorerdisplaysthehierarchiesoftopologyobjects.Startingfromtheroot
object,thehierarchycanbeexploredbyopeningchild-levelbranchesofthe
underlyingtree.Inthecaseofmobilenetworks,therootobjectisthePublicLand
MobileNetwork(PLMN)object.Underthismainleveltherearecentralobjectslike
RNCs,MSS,MGW,NTHLRFEnetworkelements.Underthesehigh-levelobjects,
thecorrespondingchildobjectsareshown,forexamplePlatformobjectunderNT
HLRFE.
Theuserneedstoexpandeachnodetoviewtheassociatedchildobjects.By
default,thearrowmarktoexpandthetreeisshownforallthenodesirrespectiveof
whetherthenodehaschildobjects.Thisistoenablebetterperformanceofthe
ObjectExplorer.Fromtheshortcutmenu,theusercanselectcontext-sensitive
actionsfortheselectedmanagedobjects.
Thenumberofchildmanagedobjectsbelowaparentobjectislimitedto
10000objectsbydefault.Whenthelimitisexceeded,onlythefirst10000
objectsreceivedfromthedatabasearedisplayed.Anadditionalnodeis
addedattheendofthechildmanagedobjectstoindicatethatnotallobjects
aredisplayed.
IntheTree-Tableview,theObjectExplorertooldoesnotsupportnaturalsortingof
themanagedobjects.
WithObjectExploreruserscanperformthefollowingtasks:
Createobjects
SwitchbetweenTreeviewandTree-Tableview
Opennotesforaparticularmanagedobject
Navigatetoothertools
Displaytheobjectattributes
EdittheobjectattributesinthePropertiestool
Uploadalarms
Activate/Deactivatemaintenancemodeforamanagedobjectandforthe
subtree
Deleteallalarmsforamanagedobjectandsubnetwork
SelecttheobjectattributesintheTree-Tableview
Dragobjects
Filterobjects
WithObjectExplorer,youcanselectobjectstobeusedinothertools.Forexample,
oneormoreselectedobjectscanbemovedwithdrag-and-droptotheNetworkView
Editortoolwheretheyareusedtomodelaview,ortheobjectscanbemovedto
AlarmListwheretheobjectsfiltertheshownalarmstothecorrespondingalarms.

129
Figure 76: Object Explorer

Displaying the Managed Objects Attributes

Properties
ThePropertiestoolshowsdetailedinformationabouttheattributesofselected
objectsandinstances.Theseobjectsorinstancescanbemanagedobjects,network
views,rules,oralarms.Thetoolsupportsanautomaticfollowmode.Whenthe
Propertiestoolislaunchedfromthemainmenu,itautomaticallyshowstheattributes
ofanyselectedinstanceasuserselectsthem.Thiswaytheuserinstantlygetan
overviewofalltheattributes.ThePropertiestoolcanalsobelaunchedcontext-
sensitivelyfromthepop-upmenufromaselectedobject.Inthiscaseitkeepsthe
scope.
TheattributesshowninthePropertiestoolaregroupedaccordingtotheaspectsof
theselectedobjects.Thecombinationoftheseaspectsdependsontheselected
objectclass.
Attributevaluescanbeeditedbyselectingtheeditorbuttonontherightofeach
attribute,andmultipleselectedobjectscanbemodifiedinonego.Modificationof
thesevaluesissubjecttoauthorization.
Notes
Workinginthenetworkoperationsisateamexercise.Typicallymanyusersworkon
theincomingalarmsorobjectsofthenetwork.Coordinationandinformationsharing
betweenuserstakesplaceeitherbyusingTroubleTicketsorwiththesimplermeans
ofmakingnotes,seenbyallusers.
TheNotestoolenablestheusertogivecommentsonmanagedobjects.These
commentswillbevisibletootherusers,sothattheycaneasilyseethatsomebody
hasbeenworkingonagivenobject.
Thenotesattachedtomanagedobjectsworklikealogbook,wheretheusercanfor
examplenotedowntheworkthathasbeencarriedoutduringthelifetimeofthis
object.Theselogentriescancontainanyfreetext.Operatorsmightusetheseto
trackspecialproblems,changedunitsandsoon.
Thenotesforeachobjectcanhavemanyrecords,whereeachrecordisstoredwith
theusernameandthetimeofediting.
Othertoolscanindicatethatanoteexists.TheObjectExplorertoolcanshowa
columnindicatingnotesandtheNetworkViewtoolwillshowasecondarystateicon
decoration.
NotescanbeattachedalsotoAlarm.NotesIndicatorattributeinAlarmListshowsif
thereexistsnoteforanalarm.AlarmnotesarealsovisibleinNotestool.
Youcandisplaytheobjectattributesinthreeways:
UsingtheToolsmenu
Usingtheshortcutkeys
Usingtheshortcutmenu
IntheObjectExplorerwindow,selectanobject.Todisplaytheobjectattributes,
selectanyoneoftheoptions:
OnthemenubarofDesktop,selectToolsProperties.Or
Inthekeyboard,presstheCtrl + 1keys.Or
IntheObjectExplorerwindow,right-clickanobjectandselecttheProperties
option.

131
Theobjectdisplaysalltheattributes.Therelatedattributesaredisplayedinattribute
groups.
Thecommonattributesoftheselectedobjectsaredisplayedwhenmultipleobjects
areselected.Whenattributeswithacommonvalueareselected,thenthecommon
valueisdisplayed.
Whenattributeswithdifferentvaluesareselected,thendifferentvaluesareshown.
WhenaManagedObjectisselected,onlythepropertiesoftheselectedobjectare
shown.
YoucanonlyopenonewindowofthePropertiestoolatatime.
Figure 77: Object Explorer and Properties tool

Alarm Operations in an Object

Userscanperformanalarmoperation(forexample,acknowledgement)ona
selectedmanagedobjectanditssubtree.
Forexample,byselectinganobjectandacknowledgingitsalarms,thenallthe
alarmsoftheobjectareacknowledged.Youcanalsoacknowledgeallalarmsofa
subtree.
ThefollowingalarmoperationscanbeperformedfromtheObjectExplorerandView
Explorer:
Acknowledgingallalarms
Unacknowledgingallalarms
Cancelingallalarms
YoucanperformtheseoperationsonlyifAlarmView,AlarmOperation
permissionaregivenandobjectiswithintheScope(forexample,MRor
Site).
Acknowledging / Unacknowledging all alarms of an object or its subtree

Theusercanselectanobjectandacknowledge(unacknowledge)allalarmsof
selectedobjectoritssubtree.
Navigatetothemanagedobjectusinganyofthefollowingmethods:
OntheDesktopmenubar,selectToolsManaged ObjectsObject
Explorer.Or
OntheDesktopmenubar,selectToolsManaged Objects View

Explorer.
Toviewthemanagedobjectinviewtool,draganddropamanagedobject
fromobjectexplorerwhileviewtoolissetinmonitormode.
TheObjectExploreropenswithmanagedobjectsorViewExploreropenswith
availableviewforanobjectinviewwindow.
Youcanacknowledge(un-acknowledge)thealarmsusinganyofthefollowing
methods:
IntheObjectExplorer,selectanobject,right-clickandselectAcknowledge All
AlarmsAcknowledge Alarms for Object.Or
Intheviewtool,selectofanobject,right-clickandselectAcknowledge All
AlarmsAcknowledge Alarms for Object.
Youcanalsoacknowledgeallalarmsofthesubnetworkdependinguponthe
requirement.
TheConfirmationdialogappears.ClickYestoacknowledgeallalarmsofthe
selectedobject.Allalarmsoftheselectedmanagedobjectareacknowledged.
Selectoneobjectatatimetoacknowledgeallalarms.

133
Iftherearenoalarmspresenttoprocessforselectedobject,themessageNo
alarmsavailabletoprocessforoperationAcknowledgeisdisplayed.
Canceling all alarms of an Object

Inordertocancelallalarmsobjectanditsobjecttree,navigatetothemanaged
objectusinganyofthefollowingmethods:
OntheDesktopmenubar,selectToolsManaged Objects Object
Explorer.Or
OntheDesktopmenubar,selectToolsManaged ObjectsView
Explorer.
TheObjectExploreropenswithmanagedobjectsortheViewExploreropenswith
theavailableviewforanobjectintheviewwindow.
Theusercancancelthealarmsusinganyofthefollowingmethods:
IntheObjectExplorer,selectanobject,right-clickandselectCancel All Alarms
Cancel Alarms for Object.Or
Intheviewtool,selectofanobject,right-clickandselectCancel All Alarms
Cancel Alarms for Object.
TheConfirmationdialogappears.
Theusercanalsocancelallalarmsofthesubnetworkinthepreviously
mentionedwaysdependingupontherequirement.
ClickYestocancelallalarmsoftheselectedobject.
Selectoneobjectatatimetocancelallalarms.
Iftherearenoalarmspresenttoprocessforselectedobject,themessage
NoalarmsavailabletoprocessforoperationCancelisdisplayed.
Cancelingallalarmsofanobjecttakessometimetoprocessthealarms.
Thisoperationisnotdisplayedinprogresstracker.
Alarm Operations in an Object

Thefigureillustratesthealarmoperationsinanobject.

Figure 78: Alarm Operations in an Object

135
Searching for managed objects

Context
ObjectSearchenablesyoutoretrievemanagedobjects.Youcansearchfor
managedobjectsusingCriteriatab.Criteriatabenablesyoutodefineasearch
criteriaformanagedobjects.
Performthefollowingstepstosearchformanagedobjects:
Procedure
1 LogintotheNetActStartPage.
2 ClickMonitoringMonitor.
Result of this step

TheMonitorapplicationopens.
3 FromtheToolsmenu,selectManaged ObjectsObject Search.
Result of this step

TheObject Searchappears.Bydefault,Criteriaopens.

4 InCriteria,selectthecheckboxagainsttheattributebasedonwhichyouwant
tosearchtheobjects.
Information
IfyouselectObject Class,thelistofattributesdisplayedvariesbasedonthe
selectedobjectclass.
a) Selectthelogicaloperator(forexample,=)fortheattribute,ifapplicable.
Information
Ifyouselectlikeoperator,youcanusewildcardcharacters(%and*)for
multicharactermatchand(?and_)forsinglecharactermatch.
Ifspecialcharacters(*,?,_,\)ispartofthesearchcriteriaitself(nameor
DN),thenusebackslash(\)toescape.
Ifyouarenotescapingbackslash(\)characterintheabovecase,the
Object Searchtoolwoulddoitautomatically.
Specialcharacter%isalwaystreatedaswildcharacterevenifitispart
ofthesearchcriteria.
Information
Forexample:
IfobjectsearchisperformedusingPLMN-TEST/BSC-TEST*TEST\asthe
distinguishedname,thentheinputsearchcriteriashouldbe
PLMN-TEST/BSC-TEST\*TEST\\.
IfobjectsearchisperformedusingPLMN-TEST/BSC-TEST?TEST\asthe
distinguishedname,thentheinputsearchcriteriashouldbe
PLMN-TEST/BSC-TEST\?TEST\\.
5 Entertheappropriatevalueorselectfromthedrop-downlist.

137
Managed Objects List

ManagedObjectListisatool,whichdisplaysmanagedobjectsinformofatable
display.UnliketheObjectExplorertool,thefocusisnottheorientationinsidea
hierarchy,butmoretheinformationonselectedattributesandstatesofthenetwork
elementsrepresentedbythemanagedobjects.
Thehealthofthenetworkisnotonlydescribedbythesumofallalarms,whichare
displayedintheAlarmList,butalsobytheoperationalandadministrativestateof
thenetworkelements.
TheManagedObjectListtooldisplaycanbeadjustedwithrespecttotheattributes
shownincolumnsofthetable.Thetablecanbesortedbyanycolumn.
Ifauserhasthetasktomanagee.g.WCDMACellwithrespecttotheir
administrativestate,theManagedObjectListwouldbeconfiguredtoshowthe
administrativestateofthoseobjects.Sortingbythecolumnadminstatewould
showobjectwithdisturbedstateonthetop.ByapplyingafiltertotheManaged
ObjectList,theusercanrestricthisviewtoshowonlyWCDMACellobjects.Thelist
getsupdatedasstateschange.
Itispossibletomonitoranyattributeofmanagedobjectsusingthistool.
Figure 79: Managed Object List

Switching the view mode and selecting columns attributes

YoucanviewtheObjectExplorertoolintwomodes:
TreeviewshowstheiconsanddisplaysnamesofmanagedobjectsinaTree
view.
Tree-TableviewextendstheTreeviewwithadditionalcolumnsshowingfurther
propertiesoftheobjects.Inthisview,youcancomparetheattributesofobjects.
Youcanswitchviewsintwoways:
Right-clickanobjectandselectSwitch Viewfromtheshortcutmenu.
Or
Right-clickinthebackgroundofObjectExplorerwindowandselectSwitch
Viewfromtheshortcutmenu.
Theselectedviewmodedisplaystheobjects:
IntheObjectExplorer,right-clickandselectSwitch view Tree-Table.
ToopentheSelectVisibleColumnsdialog:
Right-clickthetableheader.
Or
ClicktheSelect Visible Columnsicon.
Selectthedesiredcolumnattributes.
Duplicateattributespresentindifferentobjectclassesofsameor
differentadaptationisdisplayedwithadaptationID,classIDand
releaseintheSelectVisible Columns dialog.
Toconfirmyourselection,clickOK.
Sortingofthemanagedobjectsisnotsupported.
Figure 80: Switching the View Modes and Selecting visible columns

139
Filtering managed object classes

TheuserscanincludeorexcludemanagedobjectsintheObjectExplorerbasedon
theobjectclass.
ToopentheObject Class Filterdialoguseoneofthefollowingmethods:
Right-clickinthebackgroundoftheObjectExplorerwindowandselectObject
Class Filterfromtheshortcutmenu.
Or
Right-clickanobjectandselectObject Class Filter fromtheshortcutmenu.
SelecteitherIncludeorExclude.
Inthedialog,selectthecheck-boxoftheobjectclasstoincludeorexcludethe
associatedmanagedobjectsintheObjectExplorer.
WhenShowreleaseisselected,thedialogdisplaysobjectclasswith
differentadaptationreleases.
WhenShowreleaseisselected,theobjectclassselectionappliesonlyto
anadaptationreleasewheretheobjectclassispresent.
Theparentscheck-boxisgrayedwhenachildobjectisselected.The
grayedcheck-boxofthechildindicatesthatsomeofthechildrenare
selected.
TheSelectedClassespanedisplaystheselectedobjectclasses.
Tocleartheselection,clicktheClear Selectionbutton.
ClickOK.
IfyouhaveselectedInclude,theObjectExplorerdisplaysallthemanagedobjects
correspondingtotheobjectclassselectedintheObject Class Filterdialog.Ifyou
haveselectedExclude,theObjectExplorerexcludesallthemanagedobjects
correspondingtotheobjectclassselectedintheObject Class Filterdialog.
Ifachildclassisselected,theObjectExplorerdisplaysbothparentandchild
objects.
Bydefault,thefilteristurnedoff.Iftheworkspaceissavedbykeepingthe
filteronintheprevioussession,thesameisappliedduringthenextlogin.
YoucanturnfilteronoroffbyclickingthefiltericonintheObjectExplorer.
Whenthefilterison,thefiltericonishighlightedintheObjectExplorerand
thefollowingmessageisdisplayed:FilterisON.

Figure 81: Filtering the Object Tree

141
Object Search
TheObjectSearchtoolallowsperformingthefollowing:
EntersimplefiltercriteriatoretrieverequiredmanagedobjectsintheCriteria
tab.
Draganddropmanagedobjectsthatusercandefinetoviewasdefault
managedobjectsinthesearchresult.Theusercandraganddropthemanaged
objectsintheObjects tab.
AddadvancedfiltercriteriabyenteringaSQLqueryintheAdvancedtab.
YoucanenterthefiltercriteriaforaworkingsetintheObject Searchwindow.
YoucanopentheObject Searchwindow,selectingontheDesktopmenubar,
ToolsManaged ObjectsManaged Objects.
TheObject Searchwindowthatappearshasthreetabsnamelywhichareas
follows:
Criteria
Objects
Advanced
Criteria:Thistabdisplaysalltheattributesthatareusedtoperformasearch.
SpecifythesearchcriteriausingtheavailableattributessuchasScope,Basic
Object,ManagedObject,ModificationAttributes,NotesAttributesandNetwork
Element.Forexample,youcanperformanyofthefollowingactions:
Tosearchforthemanagedobjectsthatfulfillthesearchcriteriaandtheir
respectivechildobjects,clickInclude All Children.
ToselecttheRoot,clickthecustomeditorbutton.
ToselecttheObject Class,clickthecustomeditorbutton.
Forthedesiredattribute,selectthelogicaloperatorfromtheoperatordrop-downlist.
Objects:Thistabisusedtodraganddropobjectswhileperformingasearch.
Basedontheselectionmade,afilteriscreatedwhileperformingasearch.Clickthe
Objectstab,anddraganddropthedesiredmanagedobjectsfromtheObject
Explorer window.
Toselectmorethan100objects,savethefiltercriteriaandcontinuethe
search.
Advanced:ThistabisusedtoenteranSQLqueryandperformasearch.Tofilter
theobjects,clicktheAdvancedtabandentertheSQLquerywhere/* edit
here */ isdisplayed.
ClickSearch.

Figure 82: Object Search
Thefollowingfigureillustratestheaddinginformationandexportingobjectsearch
results.
Figure 83: Adding Information and Exporting Object Search results

143
Viewing objects associated with a Maintenance Region or Site

YoucanviewobjectsassociatedwithaMaintenanceRegionorSitebyusingthe
ShowAssociatedObjectsoptionintheObjectExplorer.
OntheDesktopmenubar,selectToolsManaged ObjectsObject Explorer.
Theobjectspaneliststhemanagedobjects.
Right-clickaMaintenance RegionorSite,andselectShow Associated Objects.
IfMaintenanceRegionisselected,theObjectListwindowdisplaysbothmanaged
objectsandNEsassociatedwiththeMaintenanceRegion.
IfSiteisselected,theObjectListwindowdisplaysthemanagedobjectsassociated
withtheSite.
Youcanviewthefollowinginformationofmanagedobjects:
Name
DistinguishedName
MaintenanceRegion
Site
FormoreinformationontheObjectList,seeAbout Object List in Object List Help.
TheShowAssociatedObjectsoptionisdisabledwhenmultipleMaintenance
RegionsorSitesareselected.TheShowAssociatedObjectsoptionis
disabledwhenobjectsotherthanMaintenanceRegionorSiteisselected.
Figure 84: Object Explorer: Showing Associated Objects to a Maintenance

Region

Navigating to other tools

YoucannavigatetoothertoolsintheDesktopbyselectinganobjectintheObject
Explorerwindow.
Thefollowingaresomeofthetoolswhichdisplaysvariousinformationrelatedtoa
selectedobject:
AlarmList
AlarmHistory
WarningList
NetworkView
Tonavigatetoatool:
1. Right-clickanObjectandselectFind In.
2. Selectthetoolyouwanttoopen.
Figure 85: Navigating from Object Explorer to Other tools

145
Lab exercise: Object Explorer Tool

Context
DescribethemainfunctionalitiesofObjectExplorer.
UseObjectExplorerformanagingnetworktopology.
UseObjectExplorertofindpropertiesofMOs.
Procedure
1 OpenObjectExplorertoolinMonitorApplication.
Result of this step

DescribethemainfunctionalitiesofObjectExploreranditsrelationshipwith
othermonitortools(likeAlarmsandWarninglists,WorkingSetManager,
NetworkViews).
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

2 IntheObjectExplorertool,selectoneoftheMOsandopenthePropertiesPane
forthisObject.
Result of this step

WritedownthedataforthefollowingparametersoftheMO:
ObjectClass:
________________________________________________________
ClassRelease:
________________________________________________________
ObjectState:
________________________________________________________
GlobalID:
___________________________________________________________
DistinguishedName:
____________________________________________________
ParentObject:
________________________________________________________
3 CreateonenewManagedObject.
a) Listthestepsforthistask.
Information
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
Result of this step

Whatisthedifferencebetweenarootobjectandachildobjectinthecreation
process?
UsethepropertiespanetosetbasicpropertiesforyourManagedObject.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

147
4 FiltertheObjectExplorermanagedobjectstreeusingtheManagedObjectclass
filter.
Result of this step

Whichfilteringoptionscanyoufindthere?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
5 SwitchthetreeviewofObjectExplorertoTree-tableview.
Result of this step

Whatisthedifferencebetweenthetwoviewtypes?
IntheTree-tableview,selectmorecolumnsforvisualizationanddescribethe
process.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
6 InsertanoteforanyManagedObjectintheObjectExplorertree.
Result of this step

Whattooldoyouuseforthat?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Lab exercise: Object Search

Context
IdentifytherelationshipbetweenObjectSearchtools.
UseObjectSearchtobrowsethenetworktopology.
CreateStaticandDynamicWorkingSets.
Figure 86: Lab exercise: Object Search
Prerequisites
YouneedtoopentheObjectSearchtoolinMonitordesktop.

149
Procedure
1 ExporttoexcelthelistofallONENDSnetworkelementsintheNetActdatabase
(oranyothertypeofNEsavailable)whoseoperationalstateis"non-
Operational"
Result of this step

Listthestepsyoufollowforexecutingthistask.
WhatisthepurposeofWorkingSetsinNetAct?
HowaretheyrelatedtootherMonitortools?
Whatisthedifferencebetweenastaticworkingsetandadynamicworkingset?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
2 CreateastaticworkingsetwithallthemanagedobjectsinOperationalStatein
yoursystem.
Result of this step

Listthemainstepsforthistask.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

3 CreateaDynamicWorkingSetwithallthemanagedobjectsinOperational
Stateinyoursystem.
Result of this step

Listthemainstepsforthistask.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

151
Lab exercise: Configuration Database Modification

Context
Thissectionteststhestudentsonconfigurationdatabasemodification.
Creatinganobject
Modificationofanobject
Deletingobjects
Procedure
1 FromtheMonitortool,selecttheparentobjectoftheobjectyouwanttocreate.
Result of this step

Whatparametersneedtobefilledout?Areanyoptional?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
2 Usingtheobjectyoucreated,rightclickandselectProperties.
a) Clickonthebubbleswiththe3dotstochangeparameters.
Result of this step

Canyoumodifyalloftheparametersofthisobject?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

3 Selecttheobjectyoucreatedinpreviousstep,rightclickandDelete.
Result of this step

Arethereanyothertoolsthatallowyoutochangetheconfigurationdatabase?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

153
Lab exercise: Network Views

Context
Identifythecomponentsinnetworkviews.
MonitorAlarmsusingNetworkViews.
CreateandmanageNetworkviews.
Procedure
1 OpentheViewExplorerToolinMonitor.
Result of this step

Whatarenetworkviews?
WhatistheusageofnetworkviewsinNetAct?
Whatcomponentscanyoufindinanetworkview?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

2 Listsomeoftheviewsalreadycreatedinthesystem.
a) SelectoneoftheviewsandlistsomeoftheMOsmonitoredinthatview.
Result of this step

Howcanyouidentifythealarmstatusoftheobjectsintheviews?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
3 SwitchthealarmmodevisualizationfortheNetworkViews(balloonsof
blinking).
Result of this step

WhattoolinMonitordoyouuseforthat?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
4 Createanewview.
a) Selectinthe"Views"windowandnavigatetoNewView.Enterthename
andpressFinish.
b) SelectaMOinthe"Objects"windowanddragittoview.
c) Identifytheadditionalvisualconfigurationyoucanaddtotheview:text,
backgroundimages,lines,geometricalfigures,andsoon.Reconfigurefor
examplecolorsforbackgroundandtext,iconsalignmentandsoon.
d) Createanotherviewtobelinkedtothefirstoneasasubview.
Information
Selectthebackgroundinthenewviewandselectwiththerightmousebutton
SwitchtoMonitorMode.TheactualalarmstatusfortheMOsintheviewis
uploaded.
Result of this step

________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

155
Lab exercise: Alarm Lists and Warning Lists

Context
UsetheAlarmList.
UseofAlarmHistory.
UseofWarningListfornetworkmonitoring.
Procedure
1 OpenAlarmList,AlarmHistoryandWarningListtools.
Result of this step

WhatisthepurposeofeachoftheAlarmandWarninglists?
Whatarethedifferencesamongthem?
WhattaskscanyouexecuteinanAlarminAlarmListorAlarmHistoryList?
Seethecontextmenuforthealarm.
WhatinformationcanyoufindintheAlarmDetails?
Explainhowtochangetheorderofcolumnpresentation.Howcanyouchange
thenumberofcolumnsyouwanttoseeinyourAlarmList?
Testchangingthecorrespondingorderandselectingdifferentconfigurationsfor
columnspresentationforexampleusingsortingfunctionality.Exportthecurrent
alarmlist.
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

2 CreateandactivateanAlarmFilterinAlarmListforallcriticalandmajoralarms
forthelast24hours.
Result of this step

Listthestepsforthistask.
HowcanyoufiltertheAlarmListusingtheObjectExplorerorWorkingSet
tools?
Whatistheresult?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

157
Alarm Statistics Reporting

Alarm Reports Dashboard
AlarmReportsDashboardenablesdetecting,storingthefailuresinthenetwork,and
schedulingthereportgeneration.Itisforcollectingandstoringreal-timeinformation
fromthenetworktodetectandanalyzefaultsinmostalarmingnetworkelements
andformonitoringthequalityofserviceprovidedbythenetwork.
WithAlarmReportsDashboard,youcangetthereportofindicatedalarmreportsin
aspecificduration.AfterlogginginAlarmReportsDashboardfromNetActStart
Page,inmenubar,youcanaccessthefollowinggraphicaluserinterfaces:
SearchAlarms
ScheduleSearch
ScheduleTaskReport
Figure 87: Alarm Reports Dashboard

Alarm Reports Dashboard Configuration

Context
Thisfunctionisfordefiningthetimeperiodtokeepthesearchresultsandreports
datainsystemcache.Afterthedefinedtimeperiod,systemcleansthedataincache
automatically.
Usingsystemcachetosavethedataimprovesthesystemperformance,andsaves
thetimefordailyreportgeneration.
Thefigureillustratestheconfiguration.
Figure 88: Configuration
TodefinetheconfigurationforAlarmReportsDashboard,performthefollowing
steps:
Procedure
1 OnSearch Alarms,ontopofmenubar,clickConfig.
Result of this step

Configurationopensasapop-upwindow.

159
2 OnConfiguration,selectthecheckboxifyouwanttostorethedefinedalarm
searchresultinsystemcache.
Information
WhenAlarmReportDashboardgetsthesamedefinedsearchcriteria,this
optionhelpstosavethetimeandsystemloadforgettingthesearchresultin
cacheinsteadofsystemdatabase.
3 Changetheintervalforcacheclean.
Information
InthecomboboxofCleancacheevery,youcanenteraspecificnumber,or
clickthescrollbuttonofthecomboboxtochangethenumber.
Inthecorrespondingdrop-downlist,selectthededicatedtimetypeasneeded,
andtherearethreeoptions:days,weeks,andmonths.
4 Changetheintervalforreportdataclean.
Information
InthecomboboxofCleanreportdataevery,youcanenteraspecificnumber,or
clickthescrollbuttonofthecomboboxtochangethenumber.
Inthecorrespondingdrop-downlist,selectthededicatedtimetypeasneeded,
andtherearethreeoptions:days,weeksandmonths.

Search Alarms
Context
Thefigureillustratesthesearchingalarms:MostFrequentAlarmsorMostAlarming
NEs.
Figure 89: Searching Alarms: Most Frequent Alarms or Most Alarming NEs
TogetthemostfrequentalarmsinNetActwithAlarmReportsDashboard,perform
thefollowingsteps:
Procedure
1 OnSearch Alarms,inthedrop-downlistofSearchtype,select
Most frequent alarms.

161
2 InSearch Period,defineaspecificperiod.
Information
Therearethreeoptions:
Todayprovidesyouthedurationfromlastmidnighttothemidnightoftoday.
Thesecondoptionprovidesyouadedicatedduration.
Youcanchoosethespecifictimebyclickingthecalendariconnexttothe
fill-inboxofFromandTo.
Thethirdoptionprovidesyoutherelativeduration.
Youcanchooseaspecificlength(days,orweeks)tobetherelative
duration,anddefinetheendtimeoftheduration.
Themaximumdurationis180days.
3 UnderAlarm Properties,inAlarms numbers,enterthespecificnumbers.Use

commatoseparatethenumbers.
4 InAlarm text,enterthespecificalarmtext.
5 InSupplementary information,enterthespecificinformation.
6 Inthedrop-downlistofAlarm Class,selectaspecificalarmclass.
Information
Therearesixseveritylevels:All,CriticalAlarms,MajorAlarms,MinorAlarms,
AlarmsOnly,andWarningsOnly.
7 Inthedrop-downlistofAlarm type,selectaspecifictype.
Information
Therearefivealarmtypes:All,Communication,Equipment,Processing,and
QualityofService.
8 InManaged Objects,definethespecificmanagedobjects.
Information
Therearefouroptionsfordefiningthemanagedobjects:AllManagedObjects,
Selectmanagedobjects,DistinguishedName,andGlobalIDs.
AllManagedObjectsisforcollectingdatafromalltheexistingmanagedobjects.
Selectmanagedobjectsisforselectingspecificmanagedobjectsasneeded.
9 UnderAlarmFilters,inthedrop-downlistofMaximum amount of results,

selectadedicatedrange.
10 Inthedrop-downlistofAlarmsintotal,selectthededicatedrange.Inthedrop-
downlistofMark,setaboundaryfordisplayingthesearchresult.Theresult,
whichisovertheboundary,ismarkedinredwhiledisplaying.

11 ClickSearchtostartasearchbasedonthedefinedcriteria.
Result of this step

SearchResultopens,andshowsthesearchresult.Toresetthesearchcriteria,
clickReset.

163
Search Result
SearchresultshowstheresultafterclickingSearchonSearchAlarms.
Whensearchingforthemostfrequentalarms,thesearchresultconsistsofalarm
class,alarmnumber,alarmtext,NEcount,percentage,and28_days.Thefollowing
listgivesyouexplanationoneachitem:
ALARM_CLASSshowstheseverityofthealarm.
ALARM_NUMBERshowstheuniquenumericidentifierofthealarm.
ALARM_TEXTshowsalltextuaryalarminformationsentbyFaultManagement
Pipe.
ALARM_COUNTshowstheoccurrenceofthealarmstoredinsystemdatabase.
NE_COUNTshowstheamountofthenetworkelementswhichtriggeredthe
alarm.
PERCENTAGEshowstheproportionofthealarmtotheamountofallalarms
listedoncurrentpage.
28_DAYSshowstheoccurrenceofthealarmstoredinsystemdatabaseinpast
28days.
Whensearchingforthemostalarmnetworkelements,thesearchresultconsistsof
objectname,globalid,alarmcount,critical,major,minor,and28_days.The
followinglistgivesyouexplanationoneachitem:
OBJECT_NAMEshowsthenameofthenetworkelement.
GLOBAL_IDshowstheglobalidofthenetworkelement.
ALARM_COUNTshowstheamountofalarmstriggeredbythenetworkelement.
CRITICALshowstheamountofcriticalalarmstriggeredbythenetworkelement.
MAJORshowstheamountofmajoralarmstriggeredbythenetworkelement.
MINORshowstheamountofminoralarmstriggeredbythenetworkelement.
28_DAYSshowstheamountofalarmstriggeredbythenetworkelement,and
storedinsystemdatabaseinpast28days.
OnSearchresult,youcangetthedetailedresultanalysisbyclickingthe
correspondingitem.
Theavailableresultanalysisaremarkedinblue.Onceyouclickanyoftheblue
analysis,AlarmsDrillDownopens.
Alarms Drill Downshowsthedetailedresultwithachart.Accordingtothechart,
youcangetthemacroscopicviewofthenetworkelementsperformance,orthe
mostfrequentalarmsfrequency.
OntopofSearchresult,therearetwooptionsforexporting the search result:
ExportExcel
ExportCVS
Toexportthesearchresult,clickthecorrespondingicontochoosetheformatyou
wanttoexport,andthenchoosethedirectorywhereyouwanttosave.

Figure 90: Search Results

165
Scheduling Task List

UnderScheduleSearch,onScheduleTaskList,youcangetanoverviewofall
existingscheduletasks.
Thescheduletaskisforpredefiningsearchcriterionandindicatedsearchtime.Itis
essentialforsystemperformancemanagement.Forinstance,youcandefinea
specificreportingduration,andmakethescheduletaskworkatmidnighttoavoid
theimpactsfromabnormalperformance.Oncethesearchtaskstarts,the
correspondingsearchresultisavailableonScheduleTaskReport,andyoucanget
theresultbyclickingthetasknameonScheduleTaskList.
OnScheduleTaskList,youcanaccesstheindicatedfunctionsbyclickingthe
correspondingbuttons:
Newisforcreatinganewscheduletask.
Editisformodifyingtheexistingscheduletask.
Deleteisfordeletingtheexistingscheduletask.
Activateisforactivatingadefinedscheduletask.
Deactivateisfordeactivatinganactivatedscheduletask.
RefreshisforrefreshingScheduleTaskListtogetthelatestscheduletaskdata.

Schedule Task Report

Scheduletaskreportlistsallthereal-timereportsgeneratedforthecorresponding
scheduledsearchtasks.Therearetwopagestoshowyoudedicatedinformation.
Onscheduletask reportAll tasks,itshowsyouthegeneralinformationofall
existingreports,suchasTaskname,Createdon,andSearchcriteria.InTaskname
column,youcangetthededicatedreportbyenteringaspecifictasknametothe
emptytextbox.Also,youcanclickthecorrespondingcreationtimeofthesearch
tasktogetthedetailedreport.
Figure 91: Schedule Search and Schedule Task Report

167
Lab exercise: Alarm Report Dashboard

Context
Thissectionteststhestudentsonalarmreportdashboard.
Mostfrequentalarms
Drilldown
MostAlarmingNetworkElement
Filters
Figure 92: Lab exercise: Alarm Report Dashboard
Prerequisites
Procedure
1 OpentheAlarm report Dashboardandcreateareportofthetop20

Most frequent alarmsinthenetworkforthepastweek.
Result of this step

Whatalarmisthemostfrequent?
Keepthatreportandrunanotherreportfortoday.Hasanythingchanged?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

2 Clickonthemostfrequentalarmbluelinkbyreferingatbothreports.
Result of this step

Whatobjecthasthemostalarms?
Isitthesameobjectonbothreports?Whendidtheproblemstart?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
3 RunamostalarmingNEreportforthetop20problemsforthelastweekby
referingtotheobjectswereshowninthepreviousreports.
a) Runonereportforthetoday.
Result of this step

Dothesereportsmatchtheinformationyougotfromtheotherreports?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
4 Runareportusinganyofthefilters,maintenanceregion,severity,MOclass.
Result of this step

Howdoesthishelpisolatewhatandwheretheproblemis?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

169
Summary: Basic Fault Management

Module Summary
interface.
UsetheNetActMonitorToolstofindproblemswithintheNetworkandbeginto
findasolutiontofixthem.


171
Advanced Fault Management with NetAct

Module Objectives
NetAct.
Alarm Filtering and Reduction of Alarm Flow

Filtering the Alarm and Warning Lists
AlarmFilterExplorerandAlarmFilterEditorarethetoolsusedtomanagealarm
filters.UserscancreatefilterswithdifferentfiltercriteriaforAlarmlists.
ThedefaultFilterfolderinexplorercontainsallalarmrelatedfilters.Userscanadd
thefolderstodefaultFiltersfolder.
WithAlarmFilterExplorertheusercan:
Createnewfilters
Renamefilters
Deletefilters
Createnewfolders
Draganddropafilter
Import/Exportfilter
Setorunsetafilterasadefaultfilter
Displayfilterproperties
Figure 93: Alarm Filter Editor and Alarm Filter Explorer

Creating an Alarm Filter

Creating a Filter
Filterscanbecreatedusingdifferentfiltercriteria.Whentheuserappliesanalarm
filtertoanyoftheAlarmTools,thealarmsmatchingthefiltercriteriaaredisplayed.
Filtersarecreatedbysettingdifferentconditions(usingtheoperators).Forexample,
theusercancreateafilterwhichlistsonlytheCriticalAlarms.
Tocreateanewfilter:
1. OpentheAlarm Filter ExplorerToolandRight-clicktheFiltersfolderand
selectNew Filter.TheNew Alarm Filterwindowopens.
2. EnterthenameofthefilterandclickFinish.AnewAlarmfilteriscreated.You
caneditthefilterattributesinAlarm FilterEditor.
Whilenamingafilter,specialcharacters(*,|,\,/,:,",<,>and?)arenot
allowed.
Filternameshouldnotexceed256characters.
YoucancreateafilterifyouhaveCreatepermission.Tocreateanalarm
filterwithfilteringcriteria,theusershouldhaveModifyandCreate
permissions.Else,anemptyfilterwithoutanyfilteringcriteriaiscreated.
Iftheuserdonothaveanypermission,theoptionNewAlarmFilteris
disabledwhenyouright-clickondefaultFiltersfolder.
Configuring the filter conditions with Alarm Filter Editor

AftercreationoffilterwithAlarmFilterExplorer,theAlarmFilterEditorisopenedin
theNewFilterWindowreadytodefinethefiltercondition.Afilterconditionhasthree
parts:
Nameoffiltercondition
Operator,forexample,'='
Parameter(s)
TodefinethefilterconditionintheAlarmFilterEditor,right-clicktheAlarmpattern
andselectafiltercondition.
Apatternisalistofconditions.Withinapatterntheconditionsareconnected
byANDoperator,andpatternsareconnectedbyORoperator.Analarm
matchesthefilteronlyifallconditionsofthepatternarefulfilled.Alarm
patternisaddedbydefaultwhenafilteriscreated.
IntheOperatordrop-downlist,selectanoperator.Tablegivesthelistofoperators
thatyoucanusetodefinefilterconditions.
Editafilterconditionbasedonthetypeofeditor.
Whiledefininganalarmpattern,eithertheDistinguishedNameorthe
WorkingSetNamecanbeused.Bothcannotbeusedtogether.
Inthepop-upmenu,theattributenamesaredisplayedinthesameorder
asintherelevantPropertiestool.

173
FromtheFilemenu,selectSave.
Afiltercanbesavedevenifoneormorefieldsareinvalid,butifthefilteris
applied,thenitgivesanerrormessage.
Figure 94: Creating an Alarm Filter

Activating a Filter in Alarm or Warning Lists

Thefollowingfigureillustratestheactivationofanalarmfilter:
Figure 95: Activating an Alarm Filter
InordertoactivateafilterinanyoftheAlarmorWarningliststhereareseveral
options:
Drag and drop or copy and paste of a filter

FromtheAlarm Filter Explorertool,dragthepreviouslycreatedfilteronanyAlarm
Tools(AlarmList,AlarmHistoryorWarningList).
ItisalsopossibletocopyandpasteafilterfromtheAlarm Filter ExplorertoAlarm
toolsinordertoactivatethefilter.
YoucannotdraganddropafilteriftheAlarmListislocked.
Setting a filter as default filter

Whenafilterhasbeensetasadefault filter,whenopeninganyAlarmtool(Alarm
List,AlarmHistoryorWarningList),thefilterisautomaticallyapplied.Thefiltername
isshownastheactivefilter.
Toconfigureapreviouslycreatedfilterasadefault filter,opentheAlarmFilter
Explorertool,right-clickthefilterandselecttheoptionSet as Alarm Tool default
filter.
Therecanbeonlyonedefaultfilter.Anypreviousfiltersettingisreplacedby
thenewsetting.Iftheoptionisselectedagain,thecheckmarkisremoved
andthefilternolongerexistsasthedefaultfilter.
Drag and drop (or copy and paste) a Selected Managed Object, a group of
selected Managed Objects
FromtheObject Explorertool,dragtheManaged Object,groupofselected
managedObjectonanyAlarmTools(AlarmList,AlarmHistoryorWarningList).
ItisalsopossibletocopyandpasteafilterfromtheObjectExplorertoAlarmtoolsin
ordertoactivatethefilter.

175
Alarm Flow Reduction in NetAct

Ifnoalarmreductiontechniquesareimplemented,networkmonitoringbecomesa
reactiveprocess,whereanimmenseflowofalarmsarriveinNetActfromallpartsof
thenetwork.Thisreactivejobincludes:
Filteringtheenormousamountofinformationthatispresentedbyalarms.
Decidingwhichofthethousandsofalarmsthatarevisibleinthealarmhandling
applicationsareimportant.
Makingcorrelationsbetweenalarms,tryingtodecidewhichofthemarecaused
bythesameoriginalfault,andgroupingthosealarmstogether.
Findingsolutionsfortheproblemsthatcausethealarms.
Thesedailyactivitiesrequireconstantandintensiveattentioninnetworkmonitoring.
Ifstrategicdecisionshavetobemadeunderpressure,theriskishighthatservice
affectingfaultsremainunnoticedorunresolved,whichresultsinadecreaseinthe
qualityofservice.Additionally,theimmenseflowofalarmstomonitoringcanseta
heavyloadonthenetworkcapacity.
AlarmreductionwiththeNetActtoolsincludefilteringunnecessaryalarmsand
correlatingalarmssothatonlyonealarmindicatingtheactualnetworkfaultisvisible
innetworkmonitoring.Thehiddenalarmscanstillberetrievedfromthedatabasefor
closerinspectionofthefaultwhenneeded.

Selecting the correct alarm reduction technique

Differentalarmreductiontechniquescanbeimplementeddependingonthe
situation.Thegoalinreducingthenumberofalarmsinthenetworkcanbeeitherof
thefollowing:
Preventingalarmsthatareraisedbecauseofmaintenanceworkfrombeing
showninthenetworkmonitoringapplication
Correlatingalarmsthatareallrelatedtothesamefault,sothatonefaultresults
inonealarminnetworkmonitoring
Assigningahigherorlowerprioritytoaparticularalarm,dependingonitseffect
onthelevelofservice
ReducingtheAlarmloadonNetActDatabaseusingAlarm Filtering
Whenselectinganalarmreductiontechniquethatisfeasibleforaparticularneed,
considerthefollowing:
CanthealarmbefilteredfromtheNetActdatabase,orcanitbefilteredonly
fromtheNetActalarmmonitoringapplications?Isitfeasibletouselocalalarm
blockinginthenetworkelement?
Ifthealarmcannotbefilteredout,canitbesuppressedbyaprimaryalarm?Isit
enoughtohaveonlyoneprimaryalarm,ordoesthesecondaryalarmhastobe
suppressedbytwoormoreprimaryalarms?

177
Implementing feasible alarm reduction techniques

Afterselectingthecorrectalarmreductiontechniqueaccordinglytotheanalysis
before,theNetActapplicationsshouldbeappliedeffectivelyforreducingtheflowof
alarmsinnetworkmonitoringwiththecorrespondingreductionmethods.
Thetypeofalarmreductiontechniquesthataremostfeasibleineach
networkdependontheactualnetworksituation.
ThealarmreductiontechniquesofferedbyNetActapplicationsare:
Reducingalarmscausedbynetworkmaintenance
UsingInformingDelayfortransitoryalarms
UsingAlarmFilteringtoreduceloadonNetActdatabase
Creatingeffectivecorrelationrules
Alarm flow reduction techniques

ThefollowingfigureillustratesthealarmflowreductiontechniquesinNetAct:
Figure 96: Alarm flow reduction techniques

Configuring Alarm Reduction in NetAct

ThealarmreductiontechniquesaremanagedinNetActwithtwofunctionalities:
MaintenaceModefunctionality
TheMaintenanceModefunctionalityisavailablefromthecontextmenuforthe
managedobjectsinObjectExplorer,AlarmandWarningListsandNetwork
Views.
Whenmanagedobjectissettomaintenance,allthenewalarmsfromthis
managedobjectarediscardedbytheFMplatformandarenotvisibleinthe
monitoringtools.Inthiswayitispossibletoavoidanoverflowofalarmscoming
fromanobjectunderalreadyknownmaintenancework.
RuleExplorer/RuleEditor
RuleExplorerandRuleEditorhandletherulesforAlarmeventsintheAlarm
Managementfunctionalities.Therulesgoverntheprocessingofthealarms
generatedinthenetworkandallowthereforetoreducethetraffic.Theyalso
facilitatesomecustomactionsonoccurrenceofspecificalarmsinthenetwork
andallowsfasterprocessingofalarms.
ThefollowingfigureillustrtaestheRuleExplorer/RuleEditor.
Figure 97: Rule Explorer /Rule Editor

179
Reducing alarms caused by network maintenance with Maintenance mode

Whensomemaintenanceworkornetworkelementintegrationisperformedinthe
networkandsomenetworkfunctionsarethereforetemporarilynon-operational,alot
ofunnecessaryandirrelevantalarmsareraised.Beforestartingthemaintenance
work,theoperatorcanexcludethenetworkelementsfrommonitoringsothatthe
maintenancealarmsarenotvisibleamongthelivenetworkalarmsintheNetAct
monitoringapplications.
Maintenanceisastateofthemanagedobject.IntheAlarmtools(Alarm List,
Alarm History,Warning List)andObjectExplorerispossibletochangethe
managedobjectstatewiththefollowingoperations:
SetunderMaintenance:
Setsthemanagedobjecttomaintenance,thatis,newalarmsfromthemanaged
objectsarediscardedbytheFaultManagement(FM)platform.
SetSubtreeunderMaintenance:
Setsthemanagedobjectanditschildrentomaintenance.
ResumeMonitoring:
Themanagedobjectandchildrenareremovedfromthemaintenancestateand
Alarmuploadwillbetriggeredautomatically.Iftheassociatedchildrenarenot
settomaintenance,onlymanagedobjectisremovedfromthemaintenance
state.
Fromthesamemenus,youcanselecteitherSet under Maintenanceor

Set subtree under maintenance.
TheMaintenancemodeforamanagedobjectanditssubtreecanbeactivatedfrom
theAlarmTools(AlarmList,AlarmHistory,WarningList)orObjectExplorer.
FromAlarmTools(AlarmList,AlarmHistory,WarningList):
1. Right-clickanAlarmandselectAlarming ObjectMaintenanceSet
under Maintenance.
Alternatively,Right-clickanAlarmandselectControlling Object
MaintenanceSet under Maintenance.
2. Right-clickaManaged ObjectandselectMaintenanceSet under
MaintenancefromObjectExplorer.
Thealarmingobject,controllingobjectormanagingobjectisnowsetunder
maintenance.
Whenamanagedobjectisundermaintenance,workstationalarm
9251israisedwiththetextNetworkElementUnderMaintenance.
ThestatusofthemanagedobjectundermaintenanceissettoNE
underMaintenancestate.Thestatusofamanagedobjectunder
maintenancecanbeaccessedfromthePropertiestoolunder
MaintenanceModeAttributes.

Figure 98: Maintenance Mode
Resume Monitoring
ThefollowingfigureillustratesresumingfromMaintenancemode:
Donotforgettoresumemonitoringafterthemaintenanceiscompleted.
Figure 99: Resuming from Maintenance Mode
Automated Maintenance Mode during NE software upgrade

TheautomaticmaintenancemodecanbetriggereddirectlyfromSoftwareManager
tool.WhentheoperatorselectsinthesoftwaremanagerwhichNetworkElements
hewillupdate,hecanselectalsohowlonghewillsettheseNetworkselementsin
MaintenanceMode,forexample,4hours.Thereforehedoesnotneedtoresume
themaintenancemodeafterthesoftwareupdate,itisresumedautomaticallyafter
themaintenanceperiodended,inthiscase4hours.

181
Managing Fault Management processing Rules

Rule Explorer and Rule Editor
RuleExplorerprovideshierarchicalstructureformanaginglargeramountofrulesin
theformofmultilevelfolders.AfolderinRuleExplorerisacontainerofmultiple
rules.Itispossibletocreatedifferentfoldersthatcancontaingroupsofrules.
Typically,thefolderscouldcontainrulesthatarealike.Folderscanbefurtherdivided
intosublevelfoldersinordertomanageevenlargeramountofrules.
Figure 100: Rule Explorer and Rule Editor

Managing Rules and Rule Folders

Thefollowingfigureillustratesthemanagingrules.
Figure 101: Managing Rules
Creating Rule Folders
1. Right-clickRule Explorer andselectNewFolder.

NewFolderwindowopens.
2. Createarootfolder.
a. CheckRootFolder.
b. ClickFinishtosavethenewfolder.
3. Createasecondlevelfolder.
a. InNewFolderwindow,enterthefoldernameinNamefield.
b. UnchecktheRootfoldertobrowsefortheparentfolder.
c. InSelectParentFolder,selecttherequiredfolder.
d. ClickSelecttosavetheparentfolder.
e. ClickFinishtocreatethesecondlevelfolderundertheparentfolder.
Creating a rule
Aruleisagenerictemplatefromwhichyoucancreateanykindofalarmrule.This
sectiondescribestheprocedureforcreatingarule.
1. Right-clickanysecondlevelfolderandselectNewRule.
NewRulewindowopens.
2. InNewRulewindow,entertheRulenameintheNamefield.
a. InSelectParentFolder,selecttheparentfolder.
b. ClickSelecttosavetheparentfolder.
c. ClickFinishtocreatetheruleundertheparentfolder.
Whilenamingarule,specialcharacterssuchas*,|,\,/,:,",<,>and?are
notallowed.Rulenameshouldnotexceed256characters.

183
Changing the Rule mode

Rulemoderepresentsthecurrentstateofarule.Therearetworulemodes:
Active
Intheactivemode,theruleisappliedwhenamatchingisgeneratedinthe
network.WhenarulemodechangestoActive,therulenamechangestopurple
colorwithboldface
Whenaruleisactive,isnotpossibletoedittheruleproperties.The
ruleeditoropensinReadOnlymodeandeditablefieldsremain
grayedout.
Activerulecannotbedeleted.
Inactive
Intheinactivemode,theruleisjustpresentandnotapplied.Inactiveruleis
representedbygreycolor.
Tochangetherulemode:
1. Right-clickaruleandselectChange Mode.
2. Toactivatearule,selectActive.
Todeactivatearule,selectInactive.
Itispossibletoactivate/deactivatealltherulespresentinafolder.
Right-clickadesiredRulefolderandselectActivateall
rules/Deactivateallrules.Ifbothactiveandinactiverulesarepresent
inRulefolder,theusercanselecteitherActivateallrulesor
Deactivateallrulesdependingonrequirement.
Userscanalsoactivate/deactivatemultiplerules.Selectthedesired
rulestoactivate/deactivate.Iftheselectioncontainscombinationof
activatedanddeactivatedrules,thenbothactivateanddeactivate
optionsareenabled.Dependingupontheselectedoption,relevant
rulesareactivated/deactivated.
Exporting Rules
Exportingruleshelpstostoretheruledefinitionsinasecondarystoragearea.This
helpstopreventunnecessaryrecreationofthesamerulesinthenewinstallation
site.
1. Right-clickaruleandselectExport Rule.
Savedialogopens.
2. Selecttheappropriatedirectory.
3. IntheFilenametextfield,entertherulename.
Whilerenamingarule,specialcharacterssuchas*(Asterisk),Pipe
(verticalbar),\(Backslash),/(Forwardslash),:(Colon),"(Quote),
<(Lessthan),>(Greaterthan)and?(Questionmark)arenot
allowed.
Rulenameshouldnotexceed256characters.
Renamedialogopens.

4. ClickSave.
Importing rules
Thissectiondescribestheprocedureforimportingrules.
1. Right-clickthetargetfolderandselectImport Rule.
Afileselectiondialogopens.
2. Navigatetotheappropriaterulefolderandselecttherules.Toselectmultiple
rules,presseitherShiftorCtrlkey.
3. ClickOpen.

185
General Rules with Rule Editor

RuleEditorallowsmodifyingtherulecontentsandproperties.Basedonthe
definitiongiventoaparticularalarm,actionsareperformed.
RuleEditorstructureseachruleinaconditionandanactionpart.Thecondition
canbeacombinationofalarmparametersthat,whentheymatch,triggertheaction
partoftherule.Alarmconditionscanbeexpressedinaflexiblewaysothatlistsof
valuesorwildcardexpressionsarepossible.Regularexpressionsupportenables
flexibleandsophisticatedruledesign.
ThecorrelationoutcomeisvisibleintheAlarmListtoolwherecorrelatedalarmsare
indicatedwithasymbol.Drillingdownintothecorrelationrawalarmsispossiblein
theAlarmDetailstoolthatshowstheinputalarmsandalsoallowstheirdirect
treatmentasalarmobjects.
WithRuleEditoryoucanperformthefollowingtasks:
Addalarmdefinitions
Applyrelationconditions
Addalarmactions
Addscheduledefinitionstorules
Summary:TheAlarmdefinitionsandtheRelationConditionsdefinethegeneral
conditionfortherule.TheAlarmActionsdefinetheActionpartoftherule.Optionally
theSchedulingdefinetheactivetimesforthealarm.
Figure 102: General Rules Definition

Alarm Definitions
ToaddanAlarmdefinition,right-clickaruleandselectAddalarmdefinition.Anentry
iscreatedforthenewAlarm.Bydefault,thefirstAlarmisAlarmA,thesecondis
AlarmBandsoon.EachAlarmpatternintheruleshouldbewithin4096characters.
Adding patterns
Toapplyarule,Alarmpatternshouldbedefined.Insomecases,youmust
createmorethanonepatternforanAlarm.IfanincomingAlarmmatchesthe
definedpattern,ittriggersanappropriateruleaction.
Toaddapattern,right-clickonanAlarmandselectAdd pattern.Toremovea
pattern,right-clickontheAlarms patternandselectRemove pattern.
Youcanuseoperatorstoassociatedifferentoperatorstodefinethealarmand
managedobjectattributesinAlarmPattern.Thefollowingtableliststhetypesof
operators,meaningandexample.
Youcanusethe"in"operatorwhiledefiningtheobjectproperties.
YoucanaddoneormorepatternsforanAlarmusingtheOR
operator.Forexample,twoAlarmpatterns,Alarmpattern1and
Alarmpattern2canbecreatedunderthesameAlarmA,usingthe
ORoperator.
MaximumnumberofORpatternssupportedinruleis15.
Thealarmpatternscanbefromthefollowingtypes:
AlarmProperties:likeAlarmNumber,AlarmTypeandsoon.
ObjectProperties:likeObjectClass,Distinguishednameandso
on.
ObjectMR/Siteproperties:MaintenanceRegionName,Site
Nameandsoon.
ControllingObjectProperties:likeControllingObjectNameand
soon.
Figure 103: General Rules Definition: Alarm Definitions

187
Operator Meaning Text Number Example

=operatorallowsyoutodefine
bothTextandNumbervalues.
However,thisdependsuponthe
selectedattribute.Forexample,
IfyouselectAlarmTextattribute,
thenvaluecanbebothtextand
number.
= EqualTo Yes Yes
IfyouselectAlarmNumber
attributethen,valueshouldbe
onlynumber.
Thisoperatorallowstodisplay
alarmswhoseattributevalueis
equaltoonegivenintherule.
<>operatorallowsyoutodefine
bothTextandNumbervalues.
However,thisdependsuponthe
selectedattribute.Forexample,
NotEqual IfyouselectAlarmTextattribute
<> Yes Yes thenvaluecanbebothtextand
To
number.
IfyouselectAlarmNumber
attributethenvalueshouldbeonly
number.
Aregularexpression=(regexp)is
apatternofcharactersthat
describesasetofstrings.For
example,ifthevaluedefinedfor
thealarmtextisAlarm
Equaltoand Text=(regexp).*net.*,alarms
=(regexp) regular Yes No containingtextnetaredisplayed.
expression Forexample,alarmswithtext-
internet,networkandsoon.
Regularexpressioncanbe
definedwithallthejavasupported
characters(*,?,+andsoon).
<>(regexp)-operatorallowsyou
todefinethetextwhichdoesnot
containthestringsoftextwith
operator.Forexample,ifthealarm
textisdefinedasAlarm
Text<>(regexp).*net.*,ruleis
Notequalto
<>(regex appliedonallthealarmswhich
andregular Yes No
p) doesnotcontainwordorpattern
expression
ofthewordnet.Forexample,rule
isnotappliedonthealarmswith
textasinternet,networkandso
on.Regularexpressioncanbe
definedwithallthejavasupported
characters(*,?,+andsoon).

Relation Conditions
Youcandefinecertainrelationconditionsbetweenalarms.Theactionsare
triggered,onlyiftherelationconditionsaremet.
Therearefourtypesofrelationconditions:
MO Relation ThisincludestherelationshipoftheManagedObjects
(MO),thatsendstherespectivealarms.
Time Window Thisdefinesthetimeintervalinwhichthealarmsarrive

forameaningfulcorrelation.
Count Condition Thisdefinesthenumberoftimesanalarmoccurs.
Order Condition Thisdefinesthenumberofalarmsthatoccurforagiven

timeintervalwithrespecttothealarmtime.
TheconditionsarecombinedwiththeANDoperator.
Inthetable,youcanfindthedescriptionofthedifferenttypesofMOrelations:
Table 12: Types of MO relations (1/2)
Network Scope A Scope B Description
Topology
Alarmstobecorrelatedmustbe
Thesameas Any Any
generatedbythesameMO.
Intheobjectcontainmenttree,the
objectinScopeAisbelowthe
Childof Any Any
objectinScopeBortheobjectin
ScopeAisthesameasinScopeB.
Descendentof Any Any objectinScopeAisbelowthe
objectinScopeB.
objectinScopeBisbelowthe
Parentof Any Any
objectinScopeAortheobjectin
ScopeBisthesameasinScopeA.
Antecedentof Any Any objectinScopeBisbelowthe
objectinScopeA.
Combinationofchildofandparent
ofrelationtypes.Theobjectsin
Relativeof Any Any ScopeAandScopeBhavetobein
thesamebranchoftheobject
containmenttree.
Alarmingobjectshavethesame
Siblingof Any Any parentobjectintheobject
containmenttree.

189
Table 13: Types of MO relations (2/2)

Network Scope A Scope B Description
Topology
Alarmingobjectsmustbe
theclosestpossible
instancesoftheobject
classtoeachotherinthe
Asnearas managedobjecthierarchy.
Any Any
possible Therelationchecksifan
alarmingobjectisclose
enoughtotheother
alarmingobjecttoallowthe
correlation.
ThePCMcardcarriesa
BCF/BTS/
Connectingto PCM TRXsignalinglinkusedby
TRX
theBCF,BTS,orTRX.
ThePCMcardcarriesa
BCF/BTS/
Connectedby PCM TRXsignalinglinkusedby
TRX
theBCF,BTS,orTRX.
Intheobjectcontainment
tree,theobjectinScopeA
isdirectlybelowtheobject
inScopeB.Intheobject
Alldirectchildof Any Any
containmenttree,allthe
objectsinScopeAare
directlybelowtheobjectsin
ScopeB.
tree,theobjectinScopeB
Directparentof Any Any
isdirectlybelowtheobject
inScopeA.
tree,alltheobjectsin
Directchildof Any Any
ScopeAaredirectlybelow
theobjectsinScopeB.
tree,theobjectinScopeA
Independentof Any Any
hasnorelationtotheobject
inScopeB

Figure 104: General Rules Definition: Relation Conditions

191
Actions
Whenanalarmdefinitionmatcheswithanalarm,somespecificactionistriggered
accordinglywiththe"actions"definitionoftherule.Thefollowingarethepossible
alarmactions:
Compressinganalarm
Whenasinglefaultcausesseriesofmultipleoccurrencesofsamealarm,then
youcancreateacompressionrule.YoucanseeonlyoneAlarm,despitethe
multipleoccurrencesofthesameAlarm.
Suppressinganalarm
Creatinganewalarm
YoucancreateanewAlarmforthecurrentMOwithintherange0to
2147483647withuserdefinabletextsandseverityforthesameobject.
Defininginformingdelay
TheinformingdelayactionisexecutedifanAlarmarrives,thatfulfilsthecriteria
definedfortheAlarmdelay.Thisactiontakesprecedence,whendefinedwith
filtertoggleAlarmhavingsameAlarmpatterns.
Cancelinganalarmimmediately
YoucancancelanAlarmimmediatelybyacorrelationrule.TheseAlarmsare
storedinthedatabase.Theycanalsotriggerotherrules,suchascounting.
Filteringanalarm
TheFilterAlarmactioncomparesthedefinedAlarmdefinitionsintherulewith
theAlarmcomingfromthenetworkandfiltersthemfromdatabase,user
interface,AlarmcorrelationserverandNorthMediationTarget.
Reclassifyinganalarm
ReclassifyAlarmactionallowsyoutoreclassifytheAlarmsfromexistingstate.
Forexample,fromMINORtoCRITICAL.
Automaticallyacknowledginganalarm
TheAlarmcomingfromthenetworkisacknowledgedautomatically.
Acknowledgingwithcancelalarm
TheAckWithCancelactioncomparesthedefinedAlarmdefinitionswiththe
AlarmcomingfromthenetworkandacknowledgesthecancelAlarm
automatically.
Triggeringarule
TheAlarmTriggerRuleactioncomparesthedefinedAlarmdefinitionswiththe
Alarmcomingfromthenetworkandtriggerstheprocess.
Forwardinganalarmtoemail
TheForwardAlarmtoemailactioncomparesthedefinedAlarmdefinitionswith
theAlarmcomingfromthenetworkandforwardsittothee-mailaddressesin
thespecifiedformat.
Filteringatogglealarm
ThisactionisexecutedifanAlarmfulfilsthedefinedcriteriaandtogglesatleast
aconfigurablenumberoftimeswithinaconfigurabletimeinterval.However,
whenthealarmsettlesdownforaconfigurabletime,itisnolongershownas
active.
Filteringathresholdalarm
ThisactionisexecutedifanAlarmfulfilsthedefinedcriteriaandoccursless
thanaconfigurablenumberoftimeswithinaconfigurabletimeinterval.
Delayedautoclearrule

AnequivalentofthatinMonitoristheCountrule.However,thereisasmall
differenceinthebehaviorofCountrule.InCountrule,eventhecanceled
secondaryalarmsarecountedwhenraisingthenewalarm(rootcausealarm).
Thisisnotanincorrectbehaviorbecausetheintentionofthecountruleistoget
astatisticalideaaboutthenumberoftimesacertainalarmisappearingina
timewindow.TheDelayedSuppressionrulewillraisethenewalarmonlywhen
nnumberofalarmsareactuallyactive.Thatis,whencertainsecondaryalarm
instancesarecanceled,theyareremovedfromthecounting.
Textmodulationalarm
Textmodulationruleallowsyoutomodifythealarmtextattributes.Insome
casestheoperatorwouldliketomodifythetextofanalarm.Forinstance,the
operatorwouldliketosendsomespecialinstructionthroughtheAlarmTextto
NorthboundsothattheoperatorattheNetworkOperationsCenter(NOC)can
quicklyidentifythespecialinstructionfromthealarmtextwithouthavingtolook
intothealarmdetailsoropeningthealarmmanualpageontheNetActside.
Figure 105: General Rules Definition: Actions

193
Scheduling Definitions
Optionally,youcansetscheduledefinitionsforyourrule.Onceactivated,therule
willfollowtheschedule.Withoutschedule,therulewillpermanentlybeactivated
untilmanualdeactivationoccurs.Thereschedulingdefinitionoptionsare:
Start Date Definesthestartdateforschedulingtherule.
Stop Date Definesthestopdateforschedulingtherule.
Start Time Definesthestarttimeforschedulingtherule.Itshouldbe

(hh24:mi:ss) enteredinhh24:mi:ssformat.Incorrectformatis
indicatedbyyellowbackgroundinthetextarea
Stop Time Definesthestoptimeforschedulingtherule.Itshouldbe

(hh24:mi:ss) enteredinhh24:mi:ssformat.Incorrectformatis
indicatedbyyellowbackgroundinthetextarea.
Schedule Days Definesthedayforschedulingtherule.
Schedule Type DefinestheschedulingtypewhetherDailyorContinuous

fortherule.
Daily WhenDailyisselected,itincludesallthescheduling
parameterslikeStart/StopDate,Start/StopTime,Daysif
mentioned.
Continuous WhenContinuousisselected,itincludesonlythe
Start/StopdatementionedandignoresStart/StopTime,
Daysevenifmentioned.
Figure 106: General Rules Definition: Scheduling Definitions

Predefined Correlation Rules

Inanetwork,onefaultcangeneratemultiplealarms.Duetothis,itisnoteasyto
findtherealfaultinnetworkmonitoring.OperatorcanseeallthealarmsinAlarm
List,butitisdifficulttomakeimmediateassociationsbetweenthem.
Alarmcorrelationhelpstorecognizetherealproblemandtakingimmediateactions
whennecessary.Alarmsthatareassociatedwitheachotherarecorrelatedandasa
resultofthis,onlyfeweralarmsarevisibleinalarmhandlingapplications.
Thefollowingfigureindicateshowthealarmsthatoriginatefromthesamefault
situationcanbeassociatedandcorrelatedtomakeonlyonealarmvisible.
Therearethreecasesofcorrelationrules:
CompressionRule
Thisruleallowstogroupmultipleoccurrencesofthesamealarmforthesame
ManagedObject.Ifthisruleisset,theusercanviewonlyonedespitethe
multipleoccurrencesofthealarm.
SuppressionRule
Whenafaultinthenetworkgeneratesaseriesofalarms,settingthe
SuppressionRuleallowstoviewonlyhighpriorityalarmsorprimaryalarms.
CountRule
ThenumberofoccurrencesofanalarmcanberestrictedbyusingtheCount
Rule.Ifthenumberofoccurrencesofthealarminacertaintimeframeismore
thanthecount,anew alarmisgenerated.Thisrulecanbeappliedtoanalarm
thatoccursrepeatedlyinashorttimeperiod.
Allthecorrelationrulessupportbackwardcorrelation.
Figure 107: Predefined Rules: Alarm Correlation Cases 1/2

195
Figure 108: Predefined Rules: Alarm Correlation Cases 2/2

Other Predefined Rules

Theotherpredefinedrulesareasfollows:
ToggleRule
Ifanalarmwhichmeetsauser-configurableattributesconditiontoggles,the
monitoringapplicationdisplaysitsraisingimmediatelyandremainsactiveas
longasittoggles.
User-configurableattributeconditionisanattributeconditionthatspecifiesthe
kindofalarmstobeconsideredbytherule.
Toggleruleappliestoanalarmwhichoccursforconfigurablenumberoftimes,
withinaconfigurabletimeinterval.Itexitsthetogglingstateifitremainsstable
foranotherconfigurabletimeinterval.
ThresholdRule
Thresholdrulefiltersanalarmwhicharrivesatleastauser-configurablenumber
oftimeswithinauser-configurabletimeinterval.Originalalarmsarenot
displayeduntilitoccurredthresholdtimes.
User-configurableattributeconditionisanattributeconditionthatspecifiesthe
kindofalarmstobeconsideredbytherule.
FilterthosealarmsoftheNESoho_B12345whichreportaclockswitchto
holdovermode,unlesstheyoccurredatleast3timesin10minutes.
Incaseofthresholdrulethealarmsarenotdisplayeduntilitreaches
thethresholdlimit,butincaseofcountruletheoriginalalarmsare
displayeduntilthethresholdismet.
InformingDelayRule
Informingdelayruleallowsyoutodelayalarmsasperyourtimedefinition
beforetheyareshowninmonitoringapplications.Ifyoucancelthealarmwithin
thedefinedtime,thealarmisnotforwardedtothepipe,however,itisinserted
directlyintothedatabase.Thisreducestheloadasthedatarequiredforoff-line
analysisremainsconsistent.
FilteringRule
Someinsignificantalarmsarenotsenttoaspecifiedtargetinthefault
managementsystem.Suchalarmsarefilteredusingfilteringrule.Usingfiltering
rule,alarmscanbefilteredfromtheUserInterface(UI),Database,Alarm
correlationserverandNorthMediationTarget.
ReclassificationRule
Somealarmsaremoreorlesscriticalthanthereportedcriticalityandthe
criticalityofthealarmshouldbechanged.Suchalarmsarereclassifiedusing
reclassificationrule.
Usingreclassificationrule,newclassificationsforalarmscanbedonebyeither
raisingorreducingtheseverity.
AutoAckRule
Accordinglytospecificnetworkconditions,somealarmsdonotrequireoperator
acknowledgement.Thesealarmsarerequiredtobeacknowledged
automaticallyandcanbeauto-acknowledgedusingautoackrule.Warningsare
alwaysauto-acknowledgedbydefault.Usingautoackrule,alarmscanbe
automaticallyacknowledged.
AckwithCancelRule

197
Someunacknowledgedcancelsdonotrequireattentionandshouldbe
automaticallyacknowledged.Suchunacknowledgedalarmsare
autoacknowledgedusingackwithcancelrule.
Usingackwithcancelrule,alarmsforwhichthenetworkelementhasalready
generatedacancelcanbeautomaticallyacknowledged.Thisreducesthe
amountofmanualworkinnetworkmonitoring.Activealarmscanalsobe
canceledmanually.
TriggerRule
Onarrivalofsomealarmsacustomactionshouldbetriggeredeithertonotify
theproblemtotheoperatororresolvetheproblemautomatically.Thistriggering
operationofalarmsisdoneusingtriggerrule.
Thesystemtriggersthespecifiedalarmwhenyouenterthevariable,execute
commandandmaximumnumberofsimultaneousprocesses.
TriggerRuleisusedtoautomateanoftenrepeatedactioninresponsetoalarm
eventsForexample,runningascriptwhichdoestherequiredactionsforthe
troubleshootingactivities.ItworksonAlarmNewevents,thatis,whenanew
alarmisraisedorwhentheAlarmsarecanceled.
Therearevalidrequirementstoalsoenabletriggerruleforalarmcancelevents,
sothatsomeactionsarecarriedoutduringalarmcancel.Withthis,operator
savestimespentonmanualactionsthatarerequiredafteranalarmiscanceled.
Examplesofactionswhichcanbetakenonalarmcancelare:
Firingascriptwhichwilldosomecleanupactions.
ScriptwhichwillcloseanyTroubleTicketwhichhasthisparticularalarm
attachedasthelastalarm.
Figure 109: Predefined Rules: Triggering Rule

ForwardToEmailRule
Somealarmsarerequiredtobesenttointerestede-mailrecipients.This
forwardingoperationofalarmsisdoneusingForwardToEmailrule.Thesystem
sendsane-mailtotherespectiverecipients,whenyouentertherecipiente-mail
IDandmailcontentintheForwardToEmailrule.
DelayedAuto-ClearRule
DelayedAutoClearalarmallowsclearingthealarmswhentherequiredalarm
criteriaismatchedasperthetimeandthresholdcountdefinition.Thishelpsto
reduceloadonthesystemwhensimilarkindofalarmsarereceived
continuously.

YoucanedittherulesifModify,CreateandDeletepermissionsaregiven.
Formoreinformationoneditingarule,addingandactiondefinitions,addingrelation
conditionsandaddingschedulingdefinitions,seeRule Editor Help.
Figure 110: Predefined Rules: Compression Rule

199
Rule Analyzer
RuleAnalyzerallowsdeterminingwhetheranalarmwithagivensetofattributes
wouldmatcharuleornot.
WithRuleAnalyzeryoucanperformthefollowingtasks:
Searchforrulesbydefiningtherequiredalarmpropertysuchasalarmnumber,
alarmseverityandsoon.
SelectandopenthematchingrulesinRuleExplorerandRuleEditor.
PerformquicksearchoperationusingCtrl+ F.
RuleAnalyzerdisplaysthefollowingruledetails:
RuleID:
IndicatestheuniqueIDofarule.
RuleName:
IndicatestherulenameasseeninRuleEditor.
RulePath:
IndicatesthepathoftheruleasseeninRuleExplorer.
Forexample,InRuleExplorerifyouhaveruleXunderfolderfolder1/subfolder1,
thentherulepathwillbefolder1/subfolder1/X.
ActionType:
Indicatestheactiontypeofaruleparticipatinginthesearchoperation.
Examplesforactiontypes:
Compressalarm
Suppressalarm
Informingdelay
Forwardalarm
AutoAckalarm
RuleStatus:
Indicatesiftheruleisactiveorinactive.
RuleMatch
CanhaveavalueofCOMPLETEorPARTIAL.
ExampleforRulematch,Considerarulewiththefollowingalarmproperties:
{alarmNumber=123,alarmText="communication
failure",alarmType="COMMUNICATIONOR
ENVIRONMENTAL",severity="MAJORorCRITICAL"}
COMPLETE:Iftherulecriteriamatchthesearchattributescompletely,thenthe
matchistermedasCOMPLETE.

Figure 111: Rule Analyzer

201
Lab exercise: Rule Explorer and Rule Editor

Context
Thestudentstesttheskillstodifferentiatethedifferentcasesfor:
Alarmreduction
Alarmforwarding
AlarmtriggeringinNetAct
UseRuleExplorerandRuleEditortomanagedifferentalarmprocessingrules.
Figure 112: Lab exercise: Rule Explorer and Rule Editor
Procedure
1 OpentheRule ExplorertoolinMonitor.
Result of this step

Howcanyoudifferentiatebetweenactiveandinactiverulesinthe
Rule Explorer?
Canyoumodifyanactiverule?
Whatiscorrelation?WhatarethethreecasesforcorrelationsinNetActand
describeeachcase?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

2 Createanewalarm(usingaruletype:rule)withtheseverityMINORforthe
alarmnumbers35011,35007and35005withacertainalarmnumber(for
example39000).
Information
Ifoneofthedirectoryserversisdownseveralcriticalalarmsareproducedfrom
correspondingdirectoryservers.
Result of this step

________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
3 CreateanAlarmForwardingrulethatforwardsallcriticalalarmsfromNT
HLRFEmanagedobject(orotheravailableMO)onSundaystoacertainEmail
address.ActivatetheruleinRuleEditor.
Result of this step

________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

203
Lab exercise: Alarm Filters

Context
Theaimofthisexerciseistocreateafiltertodisplayonlycriticalalarmsfrom
BSC/RNC.
Prerequisites
LogintoNetAct.SelectMonitoring.StarttheMonitortool.
OpenToolsMonitoring DesktopAlarm Filter Explorer.
Useparametersgivenbytheinstructor.
Procedure
1 IntheAlarmFilterExplorer,rightclickthealarmfolderandselectNew Filter.
2 EnterthenameofthenewfilterandselectFinish.
3 Right-clickintheAlarmpatternfieldandselectSeverity.
4 InthepulldownmenuselectcriticalRight-clickintheAlarmpatternfieldand
selectObject Class.

5 InthepulldownmenuselectBSCC/RNCandAdd.
Information
IfyournetworkelementisBSC,selectBSCC.IfyournetworkelementisRNC,
selectRNC.
6 PressOK.
7 SelectFileSave all.
8 TestyourfilterbydragginganddroppingitintooneoftheAlarmLists.

205
Lab exercise: Alarm Rules

Context
ThisLabexerciseaccessthestudentstoworkwithalarmrules.
Figure 114: Lab exercise: Alarm Rules
Prerequisites
LogintoNetAct.SelectMonitoring.StarttheMonitor tool.
OpenToolsMonitoring DesktopRule Explorer.
Useparametersgivenbytheinstructor.
Procedure
1 CreateanAlarmForwardingrulethatforwardsallcriticalalarmsfrom
BCF/WBTSmanagedobject(orotheravailableMO)onSundaystoacertaine-
mailaddress.
2 ActivatetheruleintheRuleEditor.
Information
RightclickinAlarmdefinitions,RelationConditionsandActionstoviewthe
availableoptionsandselecttherightoptionswhencreatingtherule.

Topology Management
Managing Network Views
Hierarchicalandscalableviewsovertheentiremanagednetworkarevisualizedin
theNetworkViewtool.Thegraphicalviewscanbeadjustedtothedifferent
monitoringneedsfromnetwork-widemonitoringtoobject-levelandtechnology-
specificmonitoring.Intheupper-levelviews,userscanquicklyseethegeneral
situationofthemanagednetwork.Movingtoasub-viewshowsthealarmingobjects.
MonitoringDesktopprovidesarangeofmonitoringtoolsthatcanbeaccessedfrom
NetworkView.
Acommonconceptinnetworkmanagementistohaveviewstothemanaged
networkthatistypicallyarrangedaccordingtotheobjecthierarchy,connectivity,or
otherinformationlevels.Theseviewscanmodeleitherlogicalorgeographical
aspectsoftheunderlyingnetwork.
ViewExplorervisualizestheviewhierarchythathasbeenimplemented.Itshowsthe
viewsinfoldersthatcanbeusedtostructureviewsforabetteroverview.TheView
Explorertoolprovidesasearchfacilitythatcanbeusedtofindviewsfordifferent
aspects,forexampleforcontainedmanagedobjects.
Youcanselectaviewformanipulationordisplaythedifferentattributesofthe
chosenviewinthePropertieswindow.Youcanalsocreatenewfoldersfornew
viewsormoveviewsfromonefoldertoanother.
Thesectionscoveredinthenexttopicsareasfollows:
NetworkViewsMonitorModes
CreatingandEditingNetworkViews
Addingalinkbetweentwoobjects
Linkingandunlinkingasub-view
Addingnewsymbols,backgroundgraphicsandbackgroundimages
Savingaview
CreatingChildrenObjectsSubviews
AutomaticViewGeneration

207
Network Views Monitor Modes

YoucanviewtheNetworkViewtoolintwomodes:
Monitoringmode
Viewsareconstructedfromtheviewobjectsandrepresentthemonitored
network.Inthismode,youcanmonitorcompletestateinformationofthe
monitoredobjects.
Thetooldisplaystwostates:
Topologystate
Alarmstate
Inthismode,youcanalsosearchformanagedobjects.Draganddrop
managedobjectfromObjectExplorertonetworkviewtoviewallthenetwork
viewsinwhichtheobjectexist.Ifthemanagedobjectdoesnotexistinanyview,
amessageisdisplayed.
Editmode
IntheEditmode,youcanmodifytheviews.Inthismodethestateinformationis
suppressed.
Editmodeisrestrictedtosomeusers,requiresadditional
authorization.
Whenanotherusermodifiestheviewsinthedatabase,amessage
toreloadtheviewisdisplayedandtheviewsareautomatically
updated.
ThetoolsinthelowertoolbarareavailableonlyintheEditmode.Inthe
toolbar,youcanselectonetoolatatime.Bydefault,deselectingatool
activatestheSelecttoolandtheMoveandResizetool.
Sometoolsareactiveonlyforasingleoperationandgetde-activated
automatically,whileothersarepermanentandhenceyoumustactivatea
differenttool(usuallytheSelecttoolandtheMoveandResizetooltoswitch
itoff.
Switching between Monitor and Edit mode

OpentheshortcutmenuofthetoolbyrightclickinganywhereandselectingSwitch
toEditModeorSwitchtoMonitorMode,dependingonthecurrentoperationmode.
WhenchangingaviewandswitchtoMonitormode,theusersarestillpromptedto
savechangeswhenclosingtheview.

Figure 116: Network View Window

209
Creating and Editing Network Views

NetworkEditoristhetoolusedtocreateoreditnetworkViews.Tocreateanew
view,opennetworkeditorviatheViewExplorer:
OntheDesktopmenubar,selectToolsManaged ObjectsView Explorer.In
ViewExplorerrightclickonthebackgroundandselectNewFolderornewview.The
viewshavetobecreatedintofolders.
ToEditaView,selectthecorrespondingviewintheViewExplorerTool,openthe
viewandswitchthemodeto"EditMode".
Allthetasksinthefollowingsectionsapplyforbothcreatingnewviewsand
editingexistingviews.
Adding Objects and Moving objects in the view

Thefigureillustratestheaddingofobjectsandmovingobjectsintheview.
Figure 117: Adding Objects and Moving objects in the view
Adding an object
Youcanaddanobjecttoaviewinthefollowingways:
1. Draganobjectfromanothertoolanddropitatthedesiredposition.
2. Pastetheobjectsfromtheclipboard.Whenpastingfromtheclipboard,objects
areplacedinthecenteroftheview.
Cutting, copying and pasting objects

IntheEditmode,cutting,copying,andpastingcanbeusedtocopyobjectsintothe
view.Thefollowingtworulesmustbetakenintoconsideration:
Objectscopiedfromanothertoolareaddedasviewsymbolstothecentreofthe
view.
ObjectsandbackgroundgraphicscopiedfromanotherNetworkViewtool
preservetheirview-specificinformation.Thismeansthattherelativepositionsof
theobjects,links,theiconusedtovisualizetheobject,andotherpropertiesare
copiedaswell.
Thefollowingdescribesthestepsforcutting,copyingandpastingobjects.

1. Tocutorcopyintheview,selecttheobjecttocutorcopy,andpasteintothe
clipboard.
2. Toopentheshortcutmenu,right-clicktheselectedelement.SelectCut,Copy
orPaste.
CutandCopyareenabledonlyifobjectsintheviewareselected,whilePasteis
availableonlyifthesystemclipboardcontainsdatathatcanbepastedintotheview.
Cut,CopyandPastecanbeperformedusingkeyboardshortcutsshowninthe
menu,directlyfromtheEditmenu,orusingtheassociatedtoolbarbuttons.
Moving objects
1. Selectanobjecttomove.
2. Youcanmoveviewobjectsaswellasbackgroundgraphics.
3. Clicktheselectedobjectandmoveitaroundkeepingthemousebuttonpressed
down.

211
Adding a link between two objects

Context
Youcanaddlinkonlybetweentwosymbolsbythefollowingsteps:
Figure 118: Procedure: Adding a link between two objects
Procedure
1 Inthelowertoolbar,activatetheMake Linktool.
2 Dragthelink,fromthefirstsymboltothesecondsymbolbypressingtheleft
mousebutton.
3 Releasethemousebuttononthesecondsymbol,whenyouseethatthesymbol
isselected.
4 Tocancelthelinkcreation,releasethemousebuttonontheviewbackground.
Result of this step

Linksareautomaticallylaidout.
5 Right-clickthelinkforchangingthelinktype.
6 IntheChange Link Type...submenu,selectthelinktype.

Linking and unlinking a sub-view

Thefollowingfigureillustratesaddinglinksandsubviews.
Figure 119: Adding Links and Subviews
Sub-viewlinkscanbeattachedtoviewobjects.Thisallowstheconstructionofa
viewhierarchyfromhighleveltodetailedviews.
1. Right-clicktheviewobjectandselectSub-view.
2. IntheSelectSub-viewdialog,browsetotheviewyouwanttolinkandselectit
intheopenview.
3. Tocreatealink,clickSelect.
Tostoptheoperation,clickCancel.
4. Tounlink,selecttheviewobjectthathasasub-view,andselecttheRemove
sub-viewoptionfromtheshortcutmenu.
Navigation Links
ANavigationLinkisusedtocreatealinktonavigatebetweenanytwoviews.The
alarmstateofanunderlyingview,associatedwithaNavigationLink,isnot
propagatedtotheviewsattheupperlevel.
CreatingNavigationLinks
OpentheviewinEditmode.Inthelowertoolbar,clickAdd Navigation Link,
andplaceinthedesiredpositionintheview.
AssociatingviewstoNavigationLinks
Tonavigatetoaview,associateittoaNavigationLinkintheNetwork View
pane.
Adding new symbols, background graphics and background images

Thefollowingfigureillustratestheaddingofnewsymbols,backgroundgraphicsand
backgroundimages.

213
Figure 120: Adding new symbols, background graphics and background

images
Adding background graphics

Toactivatethegraphictoolforaddingthegraphicobject,pressitsbuttoninthe
lowertoolbar:
Createthegraphicobject.
Dependingonthetool,followtheinstructionsbelow:
Tocreatealine
definetheendpointswithtwomouseclicks.Whentwoobjectsareconnected
withaline,thelineendisnotconnectedtotheobjects.Thisisclearlyvisible
whenyouzoomin.
Or
Tocreatearectangle
dragtherectangleopenwhileholdingdowntheleftmousebutton.Releasethe
mousebuttontoinserttherectangle.
Or
Tocreateanellipsis
dragthedefinitionrectangleopenwhileholdingdowntheleftmousebutton.
Releasethemousebuttontoinserttheellipsis.
Or
Tocreateapolygon
setthedefinitionpointsbyclickingintheview.Endwithadouble-click.
Or
Tocreateapolyline
setthedefinitionpointsbyclickingintheview.Endwithadouble-click.
Or
Tocreatealabel
Clickintheviewtoopenatexteditbox.Enterthelabeltextandmovethelabel
totherequiredposition.YoucaneditthelabellaterbyactivatingtheLabeltool
andclickingonthelabel.Alternatively,whentheselecttoolisactive,youcan
useCtrl + clickonabackgroundlabel,toeditit.

Adding background image to network view

BackgroundimagescanbeaddedtoanetworkviewusingtheSelectBackground
Imagebuttonavailableinthelowertoolbaroftheview.
Thefollowingimageformatsaresupported:
jpg
png
gif
1. Toaddbackgroundimage,switchtoEditmode.
2. Inthelowertoolbar,clicktheSelectBackground Imagebutton.
TheSelectBackgroundImagewindowopens.
3. IntheSelectBackground Imagewindow,selectthedesiredbackgroundimage
fromthelocalfilesystem.
4. YoucanpreviewtheselectedimageontherightsideoftheSelectBackground
Imagewindow.
5. ClickOpen.
Bydefaultthebackgroundimageissetasthelowestlayerofthenetworkview.
Neworexistingdecorationsarealwaysplacedontopofbackgroundimage.The
orderofthebackgroundimagecanbechangedlikeanyotherdecorations.For
informationonhowtochangetheorder,seeStacking the background objects in
Monitor Online Help.
Whenabackgroundimageisaddedtothenetworkview,itsactualsizeis
detained.However,onre-openingtheview,thezoomfactorofthebackground
imageandothercontentsoftheviewisadjustedsothatallthecontentsfitinthe
view.
6. Savetheview.
Thebackgroundimagecanberesizedandmovedaroundtheview.
Toremovethebackgroundimage,right-clickthebackgroundimageandselect
Remove.
Eachbackgroundimagerequiresthefollowingamountofmemory:
Width*Height*4bytes
where,widthandheightarethedimensionsoftheimage.
Accordingly,thenumberofviews,withbackgroundimages,thatcanbe
simultaneouslyopenedissubjecttotheclientheapmemoryavailable.
Rotatebackgroundgraphicsasfollows:
1. Selectanobjectforrotating.
2. Handlesaroundtheobjectappear.
3. SelecttheRotatetool.
4. Clickoneofthehandlesandholdthemousebuttondownwhileturningaround
theobjectwiththemouse.

215
Saving a view
Opentheshortcutmenuofthetool,selectSavetosavetheview,orSave Asto
saveacopyoftheviewwithadifferentname.
Youcanalsosavetheviewsinfollowingways:
Intheshortcutmenu,usethedisplayedshortcutkeys.
Fromthefilemenu,chooseSaveorSave As.
Inthetoolbar,clicktheassociatedSavebutton.
Figure 121: Saving a view

Creating Children Objects Subviews

Youcancreatesubviewsautomaticallyforallmanagedobjectsthathavechild
objects.Therearetwooptionsforcreatingsubviews.
Foraselectedmanagedobject:
OneLevelcanbeusedtocreatesubviewforitsimmediatechildren.
AllLevelscanbeusedtocreatesubviewforitschildrenatalllevels.
Ensurethattheadaptationsaredeployedfortheselectedmanagedobjects
anditschildrenbeforecreatingsubviews.
Figure 122: Creating Child Object Subviews 1/2
Figure 123: Creating Child Object Subviews 2/2

217
Automatic View Generation

AutomaticviewgenerationispossibleviatheoptionCreateSubviews.This
enablesthecreationofthefullhierarchyofviewsandsubviews(uptothelastchild
objectlevel)foranygivenparentobject.
Withthisfeature,itispossibletocreatethesubviewsandsimultaneouslylinkthe
childviewtotheparentobjectautomatically.ThisispossibleonlyintheEditmodeof
theNetworkView.
Figure 124: Automatic View Generation

Working Set Manager
Figure 125: Working Set Manager
Aworkingsetisacollectionofmanagedobjects.WorkingSetManagerenablesyou
tocreate,view,browse,combine,exportandremoveworkingsets.Youcancreate
workingsetsbasedonpreferredcriteria:
DNlist
Area
FMQuery
CMQuery
CMAdvancedQuery
Additionally,youcancreateanewworkingsetbasedonexistingworkingsetsinthe
Combinetab.
WorkingsetscanbemanagedbytheWorkingSetManagerapplicationor
CommandLineInterface(CLI).
Therearetwokindsofworkingsets:
Staticworkingsets-wherethelistofmanagedobjectsisinvariable.
Dynamicworkingsets-basedonconstantcriteria,butthemanagedobjectsare
addedtoorremovedfromaworkingsetbasedonnetworkchanges.

219
Themaximumnumberofmanagedobjectsineachworkingsetis100000.
Therearethreeworkingsettypes:
DNList-atypeofworkingsetthatconsistofastaticlistofmanaged
objectDNs.
Area,CMQuery,FMQuery,CMAdvancedQuery,Combined-typesof
workingsetsdynamicallychangingcontent,basedontheselected
criteria.
Legacy-aworkingsettypethatwasnotmigratedtothenewdata
representation,oritsmigrationscriptwasnotexecutedcorrectly.This
workingsetcannotbeedited.
ThefollowingfigureillustratesthecreationofworkingsetbasedonFMquery.
Figure 126: Creating Working Set - FM Query
ThefollowingfigureillustratesthecreationofworkingsetbasedononCM
AdvancedQuery.

Figure 127: Creating Working Set - CM Advanced Query
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthecombinationofworkingsets.
Figure 128: Combining Working Sets

221
Creating managed objects

YoucancreatenewobjectsintheManagedObjectFramework(MOF)database
withtheObjectwizard.Youcanedittheoptionalattributesofthemanagedobjects
byusingthePropertiestool.
Managedobjectscandefineanymanageablenetworkresourcespresentina
communicationnetwork.Amanagedobjectrepresentsaphysicalorlogicalnetwork
elementorapieceofequipmentthatbelongstothenetwork.Managedobjectsare
oftenhierarchical,withcertainobjectscontrollingandcontainingothers.
TheObjectwizardconsistsoftwoscreens.Thefirstscreenprovidesalltheavailable
objectclassesandtheirreleases,andthenextscreenpopulatesallthemandatory
attributesdefinedfortheselectedclass.
WiththeObjectwizardyoucanperformthefollowingtasks:
Createrootmanagedobjects
Createchildmanagedobjects
YoucanopentheNewObjectwizardinthreeways:
Right-clickanobject,andselectNewObject fromtheshortcutmenu.
Or
Right-clickonthebackgroundoftheObject Explorerwindow,andselectNew
Objectfromtheshortcutmenu.
Or
FromtheFilemenu,selectNewObject.
TheNewObjectoptionisavailableintheshortcutmenuandontheFile
menuonlyifCM_ManagedObject_Createpermissioniswithinthescopeof
theselectedobject.Formoreinformationonthescope,see
Scope based authorization for managed objects in the online help.
Creating managed object procedure

Thefigureillustratesthecreatingofnewmanagedobjects.
Figure 129: Creating New Managed Objects

Thissectiondescribestheprocedureforcreatingamanagedobject.
1. OntheDesktopmenubar,selectTools Managed ObjectsObject
Explorer.
TheObjectExplorerwindowopens.Managedobjects,fromtheMOFdatabase
areloadedintheObjectspane.
2. IntheFilemenu,selectNewObject.
Alternatively,right-clickinthebackgroundoftheObjectspaneandselectNew
Object.
TheNewObjectwizardforrootmanagedobjectcreationopens.
3. IntheObjectClassdrop-downlist,selectanobjectclass.
Atthisstage,youcanswitchtocreateachildmanagedobjectforan
existingparentmanagedobjectbyclickingtheBrowse button.
TheObjectClassdrop-downlistdisplaysPresentationNameandObjectClass
IDinsidetheparenthesis.
TheRootObjectcheckboxisalreadyselectedanddisabledfortherootobject
creation.
4. ClickNext.
TheFillAttributeValuesscreenappears.
5. Inthetextfield,entertheattributevaluesforthecorrespondingattributesofthe
managedobject(forexample,Instance)andclickFinish.
Ifthelengthofthetextfieldisinsufficienttodisplaythecomplete
information,clickontheextremeright.Thisopensanewwindow
whereyoucanenter,edit,andviewthecompleteinformation
regardingtheattributevalues.
Thenewrootmanagedobjectiscreated.

223
Associating a Managed Object to Maintenance Region

Context
YoucanassociateamanagedobjecttoMaintenanceRegionusingtheMaintenance
Regionoption.
YoucannotassociateaMaintenanceRegiontoanotherMaintenance
Region.
Thissectiondescribesstepsforassociatingamanagedobjecttomaintenance
region.
Prerequisites
YoumusthaveCM_ManagedObject_MR_Associationpermission.
Procedure
1 Right-clickaManaged ObjectandselectMaintenance Region Association.
Result of this step

TheAssociateMaintenanceRegiondialogappears.
2 SelecttheMaintenance Regiontowhichyouwanttoassociate.
Information
TodeselecttheMaintenance Region,selectNoMaintenance
RegionSelectedcheck-box.
3 TopropagatetheselectedMaintenance Regiontothesubtree,select
Propagate Maintenance Regiontothesubtreecheck-box.
4 ClickOK.

Associating a Managed Object to Site

Context
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheassociatingManagedObjectstoMRsorsites.
Figure 130: Associating Managed Objects to MRs or Sites

YoucanassociateamanagedobjecttoSiteusingtheSiteAssociationoption.
YoucannotassociateaSitetoanotherSite.
Figure 131: Editing object attributes in the Properties tool
Prerequisites
YoumusthaveCM_ManagedObject_Site_Associationpermission.

225
Procedure
1 Right-clickaManaged ObjectandselectSite Association.
Result of this step

TheAssociate Sitedialogappears.
2 SelecttheSitetowhichyouwanttoassociate.
Information
TodeselecttheSite,selectNo Site Selectedcheck-box.
3 TopropagatetheselectedSitetothesubtree,select
Propagate Site to the sub treecheck-box.
4 ClickOK.

Editing object attributes in the Properties tool

Context
Thefollowingfigureillustrateseditingmanagedobjectsproperties.
Figure 132: Editing Managed Objects Properties

Aftercreatingmanagedobjects,youcansetthevaluesfornon-mandatoryobject
attributesinthepropertiestool.
Thissectiondescribesthestepsforeditingobjectattributesinthepropertiestool.
Figure 133: Procedure: Editing object attributes in the Properties tool
Prerequisites
YouneedtohaveCM_ManagedObject_Editpermission.

227
Procedure
1 SelectToolsProperties.
Information
Alternatively,onthekeyboard,presstheCtrl + 1keys.
2 Toedit,selecttheattributevalue.
3 Enterthenewvalue.
4 Toopentheexternaleditor,presstheCustom editorbuttonforediting
attributeswithcomplexdatatypes.
5 Toacceptthenewvalue,PressEnter.
Information
Alternatively,intheexternaleditor,clickOK.
6 Savethemodifiedobjectattributesusingoneofthefollowingmethods:
a) InthePropertieseditor,clickSave.
b) Alternatively,fromtheFilemenu,selectSaveorSave All.
Information
Whenseveralobjectsareselected,theupdatedvaluesaresavedinallthe
objects.
Youcaneditthepropertiesofamanagedobjectonlyifthe
CM_ManagedObject_Editpermissioniswithinthescopeofthe
selectedobject.
Onlypowergroupusersoruserswithglobalscope(thatisifall
maintenanceregionsandassociatednetworkelementsare
withinthescope)canassignorremoverelationshipofan
objecttoamaintenanceregion.
Thecurrentstateofthemanagedobjectinthemanaged
systemisdefinedusingtheattributeObjectState.The
managesobjectsaremainlyinthreestages:Operational,Non
OperationalandCreatedFromNetwork.
Formoreinformationonthescope,Scope based authorization
for managed objects in online documentation.

Object Deletion
Youcandeleteoneormoremanagedobjectsandtheirchildmanagedobjectsonly
ifyouareauthorizedtodeletethem.
YourequirethepermissionCM_ManagedObject_Deletetodeletemanagedobjects.
TheManagedobjectsareinthreestateswhichareasfollows:
Operational
NonOperational
CreatedFromNetwork
Whiledeletingmanagedobjects,themanagedobjectsinCreatedFromNetwork
stateholdsthesameconditionsasinNonoperationalstate.
ThestateofamanagedobjectissetusingthePropertiestool.
DeletionofobjectsintheOperationalstatecanleadtolossofnetwork
information.Whenyoudeleteanobject,allitschildobjectsarealsodeleted.
Deleting managed objects in the non-operational state

YoucandeletemanagedobjectsusingthedesktoptoolslikeObjectExplorerand
ObjectList.Thefollowingprocedureexplainshowtodeletemanagedobjectusing
ObjectExplorertool.
1. OntheDesktopmenubar,selectToolsManaged ObjectsObject
Explorer.
TheobjectpaneliststhemanagedobjectsfromtheMOFdatabase.
2. Selectoneormoremanagedobjectstobedeleted.
3. OntheDesktopmenubar,selectEdit Delete.
a. Right-clicktheManaged ObjectsandselectDeletefromthecontextmenu.
b. Alternatively,FromtheToolbar,clicktheDeleteicon.
c. Alternatively,PressDeleteonthekeyboard.
TheConfirm Object Deletiondialogdisplays.
4. ClickYes.
Themanagedobjectsaredeleted.

229
Deleting managed objects in the operational state

Context
Thefigureillustratesthedeletingobjects.
Figure 134: Deleting Objects

YoucandeletemanagedobjectsusingthedesktoptoolslikeObjectExplorerand
ObjectList.
Figure 135: Procedure: Deleting managed objects in the operational state
Prerequisites
YourequirethepermissionCM_ManagedObject_Deletetodeletemanagedobjects.
Procedure
1 OntheDesktopmenubar,select
ToolsManaged ObjectsObject Explorer.
Result of this step

TheobjectpaneliststhemanagedobjectsfromtheMOFdatabase.

2 Selectthemanagedobjects.
3 OntheDesktopmenubar,selectEditDelete.
a) RightclickthemanagedobjectsandselectDeletefromthecontextmenu.
b) Alternatively,fromtheToolbar,clicktheDeleteicon.
c) Alternatively,PressDeleteonthekeyboard.
Result of this step

TheConfirm Object Deletiondialogdisplays.
4 SelecttheDeleteauthorizedandoperationalobjectsoption.
5 ClickYestodeletethemanagedobjects.
Information
IntheConfirm Object Deletiondialogbox,clickDetailstoviewinformation
abouttheUnauthorizedobjectsandOperationalobjects.

231
Handling of Alarm Processing

Fault Management Pipe Status
TheFaultManagement(FM)PiperepresentsalarmcollectionandcorrelationinFM
platform.TheFMPipecollects,processesandstoresalarms.Italsosupports
synchronizationofalarmsbetweenthenetworkandtheFMdatabase.
ThefigureillustratestheFileManagementpipestatus.
Figure 136: File Management Pipe Status
Displaying the status of the Alarm pipe

Theusercanverifythestatusof:
AllpipesinAlarmMonitor
Pipeinstance(s)inAlarmMonitor
TheconnectionbetweenAlarmMonitorandOSS5.x
OntheDesktopmenubar,selectToolsMonitoring DesktopFM Pipe Status.
isdisplayedonthestatusbar.Thecoloroftheicondeterminesthestatusof
thealarmpipe.
Ifthecolorisgreen:
AllpipesinAlarmMonitorandOSS5.xareup
Pipeinstance(s)inAlarmMonitoris/areup
TheconnectionbetweenAlarmMonitorandOSS5.xisup
Ifthecolorisred:
OneofthealarmpipeinAlarmMonitororOSS5.xisdown
Pipeinstance(s)inAlarmMonitoris/aredown
ConnectionerrorbetweenAlarmMonitorandOSS5.x

Whentheprocessingthresholdisexceeded,theFMpipebecomesslow.As
aresult,thealarmstatusisred.Alarmpipeprocessingthresholdexceeded
errorisshownwhenevertheheartbeat(alarmnumberis-1)isnot
processedwithinaspecifiedtimeperiod(defaultvalueis60secondsandis
configurable).
TheconnectiontoFMservicesmayfailindicatingaproblemwithnetworkor
database.
WhenOSS5.xpipeerrorisoccurred,aproblemalarmissentandvisiblein
AlarmList.
Bydefault,statusofFMpipeisvisibleinthestatusbarwheneveryouopen
Desktop.
Whenthereisapipe/connectionerror,anerrormessageisdisplayed
containingthedetailsofpipe/connectionsthataredown.
Bydouble-clickthealarmpipeicon,itshowstheactuallatencyinalarm
pipes.

233
Manual upload of Alarms

Duetovariousreasonssuchasnetworkconnectionfailure,thealarmsraisedfrom
thenetworkelementmaynotreachthemanagementsystemandtherefore,arenot
availableinthedatabase.
TheFMplatformrecognizestheuploadableandnon-uploadablealarmsreceived
fromthedifferentNetworkElements.Alarmuploadprocesssynchronizesthese
alarmswiththenetworkmanagementsystemdatabase.Thenon-uploadablealarms
donotgetcancelledandremainactiveduringalarmsynchronizationprocess.
UploadableAlarms:
ThealarmsfromtheNetworkElementwillbeuploadedtomanagement
systemdatabaseduringsynchronization.
Non-uploadableAlarms:
ThealarmsfromtheNetworkElementwillnotbeuploadedto
managementsystemdatabaseduringalarmsynchronization.These
alarmsmightnotstatetheactualstatusoftheprobleminNetwork
Elementandhence,needtobeleftactiveunlesstheyaremanually
canceled.
TheusercaninitiateanalarmuploadprocessinAlarmTools(AlarmList,Alarm
History,WarningList)orObjectExplorer.
AlarmTools(AlarmList,AlarmHistory,WarningList)
Right-clickanalarmandselectAlarming ObjectAlarm Upload.
Or
Right-clickanalarmandselectControlling ObjectAlarm Upload.
ObjectExplorer
Right-clickaManaged ObjectandselectAlarm Upload.
TheAlarmUploadoptionisenabledonlyforNetwork
Elements.
Result:Thenon-uploadablealarmsavailableinmanagementsystemremains
active.
PressShiftorCtrlkeytoselectthemultiplemanagedobjectsforalarm
uploading.

Figure 137: Alarm Database Upload

235
Deleting Alarms of an Object

Itispossibletodeleteallthealarmsofamanagedobject.This helps in clearing
the alarms for troubleshooting purposes.
ThisprocesscanbeperformedusingtheAlarmTools(AlarmList,AlarmHistory,
WarningList)orObjectExplorer.
AlarmTools(AlarmList,AlarmHistory,WarningList)
Right-clickamanagedobjectandselectDelete All Alarms from Database
Delete Alarms For Object.
Or
Right-clickanalarmandselectControlling ObjectDelete All Alarms
from DatabaseDelete Alarms For Object.
ObjectExplorer
Right-clickamanagedobjectandselectDelete All Alarms from Database
Delete Alarms For Object.
Allthealarmsofamanagedobjectaredeletedfromthedatabase.
TheDeleteAllAlarmsoptionisenabledinthecontextmenuofthemanaged
objectonlywhenthecorrespondingobjectclassinadaptationincludesAlarm
Statesattributegroup.
Figure 138: Deleting all Alarms from an MO

Lab exercise: Enabling the FM Pipe Status

Context
ThissectionteststheskillsontheenablingoftheFMpipestatus.
Procedure
1 NavigatetoMonitor application.
2 ClickToolMonitoring Desktop.
3 SelectFM Pipe Status.
Post-requisites
WhatshouldyoudoiftheFMPipeisnotrunning?
Didanythinghappen?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

237
Summary: Advanced Fault Management with NetAct

Module Summary
NetAct.


239
Basic Performance Management with NetAct

Module Objectives
ExplainthepurposeofPerformanceManagementanddescribewhatisa
KPI.
dashboards.
Performance Management Principles

Counters, Measurements and Observations
Thecounter,measurementandobservationarediscussedindetailedasfollows:
Counter
AcounterisaregisterwhichisupdatedintheNEeachtimeaneventoccurs.
Therearedifferenttypesofcountersbasedonhowtheycanbeupdated.
Cumulativecountersrepresentarunningcountof,forexample,howmanytimes
aneventoccurredwhilegaugecounterstakethevalueofwhattheymeasure,
forexamplehowmanydatapacketsareinabuffer.
Whenameasurementintervalends,thevaluesofthemeasurementcounters
aretransferredtotheOSSandthecountersareresetforthenextperiod.
Acounterprovidestheresultinspecifiedunits,forexample,inintegersor
Erlangs.ThetermcounterisusedasasynonymofPerformanceIndicator.
Measurement
Ameasurementisanactionwherethesystemcollectsinformationabout,for
example,trafficandnetworkeventsandthenprocessesthisinformation.
Ameasurementisafixedsetofcounters.
Observation
Anobservationisafunctionwherethesystemeithercollectsinformationabout
certaineventsordirectlyproducesinformationaboutsingleeventsinthe
system.
Itispossibletosetcertainobjectsunderobservationandtosetconditionswhich
mustbefulfilledbeforethesystemproducesreportsoralarms.
Observationsaretypicallyusedtolocatethepartofthenetworksystemcausing
problems.
Ameasurementisinfactacollectionofstatistics,ortobemoreprecise,acollection
ofcounters.Allofthesecountersarecountingaparticulareventthatrelatestothe
measurementname.Themeasurementsaregroupedinthismannertoallowbetter
functionalityandhandling.Thisprovidestheuserwitheasierselectionofcertain
measurementsnecessaryataparticulartime.Allmeasurementsareindependentof
eachotherbutthesameuserinterfaceisusedforhandlingallmeasurements.
Eachnetworkelementcanhaveonlyoneinstanceofeachmeasurementrunning.In
otherwords,themeasurementiseitheractiveornot.Eachmeasurementhasa
reportingperiod,thereforeatsetintervals,eachcounterwillreturnwithavaluefor
eachobject.
Theoutputintervaldeterminesforhowlongcountersarecollectedintoa
measurement.Measurementscanbecollectedatregularintervals:15-30-60
minutes,2-3-4-6-12-24hours.

Figure 139: Traffic Measurements and Counters

241
Logical Counters and KPIs

ALogicalCounterisaformulawhichcombines,witharithmeticaloperations,data
collectedfrommeasurementcounters.LogicalCountersthatdescribethemost
importantaspectsofthenetworkoperationsarereferredtoasKeyPerformance
Indicators(KPIs).
AKPIcanalsoincludecountersfromdifferentmeasurements.The
measurements/countersmust,however,allbeofthesameobjectlevelforyoutobe
abletoincludetheminoneKPI.
TheoperatorsdecideindividuallywhattheKPIsarewhentheydefinethecontents
ofthereports.
Figure 140: Logical Counters and KPIs

Key Performance Indicators and Reports

NetworkperformancecanbeevaluatedbasedonKPI.Theusersfinallydecidewhat
keyperformanceindicatorsareusedwhentheydefinethecontentsofthereports.
Keyperformanceindicatorsusethecountersreceivedfromoneorvarious
measurements.Tocreateformulas,allthemeasurementsusedintheformulamust
beactivated,andinaddition,themeasurementshavetohavethesameoutput
intervals.Incasethemeasurementshavedifferentintervals,themeasurementscan
beexaminedonlyaccordingtothelongerintervals.
Forexample:DataisreceivedfromtwoNEs.TheintervalforoneNEissettobe15
minutesandtheintervalfortheotherNEisonehour.TheKPIvaluescanthenbe
examinedonlywiththeminimumtimeperiodofonehour.
Figure 141: KPIs and Reports

243
Knowledge Check: Performance Management Concepts

WhatgroupsinsideanorganizationcanbenefitfromthePMdataandwhy?
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
ExplainwhatisKPI?
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________

NetAct Performance Manager tools

Performance Management system
PerformanceManageractsasthecentralizeddatawarehousingsolutionwhere
applicationscanfindaholisticandvendoragnosticviewofthenetworks
performanceandwherereportscanbedefinedontheflyusingadvancedtoolsets.
PerformanceManagerisdeliveredwithasetofcomprehensivepre-definedreports
andKeyPerformanceIndicators(KPIs)thatmeetthemostcommoncustomer
needsandallowimmediateuseofproduct.
Dataiscollectedfrommultiplesystemsandplacedinonecentralizeddata
warehouse.
ThereceiveddataisthentransformedtotheNetActBasenativePMdataformat.
Requiredconversionconfigurationsorscriptsarepartoftherespectiveadaptation.
OncemeasurementsareinsertedintotheNetActBasedatabasetherespectivedata
isavailableforfurtherreportingandusage.
ThefollowingfigureillustratesthePMdataflow:
Figure 142: PM data flow
PartofNEIntegration:Thenetworkelementhastobeconfiguredtosend
measurementdatabyusingtheNetActapplication
Administration of Measurements.

245
Performance Manager tools
Figure 143: Performance Manager start page
Amenubarislocatedatthetopofthemainwindowandprovidesaccesstosystem
widefunctionalitiesortools.Theseareasfollows:
NavigateReporting Suite:Thisviewdisplaysthedefaultcontentdelivered
byNokia.Onlyadministratorscancustomizethiscontent,createandpublish
sharedreportsinthetreeforallusers.Thecustomizationisperformedvia
ReportingSuitePublisher.
NavigateSaved reports:Allowsbrowsingthereportsanddashboards
createdbytheusersandstoredinthesystemforfuturevisualizationand
execution.
Reporting ToolsReport Creator:Isusedtocreatereportsinafasterand
easierwaythroughaGraphicalUserInterface(GUI)wizardthatguidesyou
throughalltherequiredsteps.
Reporting ToolsKPI Creator:AllowsyoutocreateandchangeKPI
formulas.
AdministrationPublisher:Allowsyoutopublishyourreportsinthe
ReportingSuitestree.
AdministrationScheduler:Allowstheusertodefineatimetabletoruna
specificreport.
AdministrationReporter Admin Toolkit:Administrationofmultipleservers
canbeverycomplex,sincetherearemanyconfigurationfilesthatneedtobe
synchronized.Withthisapplication,administratorscaneasilyconfigurePMpipe
settingsinagraphicaluserinterface.
AdministrationThresholder and Profiler:Youcandefinethresholdsand
rulesonperformancecountersorKPIs.
Preferences:Userscandefinetheirownpreferencesregardingtheapplication
lookandfeelandbehavior

TheHomeareaisthedefaultviewpresentedafterasuccessfullogin.Themenus
areavailableontop.Whentheuserstartsnavigating,theareasarekeptintabsat
thebottomintheView Barandtheusercanalwaysaccesstheopenedareaswith
allthesettingspreviouslydefined.ThearrowontheleftsideoftheView Barallows
togglingit.
Figure 144: Performance Manager GUI
Thenavigationtreeonselectedpagesprovides,forexample,choicesof
objecttoselectwhenthetaskistoview,editand/orsave.
Figure 145: Performance Manager tools

247
Performance Manager start page

Tobeabletopreventproblemsinthenetworkbeforetheyoccur,itisimportantto
haveagoodunderstandingofthedataaswellaspowerfultoolstosortoutthemost
importantindicators.
WithPerformanceManager,operatorscanviewandanalyzethenetwork
performancedatacomingfromdifferentsources.Rawdatabecomesmeaningful
informationthatisaggregatedandvisualizedingraphicalandtextualreports.KPIs
arethemostimportantindicatorsofthenetworksperformance.KPIreportsallow
theoperatortodetectthefirstsignsofperformancedegradation,preventthe
developmentofcriticalnetworkproblems,troubleshootspecificelementsand
analyzeperformancetrends.
PerformanceManagerprovidesawiderangeoffunctionalitiesandreportingtools
thataretargetedforallusergroupsofaperformancemanagementsystem.These
functionalitiesandtoolsaredescribedinthefollowingsections.
Performance Manager Functions

ThePerformanceManagerenablestheuserto:
Theeasy-to-useGUIallowsexecutinggeneralwebconfiguration,advanced
reporting,thresholdsupervision,profilingandtrendingonlongtermrawand
aggregateddata.Withthewebportalfunctions,theusersareableto:
Configurewebpageuserpreferences.
Createandeditreports,forprivateorpublicusagewithReport Creator.
CreateandeditKPIs,forprivateorpublicusagewithKPI Creator.
BrowseforexistingKPIsandreports.
Customizedashboardswithtablesandmultiplecharttypes.
SchedulereportsanddistributethemviaemailinCSVorXLSformat.
Customizethewebportallookandfeelandsetupuser'spreferences.
Reporting functions
ThefollowingspecificreportingfunctionalitiesareavailableinPerformanceManager
portal:
Tableandchartreportviews
ExporttoExcel(tableandchartviews)andCSV(tableviewonly)
SavedReportsandReportNavigator(actasbookmarksinthereportstree)
Reportdocumentation(includingKPIformulas)
Reportscheduling
DataReliability
Tablefiltering
Advancedfiltering
KPIthresholdingwithinreports
Drills
Timeoverlay

TopNanalysis
Multi-technology&multi-vendorreports

249
Lab exercise: Performance Manager tools

Context
ThissectionteststhestudentstoexplainthepurposeofthePerformanceManager
tool.
Procedure
1 LogintoNetActandatstartpage.
2 NavigatetoPerformance Managerapplication.
Result of this step

WhatisthegeneralpurposeofthePerformanceManager?
Writedownthefunctionaltabsyoucanseeatthetoplevel.
TheNavigationmenu,providesuserswithaccesstoalreadycreatedreports.
WhatisthedifferencebetweentheReporting Suite Viewandthe
Saved Reports ViewintheNavigationmenu?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Knowledge Check: Performance Manager applications

Describeingeneralterms,howPMdataiscollectedandprocessedinNetAct
andhowdataisavailabletobeusedbythereportingapplications.
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
HowNetworkElementstrafficmeasurementsareadministrated?
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________

251
Create, customize and generate performance management

reports and dashboards
Creating reports
Context
TheReportCreatorisusedtocreatereportsinafasterandeasierwaythrougha
GUIwizardthatguidesyouthroughalltherequiredstepswithaminimalnumberof
clicksanduserdecisions.
Thefunctionsandservicesavailableinthereportcreatortool:
Figure 146: Creating reports

Procedure
1 Selectthetechnology,networkobjectorhierarchyofnetworkobjectsforwhich
thereportshallbeproduced.
Information
AfterselectingReporting ToolsReport Creatoryouhavetoselectinthe
followingorder:Technology,Hierarchy,ReportLevelandObject.
Use*wildcardtomatchanycharacter.Thereisnolimitationonthe
numberofwildcardsused.SelectmultipleobjectsusingtheShift(to
selectseveralconsecutiveobjects)orCtrl(toselectseveralnon
consecutiveobjects)keys.Youcanonlyselectamaximumof20
objects.
a) SelectEdit Configuration Management Selection.
Information
Thisoptionaltabisonlyavailablefor3GRANandLTEradioandallowsto
selectconfigurationparametersfortheselectedobject.
b) Selectthetimeperiodinwhichthereportrunsbyclickingonthe
Edit Time Selectionbutton.
Result of this step

Anewwindowopenstodefinethetimeperiod.

253
2 Selectthetimelevelthatshallbeusedinthereport.
Information
Time Level TheTimeSelectionpanelallowsyoutoselectthe

timegranularityforthereport.
TimeTypehasthreeoptions:
Relative Thetimeperiodqueriedisthetimeperiodofthe
servertimezone.
Absolute Thetimeperiodqueriedisthelocalusertime
zone.Iftheserverisinadifferenttimezoneyou
mayfindusefultoadjustthelocalusertime.
Real Time Youcandefinethetimeperiodinminutes(Look

backperiod)fromcurrenttimethatmonitorsina
Realtimereport.If,forexample,youdefinethe
Lookbackperiodto50minutes,thereportshows
historicaldatafrom50minutesbacktothecurrent
timeandaddsnewdatauntilthemaximumdefault
of120minutestimeintervalwindow.Afterthis,
olderdataisremovedfromthereport,always
keepingthe120minutesmaximumwindow.
SelectedTimeLevelmustbeRAW.
AfterdefiningthetimeLevel/TimeTypeyouhavetoselectthecounterforthe
report(KPI/CounterSelectionorEditKPISelection).

3 SelecttheKPIs,KPIgroups,countersandpreviouslydefinedreportstobeused
orincludedinthenewreportthatisbeingcreated.
Information
WhenselectingaKPI,acounterorareport,theinfoboxbelowthelistofitems
displaysspecificinformationontheselecteditem(forexample,name,
description,formulaoftheselectedKPI).
IntheKPIspane,youcanaddtothereporttheavailableKPIs,whicharelisted
alphabetically.
IntheCounterspane,youcanaddtheavailablecounters.
IntheReportspane,youcanaddKPIsfrompredefinedreports.Thereportsare
groupedintodifferentpurposesandavailableinthedrop-downlist.Whenyou
selectthereportgroup,theKPIlistispopulatedaccordingly.
4 Previewandsavethereport.

255
Saving and generating reports
Figure 147: Preview Reports window
Thenextstepallowsyoutopreviewthereport.Inthisstepyoucan:
Namethereport.
Provideatextualdescriptionofthereport.
Configurethereportasprivate(accesslimitedtothecreatorandadministrator)
orshared(otherusersallowedtoaccessit).
Savethereport.
Seehowthedisplayofthereportlookslike.Youcanalsoexperimentchanging
thevisualizationoptionsofthedata(forexample,changefromtableviewto
chart).
Triggerthereportexecution(generate).

Figure 148: Save Report Window

257
Lab exercise: Create report for active user equipment with category 5 for
MRBTS
Context
Executethefollowingstepsforcreatingreportforactiveuserequipmentwith
category5forMRBTS:
Procedure
1 SelectReporting ToolsReport Creator.
2 SelectLNBTS-NSN LTE Base Transceiver Stationunderthe

NSN Adaptation SupportfolderintheTechnologypane.
3 SelectPLMN/MRBTSintheHierarchyPanel.
4 SelectMRBTSintheObjectLevelPane.
5 SelecttheavailableNEwhichappearsintheObjectFilteringPane.
6 ClickonEdit Configuration Management Selection.
7 SkiptheCM Parameter Set SelectionandclickonEdit Time Selection.
8 SelectHOURintheTimeLevelPane.
9 IntheTimeTypePaneselect:Relative,1 dayandLast Midnight.
10 ClickKPI/Counter Selection.
11 ClickCountersLTE Cell Loadofthefilter.
12 ChoosethecounterACTIVE_UE_CAT_5_AVGandmovethecounterintothe
SelectedKPIs/Countersplanebyclickingthe button.
13 ClickPreview Report.

14 EnteranameforthereportandclickGenerate & Save.
15 SaveitunderMyReports.
Information
Ifneededgenerateanewfolderwiththisname.
Result of this step

Thefollowingscreenshotistheresultofthedatatable:
16 Changetheoutputtypebyclickingonthegear andchoose
Output typeLine Chart.
Result of this step

259
Creating Dashboards
Context
Thisfunctionalitygivesyoutheabilitytoaddarbitraryandindependentreportpanels
intothesamedashboardview.Itactsasablankcanvasforgroupingvarious
reportingpanelswithintheapplication.
Youcaneasilycreatenewdashboardsoraddpanelstoexistingones.Thatcanbe
easilydonebyselectingthecorrespondingoptioninapanelbelongingtoa
generatedreport.
Figure 149: Add to Dashboard
NotforRealTime.
Procedure
1 GenerateaReport.
2 AddPaneltonew,existingoractiveDashboard.
3 ClickSave.
4 Saveandnameit.
Example
Thefollowingscreenshotshowsthreepanelsinasingledashboard:

Figure 150: Display reports in Dashboards - Three Panels in Dashboard

261
Viewing and customizing reports

Context
Executethefollowingstepstoviewandcustomizereports:
Procedure
1 SelectNavigateSaved ReportsandclickonselectedReport.
Result of this step

Thefollowingscreenshotshowsthereportresultinformofadatatable:

2 CustomizeReports.
Information
ThefollowingscreenshotdepictstheOutput Typeavailable:
Thefollowingscreenshotshowsanalternateviewingoption:

263
Report Navigator
TheReportNavigatorallowsyoutodisplay,searchandaccessalluserspecificand
sharedreportsstoredinthesystem.
TheReportNavigatorisaccessibleviatheExploreoptionwithinthelistofsaved
reports.
SelectNavigateSaved ReportsExploreandselectReportto
customize.
Figure 151: Report Navigator
TheReportNavigatorallowsyouto:
Searchreportsbasedonuserspecifiedcriteria
Triggerreportsexecution
Schedulereports
Editreportdetailsandparameters
Sharethereportwithotherusers
Savethereportwithadifferentname(forexample,forcustomizationpurposes)
Deletereports
Exportreports
Figure 152: Report Navigator - Customize report

Report Suite Publisher
Figure 153: Report Suite Publisher - Publish report
TheReportPublishertoolallowsyoutopublishyourreportsinanownfolderinthe
ReportingSuitestreeifyouhadsharedyourreportbefore.
Itcomprisesaveryconvenientfilteringpanel,whichhelpsyoutoquicklylocatethe
reporttobeshared.
SelectAdministrationPublishersReporting Suite Publisher.

265
Lab exercise: Report Creator

Context
Performthefollowingstepscreateareportforaspecificcounter:
Procedure
1 OpenReport CreatorandfilterforanMRBTS.
2 CreateandgenerateahourlyreportfortheActiveTTIbasedonthetwo
countersforthelastthreedaysbackfromlastmidnight.
3 SearchforthecountersACTIVE_TTI_DL(M8012C90)andACTIVE_TTI_UL
(M8012C89).
4 ChangetheOutput TypeofthereporttoLine Chart.
5 Sharethereportforotherusers.

Summary: Basic Performance Management with NetAct

Module Summary
ExplainthepurposeofPerformanceManagementanddescribewhatisKPI.
dashboards.

267
Advanced Performance Management

Module Objectives
Create, modify and publish KPIs

KPI Creator introduction
TheKPICreatortoolallowsyoutocreateandchangeKPIformulasandhasthe
followingfeatures:
Technology-basedKPIcreation
Create/EditCustomKPIsfromexistingKPIs/Counters
SourceKPI/CounterSearchandFilteroptions
ORACLEfunctionssupport
AutomaticDivide-By-Zerochecks
CustomKPIsavailableforuseinReports
DeleteCustomKPIs
KPITitleandUnitspecificationsfortheReportOutput
KPIFormulavalidation
SelectReporting Tools KPI Creator
ThefollowingfigureillustratesthestepstocreateKPIs:

Figure 154: Create KPIs

269
Creating a KPI
Context
PerformthefollowingstepsforcreatingaKPI:
Figure 155: Procedure: Creating a KPI
Procedure
1 SelecttheKPItechnologyfromthedrop-downlist.IftheKPIlistisnot
automaticallyupdated,clicktheRefreshbutton.
Information
IntheKPI Selectiontab,theavailableKPIsarelistedalphabetically,according
tothetechnologyselected.
2 Insertanameupto30characters.
Information
TheNameisamandatoryfieldandmustbeunique.

3 Insertatitleandchoosetheunit.
Information
TheTitleisamandatoryfieldandisusefultoidentifytheKPIcolumnheader.
TheUnitisalsoamandatoryfieldandalltheavailableunitsforthecustomKPI
areprovidedinthedrop-downlist.

271
4 ClicktheFormula OptionstabandselecttheKPIsorCounters,orboth.
a) Clickthearrowbuttontoinserttheformulainthetextbox.
Information
TheFormulaisamandatoryfieldandisfullyeditable.
TofiltertheKPIlisttypetheKPInameinthetextbox.Thefilteringisdynamic
accordingtotheKPInamewritten.
TousetheKPIsformulainthecustomKPI,selectthedesiredKPIandclickthe
button.TheformulaiscopiedtotheFormulafieldintheKPI Editorarea.
IfyouwanttoreuseallKPIinformationselectthedesiredKPIandclickthe
New from Selected KPIbutton.AlltheKPIinformationiscopiedinKPI Editor
areafields,butthewordNewisaddedtothenameandthetitlefields,since
thesystemKPIscannotbeedited.
ByclickingtheNewbutton,allthefieldsintheKPI Editorareaare
deletedanditenablesyoutostarteditinganewKPI.
YoucandeletecustomKPIsbyselectingtheKPIandclickingthe
Delete Custom KPIbutton.
IfyouclicktheNew from Selected KPIbuttontheinformationfrom

thatspecificKPIisaddedtotheKPI Editorareaandallfieldsare
editable.
TofiltertheCounterslist,typethecounternameinthetextbox.The
filteringisdynamicaccordingtothecountername.
TousethecounterformulainthecustomKPI,selectthedesired
counterandclickthe button.
TheformulaiscopiedtotheFormulafieldintheKPI Editorarea.
ChecktheUse NVLflagifyouwanttousethecounterformulawith
theNULLVALUELOGICfunctionapplied,whichreplacesavalue
whenanullvalueisfound.

5 InserttheoperatorsintheformulaorselectfromtheFunctionstab.
Information
TheFunctionstaballowsyoutousepre-definedfunctionsinthecustomKPI
formula.
IntheNameselectionbox,selectthedesiredfunctionandclickthe
button.
ThefunctioniscopiedtotheFormulafieldintheKPI Editorarea.TheUsage
descriptionboxisavailablebelowtheNameselectionboxandprovides
additionalinformationontheselectedfunction.
Thedescriptionboxincludesthesyntax,expression,conditions,resultsand
otherinformation,dependingontheselectedfunction.
Thefollowingoperatorsareaccepted:
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
TheparenthesesarealsovalidandhelpthecreationofmorecomplexKPI
formulas.
6 EnteraKPIdescriptionintheDescriptionfield.
Information
Itisvisibletoallusers.TheDescriptionisanoptionalfieldandisusefulto
describeinmoredetailtheKPIusageandtheKPIformula.

273
7 ThePermissionisanon-editablefieldandinformsiftheeditingKPIisprivate
(notpublished)orpublic(published).
8 ClicktheValidatebuttontovalidatetheformulasyntaxandallthemandatory
KPIfieldsintheKPI Editorarea.
Information
Ifsomefieldisnotvalid,apop-upwindowisdisplayed,informingwhichfieldis
notvalid.TheKPI PublishertoolcanbeusedtosharetheKPIwithotherusers.
9 ClicktheSavebuttontosavetheKPI.
Information
AquickvalidationoftheKPIfieldsisperformedbeforesavingthenewKPI
information.

Create KPIs
Thefollowingshowsaformulatocalculatetheratiobetweenthenumberofactive
usersandthenumberoftheRRCconnectedusersinacell:
Unitisin%.
Figure 156: Formula for KPI creation
ThefollowingscreenshotisanexampletocreateownKPI:
Figure 157: Creating KPIs using formula

275
KPI Publisher
Bydefault,itisnotvisibletoanyoneexcepttheuserwhocreatedtheformula.The
KPIPublishertooldescribedinthefollowingchaptercanbeusedtosharetheKPI
withotherusers.
SelectAdministrationPublisherKPI Publisher.
Figure 158: KPI Publisher

Lab exercise: Creating, modifying and publishing KPI

Context
PerformthefollowingtocreateaKPIusingtheformulaprovided:
Prerequisites
CheckthattheRadioNEs(MRBTS)areavailable.
Procedure
1 CreateaKPIusingthefollowingformula:
Information
ActiveuserequipmentwithCategory5+activeuserequipmentwithCategory8.
2 Validate andSavetheKPI.
3 OpentheexistingKPIandmodifyKPItitleusingtheformuladescription.
Information
4 ValidateandSavetheKPI.
5 PublishtheKPI.
Post-requisites
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

277
Manage preferences and schedule reporting

Preferences
TheNokiaPerformanceManageruserscandefinetheirownpreferencesregarding
theapplication'slookandfeelandbehaviorsuchas:
Definethedefaultviewdisplayedwhentheuserlogsintheapplication.
Definethecolorstobeusedinthereportcharts.
Filteroutthecolorsthatcannotberecognizedbycolor-blindusers.
Definetheapplicationtheme,whichdetermines,forexample,thecolorsofthe
menubars,fontsandbackgrounds.
Figure 162: Preferences

Report Scheduler
ThisfunctionalityshowsallreportswhichwerecreatedwiththeoptionSchedule
Report.
AfterstartingtheSchedule Browseryougetatimetabletomodifyscheduled
reportsisdisplayed.
Thelistofscheduledreportsismanagedthroughtheschedulebrowserwindow
(administratorprivilegesrequired).Allthereportsscheduledthroughthereport
schedulerarelistedwithinthiswindow.
Theschedulebrowserworksascockpitorcontrolcenterforthemanagementofall
scheduledreports.Theadministratorcan:
Accessdetailedinformationonthescheduledreport(forexample,report
information,scheduledetails,currentexecutionstatus).
Triggerthereportexecutionaccordingtothedefinedschedule.
Pausethereportscheduleexecution.
Edittheschedule.
Deletethereportschedule.
Filterthelistofschedules(all,running,paused).
Thislevelofcontrolallowstheadministratortocheckandapprovetheschedulingof
eachreportexecutionmakingsurethattheexecutionofthescheduledreportsdoes
notaffectthedailyoperationsofotherusers.
SelectAdministrationScheduler.
Figure 163: Report Scheduler - Schedule Browser

279
Lab exercise: Scheduling a report

Context
Performthefollowingtoscheduleareport:
Prerequisites
CheckthattheRadioMRBTSareavailable.
Procedure
1 Chooseareportforschedulingfromthesavedreportsplane.
2 Explorethereport.
Post-requisites
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Set threshold values for alarms

Thresholder and Profiler
YoucandefinethresholdsandrulesonperformancecountersorKPIs.Whena
thresholdhasbeencrossed,analarmnotificationiscreatedandcanbeeither
forwardedthroughtheFaultManagementsystemorviaSMS/e-mail.
Thisallowsforproactiveperformancemonitoringwheretheoperationsdepartment
isactivelyalertedonpotentialnetworkproblemsratherthanhavingtomanually
analyzevariousdifferentperformancereports.
SelectAdministrationThresholder and Profiler
Figure 167: Thresholder and Profiler - Define thresholds

281
Lab exercise: Object selection

Context
AminoralarmshouldbegeneratediftheaveragenumberofactiveUEswithUE
Category5(active_UE_CAT_5_AVG)fallsbelow10within1hour.
Performthefollowingstepstoselectanobject:
Procedure
1 ClickAdministrationThresholder and Profiler.
2 SelectLNBTS-NSN LTE Base Transceiver StationintheTechnologyPane.
3 SelectPLMN/MRBTSintheHierarchyPanel.
4 SelectMRBTSintheReportLevelPane.
5 SelecttheavailableNEwhichappearsintheObjectsPane.
6 ClickonEdit Time Selection.
Post-requisites
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Lab exercise: Time Selection

Context
Performthefollowingstepstoselectanobject:
Evaluation period Timeintervalinwhichreportisre-executedtocheck

fornewvalues.Itcanalsobeseenastheperiod
duration.
Evaluation delay Delaybetweentheperiodendsandthereportis

executedinordertofetchdatathatcomeslate.If
thedelayissettoolow,thereisnoPMdatainthe
databaseforthecorrespondingKPIs/PIsandthatis
whynothresholdviolationscanoccur.
Procedure
1 SelectHOURintheTimeLevelPane.
2 IntheTimeTypePaneselect:Evaluation PeriodandEvaluation delay.
3 ClickEdit Alarm Settings.
Post-requisites
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

283
Lab exercise: Alarm Settings

Context
PerformthefollowingstepstomodifytheAlarmSettings:
Figure 168: Threshold and Profiler - Alarm Settings
Procedure
1 IntheCounterspanebrowsefor,LTE Cell Loadandselect

ACTIVE_UE_CAT5_AVE.
2 IntheFormula creationpane,clickonMinor.
3 Withtheaddbutton,theselectedcounterisshiftedtotheMinorfield.
4 Createtheformula<10.
5 ClickEdit Threshold Information and Notification.
Post-requisites
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

Lab exercise: Threshold information and notification

Context
ExecutethefollowingstepstosettheThresholdinformationandNotification:
Supportedalertmethodsare:
Alarmforwardedtothefaultmanagementsystem.
E-mailnotificationsenttoaconfigurableaddress.
SMSsenttoaconfigurabletelephonenumber.
Procedure
1 Defineanameforthisthreshold.
2 ActivatecheckboxsothatthethresholdalarmappearsinAlarmList.
3 DefineanewAlarm idforthisalarm.
4 DefineAlarm textforthisnumber.
5 Saveit.
Post-requisites
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

285
Create and activate measurement plans

Administration of Measurements
AdministrationofMeasurements(AoM)applicationenablesyoutomanage
(enable/disable)measurementsonnetworkelementstoallowdatacollectionfrom
networkelementstoNetAct.
Thisapplicationcanbeusedtoview,create,modifyanddeletemeasurementplans
andtemplates.
Measurementplanscanbeusedtostartandstopthemeasurementsonthenetwork
elements.AoMalsohelpstouploadmeasurementplansfromthenetworkelements
toNetAct.
Figure 169: AoM-Start window
Thetoolcontainsfourtabs.Thesetabsareasfollows:
Network Overview Itenablesyoutoviewtheactivationstatusof
measurementsinthenetwork.
Plans Itenablesyoutocreate,modify,delete,activateand
deactivateplans.
Templates Itenablesyoutocreate,modifyanddeleteatemplate.It
alsoallowsyoutocreateaplanbasedonanexisting
templates.
Operation Overview Itenablesyoutoviewasummaryofalltheoperations

carriedoutduringaspecifictimeperiodforspecificNE
types.
Beforeweprepareaplanforactivationwehavetofindouttherelevantcounterfor
ourmeasurementandtherelatedmeasurementtype.
ThiscanbedoneeasilyusingObject Information Browser.

Figure 170: Object Information Browser

287
Creating plan
Context
Aplanenablesyoutoselectandschedulemeasurementsandcountersinasingle
networkelement.
Youcanalsocreateaplanbasedonanexistingtemplatebyaddingspecificplan
parameterssuchasnetworkelementinstancesandstartorstopdates.Thisallows
anadministratortodefineatemplate,forexample,foreachnetworkelementtype.
Otheruserscancreateplansforthespecificnetworkelementinstancesusingthe
existingtemplate.
Creatingaplanisdoneinthreesteps.
Procedure
1 ClickonNewinthePlanstabtoopentheconfigurescheduleitems.

2 Configurescheduleitems.
a) IntheNamefield,enteranamefortheplan.
b) IntheDescriptionfield,enterthedescriptionforthenewplan.
c) SelectanAdaptationfromthedrop-downlist(seeinapplication
Dynamic AdaptiononNetActstartpage).AnAdaptationprovidesthe
interfacethroughwhichdataoriginatingfromnetworkelementsentersNetAct
andcanbehandledbyNetActapplications.
d) SelectameasurementtypefromtheMeasurement typechecklist.
e) Defineschedulesfortheselectedmeasurementtype.
f) ClickAdd to List(Listofavailablemeasurementtypes).Alistcancontain
oneormoremeasurementtypesand/oradaptions.
g) PressNexttocontinuewithStep3.

289
3 Addmanagedobjects.
a) SelectthesupportedMOclassmeansthespecificproductandtherelease.
Information
Forexample,MRBTS-FLF16.
b) SelecttheMeasurementtypeandtheManagedobject.
Information
Forexample,LTECellLoadforMRBTS-38.
c) ClickAdd to List(Listofavailablemanagedobjects).
d) ClickSave.

Activating plan
Context
Themeasurementsintheuploadedplansareactiveinthecorrespondingnetwork
elements.
PerformthefollowingstepstoopenthePlantabinAdministrationofMeasurement
application:
Procedure
1 Selecttheplannamebycheckingtheselectionbox.

291
2 PressActivatetoconfirmactivation.
Information
Thisprocessmaytakeseveralminutes.
Result of this step

TheOperation Overviewscreenopensandyoucancheckthestatusofthe
activation.
Result
Themeasurementsintheuploadedplansareactiveinthecorrespondingnetwork
elements.

Lab exercise: Creating new measurement plan for LTE cell load
Context
Performthefollowingtocreateanewplan:
Prerequisites
CheckthattheRadioNEs(MRBTS)areavailable.
Procedure
1 CreateandactivateaplanforLTE Cell Throughput.
2 CheckthemeasurementdetailsintheObject Information Browser.
Post-requisites
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

293
Summary: Advanced Performance Management

Module Summary


295
Configuration Management
Module Objectives
management.
ExplaintheRadioOptimizationProcessinNetActandthemain
functionalitiesofOptimizer.
Configuration Management in NetAct

Overview
NetActConfiguratorisacomponentinthescalableNetActframeworkforoperating
mobilenetworks.Configuratorgivesaccesstoreal-timenetworkconfigurationdata
andprovidestoolstomanagenetworkconfiguration.
ThemainfunctionalitiesofNetActConfiguratorare:
Storingthenetworkparametersinthedatabase
Dataexchangewithexternaltools
Setting,modifying,viewingandcomparingnetworkconfigurationdata
Massmodificationonthenetwork:integratingsites,extendingandoptimizing
thenetwork
Tuningofthenetworkconfiguration
Thenetworkarchitecturecanbefunctionallygroupedintotheaccessnetworkand
thecorenetwork.Theaccessnetworkhandlesallradio-relatedfunctionalitywhile
thecorenetworkisresponsibleforroutingcallsanddataconnectionstoexternal
networks.WithNetActConfigurator,theaccessnetworkandcorenetworkare
managedinacentralizedway.
Figure 171: Configuration Management Overview

Configuration Management Process

NetActConfiguratorisafullyintegratedapplicationwhichprovidescommon
configurationmanagementfunctionalityformulti-technologynetworks.
Singledatastorage,commonapplicationsandprocessesenableefficientand
reliablemanagementofcomplexnetworkscomprisingofdifferenttechnologies.
Highoperationalefficiencyisachievedthrough:
Automatedprocesses
Massoperations
Highnetworkqualitythrough
Reducinghumanerrors
Workingonusecaseanddatalevel
Severaldataauditingoptions
ThefollowingchartshowsthebasicprocessofConfigurationManagementin
NetAct:
1. Byuploadingconfiguration,theoperatorgetsthecurrentactiveoperativestatus
ofthenetwork(networkelements).Thisinformationwillbethebaseforall
configurationactivities.
2. Configuratorprovidesdifferenttoolsforcreatingandcheckingthedesired
configurationsonthenetworklevel,rangingfromsingleparameterchangesup
tocompletenetworkconfigurations.
3. TheprovisioningactivitiesarecarriedoutbyConfiguratorafteroperator
confirmationondemandorscheduled,beingablealsotocreatealsofallback
configurationsasabackupforthechangesexecutedonthenetwork.
Figure 172: Configuration Management Processes

297
Configurator Basic Concepts

TheConfiguratorapplicationsinNetActuseagroupofbasicconceptswhich
describethenetworkandtheactionsthatthosetoolsexecuteonit.
TheNetworkresourcesarerepresentedasmanaged objectsinNetAct.
Configuratorsupportsmanagedobjectclassesinthecorenetwork.
Theactual configurationreferstothecurrentconfigurationofthemanaged
network.Thereisonlyoneactualconfigurationinthesystem.
Thechangestobeexecutedontheactualconfigurationareimplementedusing
plans.Aplancontainsaconfigurationchangethatwillbeperformedorhasbeen
performedtothenetwork.
Thereference configurationisadatasetthatdescribesthedesiredorthetarget
configurationofthenetworkforcomparingitwiththeactualconfigurationdueto
consistencychecks.
Whenthenetworkisexpandedandoptimized,templatesofferready-made
parametersetsfordefiningnewmanagedobjectsinthenetwork.Templatesallow
usingpatternsinobjectcreationanddecreasemanualtyping.
Theconsistencyofthenetworkparametersisvitalfortheoptimumfunctioningofthe
network.Configuratorprovides rules and tools to check the consistencyofthe
actualconfigurationorasingleplan.
Sitetemplatemechanismallowsyoutocreateabasestationconfigurationmodel
andusethisconfigurationmodelwhengeneratingconfigurationdataforanewbase
station.SitetemplatesareapplicableforGSM,WCDMA,LTE,andSingleRAN
managedobjects.
Thebenefitofthemechanismisthattheuserneedstodefineonlyafewmandatory
parametersforanewbasestation,whereastherestoftheconfigurationis
automaticallygeneratedbyConfigurator.Theusercandefinethescopeofmanaged
objectsandtheirparametersincludedinthesitetemplates.Additionally,thereare
functionalitiesforimport,export,create,modifyanddeletesitetemplates.
Sitetemplatescanbegeneratedfromtheactualorplannedconfiguration.Thesite
templatefunctionalityispartoftheautoconfigurationandautoconnection
functionality.
Figure 173: Configuration Management Basic Concepts

Managed Objects
ThecommonlyuseddefinitionofManagedObjectisalsoapplicablewithinthe
contextofConfigurator:
AManagedObjectisunderstoodasanabstractrepresentationofanetwork
resource,wheretheresourcecaneitherbeaphysicalentityoralogicalentity.
AManagedObjectClassdefinestheinformationmodelofanetworkresourcetype
(Forexample,BTSinformationmodel).Informationmodelinthiscontextincludes:
Overallinformationaboutthenetworkresource(networkresourcetypename,
Forexample,BTS,networkresourcemodelrelease,Forexample,Release1"
andsoon.)
Parameterinformationaboutthenetworkresource(parametername,parameter
description,parameterdatatype,parameterrange,andsoon.)
AManagedObjectInstancerepresentsaspecificnetworkresource(Forexample,
BTSinstalledinsitexinregiony).Therepresentationofthespecificnetwork
resourcemeans:
Identificationinformationaboutthespecificnetworkresource(Forexample,fully
qualifieddistinguishedname,supplementaryidentificationparameterssuchasUser
Label,CellIDandsoon.)
Parametervaluedataaboutthespecificnetworkresource.

299
Working sets
WorkingsetsallowNetActuserstogroupparticularnetworkelementsaccordingto
theirowncriteria.Onenetworkelementcanbeassignedtomorethanoneworking
set.WorkingsetsareavailableinCMEditorandCMOperationsManagerafter
creatingthemwiththeWorkingSetManagertool.
Formoreinformationonworkingsets,seeNetAct Administration NetAct
Administration Helps Working Set Manager Help.
Forinformationonviewingandfilteringworkingsets,seeViewing the list of working
sets and managing working setscontentandSelecting Working Settobeusedas
filterinCMEditorHelp.
Themaximumnumberofmanagedobjectsineachworkingsetis100000.
Ifyouaddnewelementsintheworkingsetafterhavingsetascheduled
upload,thesenewelementsarenotaddedinthescheduleduploadscope.
Figure 174: Basic Concepts: Managed Objects

Configuration Types
Figure 175: Configuration Types
InthecontextofConfigurator,theconfigurationisasetofManagedObjects.
ConfiguratorsupportsthefollowingtypesofConfigurations:
Actual Configuration SetofManagedObjectsthatrepresentthecurrent
configurationofthenetwork(thereisonlyoneActual
Configurationstored/managedinthesystem).
Reference SetofManagedObjectsthatrepresentthedesired
Configuration configurationofthenetwork(thereisonlyoneReference
Configurationstored/managedinthesystem).
Plan Configuration SetofManagedObjectsthatrepresentaconfiguration

changethatwillbeperformedorhasbeenperformedto
thenetwork(thereisnotheoreticallimitastohowmany
PlanConfigurationsarestored/managedinthesystem).
Planned SetofManagedObjectsthatrepresentwhatwouldbethe
Configuration statusofthenetworkifacertainPlanConfigurationwould
beimplemented(PlannedConfigurationsarenotstored
assuchinthesystem,butinsteadtheyarecalculatedon
realtime).
Actual configuration
Theactualconfigurationcomprisesofthefollowing:
Managedobjects,locationintopology,andobjectidentificationintopology
database.
ParametervaluesinConfiguratordatabase.
ParameterswithinterfacefromConfiguratortonetworkelement.
Non-networkparametersandnon-networkobjectswithoutamanagement
interfacefromConfigurator.
Objectadministrativestate(locked,unlocked)intopologydatabase.
Objectstate(operational,non-operational)intopologydatabase.

301
Non-operationalobjectsarestoredinthetopologyandtheyarenotpartoftheactive
network.Thenon-operationalobjectsmayhavebeenplannedforfutureuse,orthey
havebeendeletedfromnetwork.
Reference Configuration
Thereferenceconfigurationisstoredinthesystemasaseparatedatasetfrom
actualandplannedconfigurations.Referenceconfigurationcandescribethedesired
configurationthatshouldbekeptinthenetwork,butitcanalsodescribethetarget
configurationofthenetwork.Forbothcasesitispossibletofindoutiftherehave
beenchangesintheactualconfigurationinthenetwork,andifthechangesarevalid
andexpected.
Plans
Aplanisaconfigurationcontainingasetofmodificationsoftheactualconfiguration.
Aplancontainsonlymodificationsanditcanbeviewedontopoftheactual
configuration.
Planscanincludethefollowingtypesofmodifications:
Addnewmanagedobjectswithmandatoryparameters(createoperation).
Removeanexistingmanagedobject(deleteoperation).
Modifyparameters(includingadministrativestate)ofanexistingmanaged
objectinacertainconfiguration(updateoperation).Thedistinguishednameor
versioncannotbemodifiedusingaplan.Modifyingparametersofsomefuture
versionofmanagedobjectintargetconfigurationisnotpossible.
Figure 176: Configuration Types and Network Plans
Thefigureillustratesthecomparisonbetweenactualconfigurationandplanned
configuration.

Figure 177: Actual Configuration vs. Planned Configuration
Configuration Templates
InthecontextofConfigurator,templateisasetofdefaultvaluesthatareapplicable
toaspecificManagedObjectClass.
Templatesareusefulinseveralcontexts:
WhenparametershavethesamevaluesindifferentManagedObjectInstances
acrossthenetwork
Inthiscasetheactivityofpopulatingsuchparametervaluesisextremely
simplified,astheonlyrequiredactivityistofillatemplateandthenapplythe
templatetotheneededManagedObjectInstances.
Whenenforcementofaspecificparameterpolicyisrequired
Inthiscasetemplatescanbefilledwiththepolicyrequirements,thosetemplates
thenareauditedagainsttheActualConfigurationanddeviationsarereported.
TherearetwodifferenttypesofTemplatesinConfigurator:
SystemTemplate
Isasetofdefaultvaluesthatrepresentthefactorypresets.ThereisoneSystem
TemplateperManagedObjectClassanditisnotusereditable.
UserTemplate
Isasetofdefaultvaluesthatrepresentdefaultvaluesapplicableunderuser
definedconditions,Forexample,therecanbeoneusertemplatethatdefines
thedefaultvaluesapplicabletoaruralBTS,whiletherecanbeanotheruser
templatethatdefinesthedefaultvaluesapplicabletoanurbanBTS.Thereisno
theoreticallimittothenumberofUserTemplatesstored/managedinthesystem.
Using templates
Atemplateisprimarilyusedtodefineaninitialparametersetforanewmanaged
objectbyassigningatemplatetotheobject.Theusercandefineassignmentsfor
eachplannedobjectmanually.Assignmentinformationcanalsobeimportedaspart
oftheplanintoNetActConfigurator.Theassignmentisshownasthenameofthe
templateinuserinterfaces.Valuesfromtheassignedtemplatefornewmanaged
objectsareautomaticallyutilizedbyCMApplicationsthesamewayastheywould
havebeendefineddirectlyinplan.

303
Figure 178: Templates

Configuration Rules and Checks

Duringnetworkconfigurationplanningandplandatabuilding,manytypesof
constraintsanddependenciesneedtobenotedandtakencareof.Theriskthata
new,erroneous,orincompleteplanharmsthenetworkfunctioningafteractivationto
networkelementsneedstobeminimized.NetActConfiguratorrulesandcheck
functionalitybyCMAnalyzercanbeusedforthatpurpose.
CMAnalyzercontainspredefinedrulesetsthatcanbeusedindifferentprocedures
withnetworkconfiguration.Alsonewrulescanbeaddedandtailoredintothe
systembytheuser.Rulescanbecollectedintorulesets.Thesetsmustcontainan
appropriateselectionofrulesthatcanbemeaningfullyexecutedatthesametime.
RuleorrulesetexecutioniscalledacheckinCMAnalyzer.
Thetargetofthecheckcanbeanactualnetworkconfiguration,reference
configurationoraplanthatiseditedorbuiltusing,forexample,CMEditor.
Erroneousobjectsandviolationsareshowntotheuserintheuserinterfacefor
correctiveactions.Insomecases,thecorrectionoradditionisstraightforward,and
CMAnalyzerisabletoaddautomaticcorrectionstotheplan.
Figure 179: Rules and Checks

305
NetAct Configurator Applications

Configurator Architecture
Thefollowingfigureillustratestheconfigurationarchitecture.
Figure 180: Configurator Architecture

CM Editor
CMEditorprovidesintuitiveparameterediting,bothinminorparameter
modificationsandmassmodificationpurposes.CMEditorfunctionalityincludesthe
followingoperations:
Managingplans:Creating,modifying,anddeletingplans
Creating,andmasscreatingofmanagedobjects,editing,andmassediting
parametervaluesofmanagedobjects
Managingtheactualconfiguration
Viewingactualnetworkconfiguration
Sendtonetworktomakeconfigurationchangesonnetworkelementswithout
creatinganyplaninCMEditor
ManagingadministrativestatesofGSM,WCDMA,LTEandcorenetwork
objects
ManagingGSMroutingareas:uploadinganddownloadingRoutingAreaIP
Addressesfrom/toDNS
Managingthereferenceconfiguration
ManagingplannedandactualconfigurationwithTableEditor
Managingtemplates:Creatinganddeletingtemplates,Editingtemplates
Managingmaintenanceregions
Visualizationstoindicatethestatusofthemanagedobjectsandparameters
Backwardandforwardarrowstonavigatebetweendifferentviewschosenby
theuser
Removeobjectsfromplanstoundoanychangestothem
Figure 181: CM Editor

307
CM Analyzer
CMAnalyzeristhetoolforcheckingtheconsistencyrulesintheradioandcore
networkparametersandmanagedobjects.
CMAnalyzerfunctionalityincludesthefollowingoperations:
Checkingradionetworkandcorenetworkparametersandmanagedobjects,
andensuringthattheparametersaredefinedaccordingtoconsistencyrules.
Checkingfordiscrepanciesinactualconfiguration,plannedconfigurationsand
inreferenceconfiguration.
Autocorrection:definingaruleforautomaticinconsistencycorrection.
Figure 182: CM Analyzer

CM Rule Editor
CMRuleEditorisawebapplicationinNetActConfigurator.Itenablesoperationsto
createanddeleteuser-definedrulesinasimpleway.RulescanbeusedintheCM
Analyzerapplicationtocheckthenetworkconsistency.Youcanchooseadesirable
templatetypeandthenfollowthewizard.
Customrulesandrulesetscanbedefinedinxmlfilesandstoredinthefollowing
location:
$ETCROOT/custom/conf/rac/rules.
Makesurethatyouhaveaccesstothedirectory
$ETCROOT/custom/conf/rac/rules.
IntheCMAnalyzeruserinterfaceacustomrulelooksasfollows:<rulename>anda
customrulesetlooksasfollows:User.<rulesetname>.

309
Selecting a template type

Context
IntheCMRuleEditorstartpageyoucanselectapreferredtemplate.
Theruledeletionperformanceisdecreasedwhenanumberofuser-defined
rulesisgreaterthan1000.
Thestepstoselectatemplateisasfollows:
Figure 183: Procedure: Selecting a template type
Procedure
1 InaSearchfield,typearequiredphrasetonarrowthelistoftheavailable
templatesandthenclickonthetemplatename.
Information
Alternatively,fromthetemplateslist,selectthedesiredtemplatebyclickingon
thetemplate'sname.
Result of this step

ThetemplatedescriptionappearsintheRule templatedescriptionfieldandthe
Nextbuttonisenabled.
2 ClicktheNextbutton,tomovetothetemplateswizard.
Result
Youareredirectedtotheselectedtemplate.

Filling in the templates parameters

Tocreatearule,youneedtofollowthewizard.Eachtemplatehasdifferentwizard
stepstobeperformed.
Fieldsmarkedwitharedstarareobligatorytofillin.Youcanusehelperfor
thedrop-downlistfields.Youcanalsonarrowthescopeofthedrop-downlist
byenteringsomelettersinthetextfield.
InthecasethatthefirstobjectwhichyouselectedfromtheManaged object
orManaged object classcomboboxbelongstoanexternalRAT,therestof
thedisplayedobjectsbelongtothechosenRAT.
Figure 184: CM Rule Editor

311
CM Operations Manager
TheoverallfunctionoftheCMOperationsManageristotransferconfigurationdata
betweenplanningtools,NetActConfigurator,andthenetwork.Itprovidesbothreal-
timefeedbackandhistoryinformationontheoperations.CMOperationsManager
functionalityincludesthefollowingoperations:
Provisioningplanstothenetwork
Preparing,pre-activating,activating
Schedulingprovisioningoperations
Generatingandactivatingbackupplans
Uploadingactualconfiguration
Schedulinguploadoperations
Exportingactualconfigurationandplans
Managingplans
Creatinganddeletingplans,Importingandexportingnetworkplans,Comparing
planstoactualconfigurationandreportingthedifferences,Validatingplans
againstactualorreferenceconfiguration
Importingandexportingreferenceconfiguration
Managingtemplates:Deletingtemplates,Importingandexportingtemplates
VisualizingMMLcommandsforR4corenetwork
ExecutingMMLcommandsandMMLcommandfilesforR4corenetworkand
SGSNwithbuilt-incommandmanagertool.
Figure 185: CM Operations Manager

CM Reference
TheCMReferenceapplicationisusedformanagingthereferenceconfiguration.
WithCMReferenceyoucan,forexample
initializethereferenceconfiguration
generateandanalyzedeltas
committheneededchangesintheactualorreferenceconfiguration
DeltahandlinginCMReferenceinvolvesvarioussteps.Inthefirststage,youneed
toinitializethereferenceconfiguration.Afterthis,deltasaregeneratedfor
visualizingandanalyzing.Youcanselectthedeltasforacloseranalysisanddecide
onthenecessaryactionstocorrectthem.Thesecorrectiveactionsarecalled
alignments.
Updates can then be implemented either in the actual configuration or in the
reference configuration.
Figure 186: CM Reference

313
Flexible CM Search
Figure 187: Flexible CM Search
FlexibleCMSearchisaweb-basedapplicationforsearchingconfiguration
managementdataintheactualconfiguration.Inaddition,youcanalsoviewthedata
inCMEditoranduploadtheactualconfiguration.
Youcansearchdatabasedon:
Name
Distinguishedname
InstanceID
Cellidentification
HardwareSerialNumber
Managedobjectclass
FlexibleCMSearchisawebapplicationinNetActConfigurator.Youcanuseitfor
searchingGSM,WCDMAandLTEconfigurationmanagementdataintheactual
configuration.YoucanalsoviewthedatainCMEditoranduploadtheactual
configuration.
Somefunctionsmaybedisabledduetoyourlicenseorpermission.
Opening Flexible CM Search

1. LogintoNetActStartPage.
2. ClickConfigurationFlexible CM Search.
Flexible CM Searchopens.

CM History
CMHistoryisadiagnosticandanalytictoolwhichallowsyoutodisplayall
parametervaluechangesinaselectedscopeandtimeslot.Additionally,youcan
viewmanagedobjectconfigurationinagivenpointoftimeandseemanagedobject
hierarchyinnetworktopology.Moreover,youcancomparetheconfigurationof
eitheronenetworkelementortwonetworkelementsandseethedifferences
betweentheselectedpointsintime.Itisalsopossibletorestoretheselected
configurationchanges.
CMHistorydatarequiresaCMHistorytechnology-specificlicense.
Itisalsopossibletousethecommandlineinterfaceforinitializingandsynchronizing
theCMHistorydatabase,andforgeneratingchangereportintheconfigurationdata.
TheCMHistorydatabasecontainsinformationonallchangessuchascreation,
update,anddeletionofmanagedobjectthathavetakenplaceinthenetwork.The
followingconfigurationmanagementoperationscantriggerthesechanges:
UpdatesontheConfigurator'sactualdatabaseasaresultofexecutingnetwork
elementupload.
UpdatesoftheConfigurator'sactualdatabaseoriginatedfromCCNs
(ConfigurationChangeNotifications)receivedfromnetworkelement.
UpdatesoftheactualconfigurationperformedbyinternalCMservices,whichis
fortroubleshootingpurposes,suchasforexample,PostUpload.
Networkelementintegration.
Updatesofthereferenceconfigurationperformedbyinitializingormergingplans
ortheactualconfiguration.
Figure 188: CM History

315
Hardware Management functionality
Figure 189: Hardware Management functionality and benefits
TheHardwareManagementfunctionalityisdesignedtomanagehardware
equipmentinthenetwork.NetActHardwareManagementofferstheoperatoranup-
to-dateknowledgeoftheexistingnetworkhardwareequipmentusedintheservice
delivery.
HardwareManagementisdesignedtostoreandprovidehardwareresource
inventoryfromtheentiremanagednetwork.Theuserscaneasilysearchand
examinehardwaredatafromaremotelocation.Thesystemsavesthehardware
informationintheNetActdatabase,whichcanbeupdatedregularlyandviewedona
dailybasis.
ByusingtheCMOperationsManagerapplication,theusercanperformthe
followingoperationsforhardwaremanagement:
SynchronizeHardwareinformationandScheduleuploadofNEdatawith
NetAct:IncludedintheActualConfigurationUploadfunctionality.
ExportdatatoXML/CSVfile:IncludedintheActualConfigurationexport
functionality.
ByusingtheCMEditorapplication,theusercanperformthefollowingoperationsfor
hardwaremanagement:
BrowseHardwareinformation
SearchforinformationonaselectedHardwareunit

Figure 190: Hardware Information
Benefits of Hardware Management

HardwareManagementprovidesthefollowingbenefits:
BettervisibilityofHardwareinventory,whichtheneliminatesunnecessarysite
visits.
ReductionofdowntimeofasiteafterHardwarefailure.HardwareManagement
providesinformationonafaultyunit.
Anaccurateserialnumberdisplayfacilitatestrackingplug-inunitsaswellas
followingthewarrantyofrepairedunitsinmoredetail.
Boostofnetworkoperationandmaintenancethankstodataintegrity,accurate
knowledgeofnetworkcomponents,theirstatusandavailability.
Expeditionofnetworktroubleshootingactionsresultingfromtheawarenessof
theequipmentwhereabouts.
Reductionofoperationalcostsowingtofewersitevisitsandasmallernumberof
resourcesrequiredforupgrades.

317
Configurator Basic User Tasks

General Workflow
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthegeneraldataflow.
Figure 191: General Data Flow

Sychronize Network Data

Context
IntheUploaddialogyoucansychronizenetworkdataandscheduleanupload
operation.
Figure 192: CM Operations Manager: Sychronize Network Data
Performthefollowingstepstosychronizenetworkdata:

319
Figure 193: Procedure: Sychronize Network Data
Procedure
1 Fromanyview,clickUploadNew Upload
Result of this step

TheUploaddialogopens.
2 IntheUploaddialog,selectthetargetobjectsyouwanttouploadunderthe
tabs.Undereachtabthereisatreelistingthepossibleobjectsyoucanselect.
Result of this step

TheselectedobjectsareshownintheScope of Uploadpane.
Ifyoudonothavethecorrectlicense,someuploadoptionsare
disabled.

3 Selectadditionaloptionsfortheupload(specificfortheNEtype,forexample
HWupload).
4 IntheUpload Informationpane,enteranameoftheuploadoperation
(optional).
5 IntheUpload Informationpane,enteradescriptionoftheuploadoperation
(optional).
6 IntheUpload Informationpane,selectthelevelofinformationshowninthe
Feedbackdialog.
7 Tostarttheupload,clickStart.
8 Aconfirmationdialogopens.ClickYes.
Result
TheFeedbackdialogopensandthestatusoftheuploadoperationchangesto
Started.YoucanmonitortheprogressoftheoperationontheOperation History
tabortheFeedbackdialog.

321
Hardware Configuration Upload / Export

ForimportingthenetworkelementshardwareconfigurationtoNetAct,executethe
Operation"ActualConfigurationUpload"asdescribedinthecorrespondingprevious
section.Inthesameway,toexportthehardwareconfigurationexecute"Actual
ConfigurationExport"Task.
Figure 194: Single or bulk upload of HW configuration data bundled with CM

upload
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthestatusofhardwaresynchronization.
Figure 195: Hardware Synchronization Status
ThefollowingfigureillustratesthesingleorbulkexportofHWConfigurationdatato
XMLorCSV.

Figure 196: Single or Bulk Export of HW Configuration data to XML or CSV
Thefollowingfigureillustratestheintelligentfeatureactivation.
Figure 197: Intelligent Feature Activation

323
Viewing Actual Configuration

Context
Actualconfigurationcontainsactualvaluesfromthenetwork.Thesevaluescanbe
editedtochangeactualsinthenetworkortheycanbeusedasplannedvalues.
TheActualConfigurationnodecontainsallobjectsinthetopology,bothoperational
(actualobjects)andnon-operationalobjectsthatexistinthetopology.Youcanview
actualparametervaluesonlyfortheoperationalobjects.
TheMOclassesandtheirparentobjectsthatareselectedintheEditorView
areshownintheCMEditornavigationtree.
Figure 198: CM Editor: Display of Current Configuration
Openingmultipleplansatthesametimehasalwaysbeenavailable,butnow,
theyhavebeenorganizedintoatabularviewtohelpusersswitchbetween
andidentifywhichplantheyarecurrentlyworkingon.
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthetabsofcurrentconfiguration.

Figure 199: CM Editor: Display of Current Configuration - Tabs
Performthefollowingstepstoviewactualmanagedobjects:
Figure 200: Procedure: Viewing Actual Configuration
Procedure
1 SelectTarget ConfigurationActual Configuration.
2 ExpandtheActual Configurationnodeinthenavigationtree.
Result of this step

Alistofrootobjectsisshown.Theyaresortedalphabeticallyinascendingorder
basedonclassandobjectinstance.

325
3 Expandtherootobjects.
Information
Whenexpandingthemanagedobjects,thehierarchyisshownfirst.Thenames
ofthemanagedobjectsarefetchedseparatelyandaddedtothetreewhenthey
areavailable.
Result of this step

Alistofmanagedobjectsisshown.
4 Selecttheobjectsthatyouwanttoview.
Result
TheParameters by Actual Managed Objectviewopens.Hereyoucanseethe
valuesfortheactualmanagedobjectsinthenetwork.

CM Editor: View Filter

EditorViewdefineswhichparametersandmanagedobjectclassesareshownin
plans,intheactualandreferenceconfigurationandhowtheparametersare
grouped.
Thedefinitionsintheselectededitorviewaffectthenavigationtree,aswellas
parametersbymanagedobject,parametersbymanagedobjectclasses,parameters
byactualmanagedobjectandparametersbyreferencemanagedobjectviews.
Figure 201: CM Editor: View Filter Basic Parameters
Thefollowingfigureillustratestheadvancedparametersoftheviewfilter:
Figure 202: CM Editor: View Filter Advanced Parameters
Thefollowingfigureillustratestheobseleteparametersoftheviewfilter.

327
Figure 203: CM Editor: View Filter Obsolete Parameters

Managing Working Sets

Context
YoucanviewthelistofexistingworkingsetstousetheminNetActConfiguratoras
wellasviewthecontentofworkingsetstoseemanagedobjectsandtheircontent.
Youcanalsonavigatetorelatedobject(s)intheactualandreferenceconfiguration
andcopytheselectedmanagedobjectswithorwithouttheirparametervaluestoa
selectedopenplan.
Figure 204: CM Editor: Managing Working Sets
Performthefollowingstepstoviewthelistofexistingworkingsetsandmanage
workingsetcontent:
Figure 205: Procedure: Listing of existing working sets
Procedure
1 IntheCMEditormainwindow,clicktheWorking Setsmodeinthenavigation
tree.
Information
Ontherightsideofthewindow,theavailableworkingsetsarelistedinthe
Working Set Namepane,andthemanagedobjectsrelatedtotheseworking
setsarelistedintheAssigned Managed Objectspane.

329
2 Tonavigatetoarelatedmanagedobject,intheAssigned Managed Objects

paneselectoneormoremanagedobjectsandclicktheNavigate to MO(s)
button.
Result of this step

Thetargetconfigurationwiththeselectedcorrespondingmanagedobjectsis
opened.
3 Tocopytheselectedmanagedobjectstoanopenedplan,inthe
Assigned Managed ObjectspaneclicktheCopy MO(s) to planbutton.
Result of this step

Theselectedmanagedobject(s)arecopiedtotheselectedplan.

Selecting Working Set to be used as filter

Context
YoucanalsouseworkingsetsasafilterfortheCMEditornavigationtree.Youcan
filteractual,referenceandplannedconfigurationaccordingtoyourselectedoptions.
Managedobjectsofanincomingrelationshiptype,forexample,adjacencies,
mediatorsarenotfilteredoutbyworkingsets.
Workingsetsselectedasafilterpreventshowingplannedmanagedobjects
(objectswhosestatehasbeenchangedto:create,delete,modify)inthe
openedplans.
Figure 206: Procedure: Selecting Working Set to be used as filter
Procedure
1 IntheCMEditortree,clicktheWorking Setsmode.
2 ClickWorking Set(s)youareinterestedintoseethecontentofparticular
workingset(s)intheAssigned Managed Objectspane.

331
3 SelectWorking Set(s)youwanttouseforfilteringbyclickingthe
Filtering by Working Set(s)...buttonorright-clickingagivenworkingsetand
fromthecontextmenuselectingFilterbyWorkingSet(s)...orfromtheCMEditor
menubarselectingViewandfromthedropdownmenuselecting
Filter by Working Set(s)...orpressCtrl + Shift + W.
Information
Ifyouselectworkingset(s)inthetableyouwanttouseforfiltering,
youcanseetheircontent.Byselectingtheoption
Filter by Working Set(s)...fromthecontextmenuorusingthe
Filter by working Sets(s)...button,thechosenworkingset(s)are
preselectedintheFilter by Working Setsdialog.Youcanconfirm
theselectionorchangeit,ifneeded.
Result of this step

TheFilter by Working Setsdialogopenswithalistofavailableworkingsets.
4 SelectInclude childrentoseemanagedobjectswithalltheirchildobjects.
Result of this step

Theselectedfilteredworkingsetsareshowninthestatusbaratthebottomof
thewindow.Theactualconfigurationandplannodesshowmanagedobjects
basedonwhetheryouhavechosentheIncludechildrenoptionornotinthe
filteredworkingsets.
Additional information
Informationaboutyourselection:ChildrenincludedorChildrenexcludedisvisiblein
thestatusbar.

Adding managed objects to working set(s)

Context
YoucanaddthemanagedobjectsthatfulfillthedefinedcriteriaintheSearch and
Modify Target Configurationdialogtoaneworanalreadyexistingworkingsetby
clickingtheAdd to Working Set...button.
Youcanalsoselectoneormultiplemanagedobjectsintheactualconfigurationtree
orinaplan,regardlessoftheirstates(non-operationalobjectscanbealsoselected)
byrightclickingmanagedobjectand,fromthepop-upmenu,selectingAdd to
Working Set....
Ifyouwanttoreturntotheoriginalstatewhereallthemanagedobjectsarevisible,
right-clickagivenworkingset,fromthecontextmenuselectFilterbyWorking
Set(s)...,selectdesiredworkingset(s),clicktheFilter by Working Set(s)...button,
andfromtheFilter by Working Setsdialoguncheckagivenworkingset.
Alternatively,youcanselectWorking Setsnodefromthetreeview,selectagiven
workingset,clicktheFilter by Working Set(s)...buttonandfromtheFilter by
Working Setsdialoguncheckagivenworkingset.
Performthefollowingstepstoaddmanagedobjectstoworkingset(s):
Figure 207: Procedure: Adding managed objects to working set(s)
Procedure
1 IntheCMEditortreeintheactualconfigurationorintheplan,selectoneor
multiplemanagedobjects,rightclickoneofthemandfromthepop-upmenu,
selecttheAdd to Working Set...option.
Information
Alternatively,intheSearch and Modify Target Configurationdialog,clickthe
Add to Working Set...button.
Result of this step

TheAdd to Working Setdialogopens.
2 IntheNamefield,provideauniquenameforanewworkingsetyouwanttoadd
mangedobjectsto.
Information
Alternatively,selecttheAddtoexistingworkingsetsradiobox,andinthe
Working setnamepanel,selectcheckboxesoftheworkingset(s)youwantto
addmanagedobjectsto.YoucanusetheFilterfieldtofindadesiredworking
set.

333
3 ClickAdd.
Result
Theselectedmanagedobjectshavebeencreatedinanewworkingsetoraddedto
analreadyexistingone(s),dependingontheoptionyouhavechosen.

Creating working set from CM Query

Context
PerformthefollowingstepstocreateaworkingsetfromCMQuery:
Figure 208: Procedure: Creating working set from CM Query
Procedure
1 ClickCreate newintheWorkingSetspane.
Result of this step

TheCreateNewWorkingSetpaneopens.
2 SelecttheCM Querytab.
3 Entertheparametername,selecttheadaptationandMOclassfromthedrop-
downlist,andselectarequiredoperatorandvalue.
Information
Alternativey,youcancreatemoreadvancedqueriesbyselectingAndorOr
operatorsandtypinginthenextparametercriteria.
Youcanalsonarrowdownyourlist,byenteringanMOclassnameinthe
Include only certain managed object classesfield.
Result of this step

AndandOrradiobuttonsandanewinputfieldappears.IntheSaveWorking
Setpane,alistofmanagedobjectswithchosencriteriaisdisplayed.
4 Enteranameofthecreatedworkingsetandchooseeitherthe
Dynamic workingsetorStatic workingsetoptionintheSaveWorkingSet
pane.
5 ClickSave.
Result
AnewworkingsetbasedonCMQueryiscreated.

335
Modifying Parameters via Working Set

Context
Performthefollowingstepstomodifyparametersviaworkingset:
Figure 209: Procedure: Modifying Parameters via Working Set
Procedure
1 OpenWorking Set ManagerunderAdministrationcategoryandcreatea

workingsetfromCM Advanced Query.

2 InCM Editor,createaNew Planorselectanexistingplantoupdateyour

changes.
Information
WorkingSetsautomaticalypopulateintootherNetActtoolsoncecreated.

337
3 OpenthePlan.
a) Selectyourworkingset.
b) SelecttheManaged Objectsyouwanttomodifyparameterson
c) UseCtrl+Atoselectall.
a) PushtheCopy Managed Objects to Planbuttonlocatedontheright.
4 Selecttheplanyouwanttomodify.

5 GotoEdit,selectNew Search and Modify from Selection.
6 ClickonthelittlearrowlocatedbesideModify.

339
7 Modifyandconfirmwhichplanyouwanttoinsertchanges.
Information
Grayedoutparameterscannotbemodified.
a) PressthePut Modifications to Planbutton.
b) Analyzeandprovision.

Deleting Objects from the NetAct CM Database

Context
PerformthefollowingstepstodeletetheobjectsfromtheNetActCMdatabase.
Figure 210: Procedure: Deleting Objects from the NetAct CM Database
Procedure
1 InCM Operations Manager,clickToolsWorkflow Engine.
2 Inthedropdownlistlocatedontheleft,select
NE data deletion from Configurator.

341
3 InCM Editor,clickActual configurationandselecttheobjectyouwantto

delete.
a) RightclickandselectCopy.

4 Pastetheobjecttobedeletedintheleftpane.
a) PressthelittlegreenarrowjustbelowtomovetheMOtotherightpane.
b) Pressstarttocompletetheoperation.Thefinishedstatuscanbeviewedat
thetopofthepane.
Result

343
Additional Information
TheInterruptbuttononthebottomgraysoutasshownintheimage.
Ifthereareerrors,youcanusethisscreenorOperation Historytogetmore
information.

Figure 211: NE data deletion from Configurator: Operation History

345
Exporting Configuration
Context
Figure 212: CM Operations Manager: Actual Configuration Export and Import

Plan Data
Thefollowingstepsdescribestheexportingconfiguration.
Figure 213: Procedure: Exporting Configuration
Procedure
1 FromtheFilemenu,opentheExportdialog.
2 IntheScope of Exportpane,clickOptions.
Result of this step

TheExport Optionsdialogopens.

3 SelectActualorReferenceConfiguration.
a) FromtheExportdrop-downlist,selecteitherActual Configurationor
Reference Configuration.
Result of this step

Theplanisexportedonthetopofactualorreferenceconfiguration.
4 SelectExport format,Profile file,andParameters.
a) FromtheExport formatdrop-downlist,selecteitherRAML2.0orCSV
(comma-separatedvalues).
Information
IfyouhaveselectedRAML2.0,Profilefileisnotactive.
IfyouhaveselectedCSV,clickthe...buttonnexttotheProfile filefield.
Selecttheprofilethatyouwanttouse.Forinformationaboutprofilefiles,see
Working with profile files and CSV data filesinCSVInterfacefor
ConfigurationManagementDatainOperatingDocumentation.
Result of this step

Afileselectiondialogopens.
b) IntheExportpane,selecttheparametervaluesthatyouwanttouse.
Information
Internalvalues-Thesearevaluesusedinthedatabase.
Alternatively,UIvalues-Thesearethevaluesthatyoucanseeinother
applications(forexample,CMEditor).
Theselectedformatwillbeusedfortheexport,andforCSVexport,the
selectedprofilefileandparameterswillbeused.

347
Export / Import data with CM Editor

TheExport/ImportdatawithCMEditorisdescribedinthefollowingsections:
ToexportrelationshipplanusingCM EditorTable Editor.
ToimportrelationshipplanusingCM Editor.
Tointerrupttheimportoperation.

Exporting relationship plan using CM Editor - Table Editor

Context
Figure 214: CM Editor: Export Plan
PerformthefollowingstepstoexportrelationshipplanusingCM EditorTable
Editor.
Figure 215: Procedure: Exporting relationship plan using CM Editor

349
Procedure
1 IntheCMEditorapplication,openTable Editor.
Information
Forplannedmanagedobjectswithassignedtemplate,parameters
notchangeddirectlybyuser(whichvalueisinheritedonlyfrom
template)arenotexported.Exportedinfoaboutusedtemplateis
usedduringimporttoassignvaluestomanagedobjects.
2 IntheTable Editor,clicktheExportbutton.
Information
YoucanalsochoosetheExport relationship planoptioninCMEditorby
clickingthePlantab.
Result of this step

TheExport relationship plandialogopens.
3 IntheExport relationship plandialog,click....
4 IntheFile Namefield,typeanamefortheexportfile.
5 FromtheFilesofTypedrop-downlist,choosethe.csvfiletype.
6 ClickOK.
Information
Youcanalsoselectdifferentparametersbytickingthefollowingcheckboxes:
Includechildren
Exportsparametersofallthemanagedobjects'descendants.
Includeincomingadjacencies
Includesparametersofincomingadjacencies.
Includerelatedobjects
Exportsparametersofmanagedobjectswhichareinacloselogicalrelation.
Forexample:WBTSIPBR,IPBRWBTS,WCELRET,
RETWCEL,ADJSHOPS,HOPSADJS.
Includeallparametersdefinitions
exportsallparametersincludingparameterswithoutvalue.
7 CicktheStartbutton.
Result
Theexportfileisgenerated.TheProgressbarindicatestheprogressofthe
operationbothinpercentageandinnumberofthemanagedobjects.Whenthe
operationfinishes,theselectionsareavailableagain.

IfyouwanttoimportrelationshipplanexportedfromTable Editor,youneed
toperformitusingCMEditor.

351
Importing relationship plan using CM Editor

Context
PerformthefollowingstepstoimportrelationshipplanusingCMEditor:
Figure 216: Procedure: Importing relationship plan using CM Editor
Procedure
1 OpenCM Editor.
2 Inthenavigationtree,selectOpen Plansandchoosethedesiredplan.
3 ClickPlanImport Relationship Plan.
Information
YoucanalsoopentheImport Relationship Plandialogbyright-clickingthe
planinthelistandfromthepop-upmenuselectImport Relationship Plan.
4 Click...andchoosetheIPlancsvfilewhichyouwanttoimport.
5 ClicktheStartbutton.
Result
AftertheImportoperation,youcanseethenumberofobjectsinvolvedinerrorsand
warningsgeneratedbytheImportoperation.ThisinformationisvisibleintheImport
StatuspaneoftheImportdialog.Thecurrentsituationoftheoperationisindicated
inAction.WhenthefileisImported,youcanaccesstheImportlogwiththebuttons
intheImportStatuspane:Full Log...,Errors...,Warnings...

Displaying plans
Context
Whenyouopenaplan,itisshowninthenavigationtreeundertheOpened Plans
node.
Figure 217: CM Editor: Display of Plans
Performthefollowingstepstoopenaplan.
Procedure
1 ClickPlanOpen Plan.
Information
Alternatively,Right-clicktheOpened Plansnodeinthenavigationtreeand
selectOpen Planfromthepop-upmenu.
Alternatively,onthetoolbar,clicktheOpen Planicon.
Alternatively,trytoexpandtheOpened Plansnodewhenitdoesnotcontain
anyopenedplans.
TheOpenPlandialogopenscontainingalistofplansintheNetActConfigurator
database.Theplansaresortedalphabeticallyinascendingorderbasedonthe
planname.Thetablealsocontainstheplansyouhavealreadyopenedinthe
navigationtree.
Thetablecontainsthefollowinginformationoneachplan:
Plan
Owner
Created
Youcanfilterthelistedplansbyselectingthecheckboxontheleftandentering
thefiltercriteriaintheFilter Plans by field.

353
Mass parameter changes and plan creation

Thefollowingfigureillustratesthemassparameterchangesandplancreation.
Figure 218: CM Editor: Mass Parameter change and Plan Creation
Thefollowingfigureillustratestheviewofplandetails.
Figure 219: CM Editor Viewing Plan Details

Changing Mass Parameter

Context
Youcanmassmodifymanagedobjectsfromtheactualconfigurationbasedongiven
criteria.
TheModifyextensiononlyworksifthesearchreturnstheobjectsofoneobject
class.Ifthereareobjectsfromseveralobjectclasses,theModifyextensionwillnot
open.
Performthefollowingstepstomassmodifythemanagedobjects:
Figure 220: Procedure: Mass modify managed objects

355
Procedure
1 Searchforthecorrespondingmanagedobjectsfromthedatabase.
a) Whenyouwanttosearchthewholenetwork,Select
EditSearch and Modify Target Configuration...
Information
Alternatively,SelectSearch and Modify Target Configuration...fromthe
Managed Objectspop-upmenu.
Alternatively,SelectSearch and Modify Target Configuration...fromthe
Actual ConfigurationsorReference Configurations pop-upmenu
SelectSearch and Modify Target Configuration...fromapop-upmenuof
anyMOintheplanorintheactuals/referencetree.
ClicktheSearch and Modify Target Configurationicononthetoolbar.
b) FromtheNamedrop-downlist,selectthenameofthesearch.
Information
Youcanfilterthesearchesbyadding,forexample,abctotheNamefieldand
thenclickingEnter.
c) Ifneeded,editthesearchesintheQueryfield.Validatethechangestothe
syntaxbyclickingValidateSyntax.
d) EnteravaluefortherequiredparametersintotheParametertable.
Information
ThevaluesshouldbeenteredasUIvalues.Ashortdescriptionofthe
parameterisshowninthetooltipwhenyoumovethecursoroverthevalue
field.Thevaluefieldisshowninredifthevalueisnotvalid.
e) ClickCount Objectsifyouwanttoseehowmanymanagedobjectscanbe
foundwiththegivencriteria.
Information
Thecountisshownnexttothebuttonafteryouhavepressedit.Incasethe
counttakesalongtime,itcanbeinterruptedbyclickingStop.
f) ClickSearchtostartthesearchfortheMO(s)withthecriteriayouhave
given.
2 ClickModifytoopenthemassmodifyextensiontothe
Search and Modify Target Configurationdialog.

3 Enterthevaluesfortheparameterstobemodifiedintheparameterlist.
Information
TheparameterlistcontainsparametersforallversionsoftheselectedMO
class.Ifamodifiedobjectdoesnothavethegivenparameter,itisignored.
ValuesaregivenasUIvaluesandacellisshowninredifthevalueisnotvalid
foranyoftheversionsoftheMOclass.Incaseaparameterhasaninvalid
value,theCreate New Plan With Modificationsbuttonisalsodisabled.
4 ClickCreate New Plan With Modificationstoaddthegivenvaluesforthe

objectsfoundbythegivencriteriaintoanewplan.
Result
Aworkingdialogisshownuntiltheoperationisready,afterwhichaninformation
dialogisshowninformingyouofhowmanyobjectsweremodified.Anewplanis
createdwiththedefaultname,andtheplannodeisselectedfromthetree.Theplan
containsthemodifiedmanagedobjects.

357
Creating Plan
Context
Youcancreateanewplanbycreatinganemptyplanandaddingmodificationstoit.
Performthefollowingstepstocreateanewplan:
Figure 221: Procedure: Creating a new plan
Procedure
1 SelectPlanNew Plan...
Information
Alternatively,Inthetoolbar,clickNew Plan.
Alternatively,Right-clicktheOpened PlansnodeintheNavigationtreeand
selectNew Planfromthepop-upmenu.
Result of this step

Thenewplanisaddedtothenavigationtree.ThePlanHeaderviewisshownin
themainview.Theapplicationhasgivenanamefortheplan,butyoucan
modifytheplanname.
2 Typeinanewnameandadescriptionfortheplan.
3 Tosavethemodifiedinformation,clickUpdate.

4 Toaddmodificationstotheplanandtoseemanagedobjects,checkthatthe
ShowManagedObjectsinPlansoptionisselectedandexpandthenodesunder
theManagedObjectsnode.
Information
Youcanselectobjectsinthetreeandchangetheiroperation.
Forinstructions,seeChanging the managed object operation.Youcanalso
directlyeditmanagedobjectparameters.
5 Tocreatenewmanagedobjects,seeCreating new managed objectsintheplan

inOperatingDocumentation.
6 Tomodifytheparametervaluesofthemanagedobjects,seeEditing parameters
inOperatingDocumentation.

359
Checking Plans
Context
CMAnalyzerallowstheusertocheckradionetworkandcorenetworkparameters
andmanagedobjectstoensurethattheparametersaredefinedaccordingto
consistencyrulesandthatnoessentialinformationismissing.Theusercancheck
fordiscrepanciesintheactualandreferenceconfigurations.
Nokiaprovidesasetofbasicconsistencyrules.Theusercanalsocreateownrules
usinganexternaltextorXMLeditor.
Tocheckforerrorsandinconsistenciesinnetworkconfiguration,youneedtodefine
atargetforyourcheck,andselecttherule(s)againstwhichthetargetconfiguration
ischecked.
Figure 222: CM Analyzer Usage: Checking Plans
Performthefollowingstepstostartanewcheck:
Figure 223: Procedure: Checking Plans

Procedure
1 ClickCheckNew Check....
Information
Alternatively,inthetoolbar,clickNew Check.
Alternatively,intableofchecks,right-clickandselectNew Check...fromthe
pop-upmenu.
Result of this step

TheNew Checkdialogopens.
2 IntheCheck Namefield,enteranameforthecheck.
Information
Thisstepisoptional.
3 OntheRulestab,youcanselecttheindividualrulesandrulesetsthatyouwant
torun.SelectanitemfromtheListrulesbydrop-downlist.
Information
ThetreeinthepanebelowtheListrulesbydrop-downlistisorganized
accordingtotheselecteditem.
4 Toselectaruleoraruleset,checktheboxestotheleftoftheruleorrulesetsin
theupperpane.
Information
Youcanalsodraganddrop,orcopyandpasterulesfromtheupperpaneor
fromtheRulestabofthemainwindow.
Forinstructionsondraganddrop,seeUsing drag and dropinGenericHelp.
Forinstructionsoncopyingandpasting,seeCopying/cutting and pasting.You
canalsoclickontheruleorrulesettoselectitandthenright-clickandselect
Add to Selected Rulesfromthepop-upmenuorselectaruleandpressthe
Spacebar.Youcanalsodraganddrop,orcopyandpasterulesfromtheRules
tabofthemainwindow.Toselectseveralrulesatonce,presstheSHIFTkey
andselecttherulesofyourchoice.
Result of this step

Theywillautomaticallybedisplayedinthelowerpane.
5 Toremovearulefromthelowerpane,selectaruleandpresstheDeletekey.
Information
Alternatively,Right-clicktheselectedruleandselect
Remove From Selected Rulesfromthepop-upmenu.

361
6 OntheCheck Targettab,CheckTargetdrop-downmenu,selectthetarget
configurationforthecheck.
Information
Thetargetcanbe:
1. ActualConfiguration
2. PlanontopofActualConfiguration
3. ReferenceConfiguration
4. PlanontopofReferenceConfiguration
7 IfyouselectedPlan on top of Actual Configurationor

Plan on top of Reference Configuration,selectanameoranyuserfromthe
Showplansownedbydrop-downlist.
a) Selectoneplanfromthetable.
Information
AdescriptionfortheselectedplanisshownintheDescriptionofPlan(plan
name)paneatthebottomofthetab.
Alternatively,ifyouselectedActual Configurationor
Reference Configuration,markthedesiredcheckboxestodisplaythe
managedobjectsinthelowerpane.Youcanalsodraganddrop,orcopyand
pastethemanagedobjectstothelowerpane.Youcanalsodraganddrop,or
copyandpastetheobjects,forexample,fromCMEditororfromthe
Check Scopetabinthemainwindow.
8 OnthePost-Check Actionstab,youcansetCMAnalyzertoautomatically
correcttheinconsistenciesithasfound(iftherulessupportautocorrection).
Information
YoucanalsosetCMAnalyzertoautomaticallysende-mailmessagesaboutthe
checksithascompletedandautomaticallyincludecheckresultsinthesee-mail
messages.
9 ClickStart Check.
Result
Thedialogclosesandthecheckstarts.Thecheckwillappearinthetableofchecks
inthemainwindow,whereyoucanmonitoritsprogress.

Provisioning Plans
Context
Youcanprepareaplan,provisionaplan,scheduleaprovisionoperation,andcreate
abackupplanintheProvisiondialog.Theprovisioningoperationsare:Activate,
Pre-Activate,ActivatePre-ActivatedPlan,FallBackRNCRNW,Validate.
Planpreparationcanberunaspartoftheprovisioningoperationoritcanalsobe
runbeforeprovisioningasaseparateoperation.InthePlanslist,youcanseethe
preparationstatusforyourplan.Itisrecommendedthattheentireplanis
provisionedasoneoperation.
Figure 224: CM Operations Manager: Plan Provisioning 1/2
Performthefollowingstepstoprepareaplan:
Figure 225: Procedure: Preparing Plans

363
Procedure
1 InthePlanstab,selecttheplanyouwanttoprepare.
2 OpentheProvisiondialog.ClickPlanProvision...
Information
Alternatively,Right-clicktheplanandselectProvision...inthepop-upmenu.
Result of this step

TheProvisiondialogopens.
3 IntheProvisionpane,enteranoptionalnameanddescriptionforthe
provisioningoperation.
4 IntheOperationpaneoftheProvisiondialog,checkPrepare Planoperation
anduncheckProvisionoperation.
Information
Theprovisionoperationischeckedbydefault.Iftheplanhasnot
beenpreparedyet,theprepareplanoperationisalsocheckedby
default.
Result of this step

Aconfirmationdialogopens.
6 Intheconfirmationdialog,clickYes.
Information
Procedure: Provisioning plansisdescribedinthenexttopic.
Result
TheFeedbackdialogopensandthestatusoftheoperationchangestoStarted.You
canmonitortheprogressoftheoperationontheOperation Historytaborinthe
Feedbackdialog.

Procedure: Provisioning plans

Context
Figure 226: CM Operations Manager: Plan Provisioning 2/2
Performthefollowingstepstoprovisionplans:
Figure 227: Procedure: Provisioning plans
Procedure
1 OnthePlanstab,selecttheplanyouwanttoprovision.
2 OpentheProvisiondialog.ClickPlanProvision...
Information
Right-clicktheplanandselectProvision...inthepop-upmenu.
Result of this step

TheProvisiondialogopens.
3 IntheProvisionpane,enteranoptionalnameanddescriptionfortheprovision
operation.
4 IntheSchedulingpane,youcandefineaschedulefortheoperation.

365
5 IntheBackuppane,youcancreateabackupplanforyourplan.
Information
Byusingthebackupplan,youcanrollbackthenetworkchangesmadebyyour
originalplan.
Thebackupplanisalwayscreatedfortheentireplan.Thedefaultnameofthe
backupplanisderivedfromtheplanname:
<planname>_backup_<date>_<time>.Inthedefaultname,<date>isthecurrent
dateinyyyymmddformat,and<time>istheactivationtimeinhhmmformat.
AnotherbackupplanisautomaticallycreatedforaGSMplanwhenfile-based
provisioningisnotused.
6 IntheOperationpane,selecttheprovisioningoperationyouwanttorun.
7 Ifyouwanttoprovisiontheplanpartially,deselectEntire Planandselectthe
objectstobeincludedintheoperationfromeachtab.
Information
IntheScopepane,EntirePlanisselectedbydefault.
SelecttheUploadafteractivationcheckboxintheOptionspaneto
automaticallyuploadactualconfigurationfromnetworkafter
provisioningoperation.
Result of this step

Result
TheFeedbackdialogopensandthestatusoftheprovisionoperationchangesto
Started.YoucanmonitortheprogressoftheoperationontheOperation History
taborintheFeedbackdialog.

Comparing plans to actual configuration

Context
YoucancompareyourplanstotheactualconfigurationbyusingtheCompare
dialog.Youcanreviewradionetworkchangeplans,comparereportsand
configurationdatahistoryaswellasverifythatallplannedchangeswere
implementedcorrectly.
Figure 228: CM Operations Manager: Plan Actual Compare
Performthefollowingstepstocompareplanstoactualconfiguration:
Figure 229: Procedure: Comparing plans to actual configuration

367
Procedure
1 ClickPlanCompare.
Result of this step

TheComparedialogopens.
2 EnterthenameoftheoperationtotheNamefield(optional).
3 ChecktheGenerate Delta Plancheckbox(optional).
Information
Whenchecked,adeltaplanofthedifferencesbetweentheplanandactual
configurationwillbegenerated.Planwillcontaintheactualconfigurationvalues
ofthedifferences.Youcangiveanewnametothedeltaplan,oracceptthe
defaultnamethatisgivenintheNamefield.
4 SelectLevel of Feedback.
Information
ThepossiblevaluesareSummary,Object,orParameter.Thedefaultvalueis
Summary.
Summary
Givesashortsummaryinaformatofnumberofdifferencesfoundfromthe
planagainsttheactualconfiguration.
Object
Liststhemanagedobjectdifferencesandnumberofparameterdifferences
againsttheactualconfiguration.Onefeedbacksummarizesnon-existing
managedobjectsintheactualconfigurationorthenumberofdifferences
foundinparameterspermanagedobjectintheplanagainsttheactual
configuration.
Parameter
Givesfeedbackaboutnon-existingmanagedobjectsinactualconfiguration
andparameterswhosevaluesaredifferentintheplanagainsttheactual
configuration.
Result of this step

Result
TheFeedbackdialogopensandthestatusoftheoperationchangestoStarted.
YoucanmonitortheprogressoftheoperationontheOperation Historytaborthe
feedbackdialog.

Searching Managed Objects with Flexible CM Search
Figure 230: Flexible CM Search Operations: CM Upload from CM Search

Results
Youcansearchdatabasedon:
Name
Distinguishedname
InstanceID
Cellidentification
HardwareSerialNumber
Managedobjectclass
ThesearchingofmanagedobjectswithflexibleCMsearchisdescribedasfollows:
Searching data by distinguished name (DN)

YoucansearchmanagedobjectsbyDNorpartofaDN.Itisnotnecessaryto
includethePLMN-PLMNprefix.Forexample,
LNBTS-767/LNCEL-1
RNC-184/WBTS-174
WBTS-174/WCEL-1
BSC-74150/BCF-20/BTS-21
Searching data by instance ID

Searchcontroller-levelMRBTS,RNC,andBSCobjectsbyinstanceID.The
managedobjectclassandinstanceIDarerequired.Forexample,
RNC-123
BSC-123
Searching data by cell identification

SearchLTE,WCDMA,andGSMcellsbycellidentificationparameters,CI,andLAC,
whichmatchthenetworkparameters.

369
Table 14: Cell Identification parameters

Technology Object class Cell identification parameters
LTE LNCEL E-UTRANcellidentifier(eutraCelId)
WCDMA WCEL Cellidentifier(Cid)
GSM BTS CI(cellIdandLAC(locationAreaIdLAC)
Examples:
ci436737
ci=8lac=9
ci8lac9
Viewing details
Toseethenameandidentificationparametersofasearchresult,clickDetails.You
canseethefollowingparametersiftheyaredefinedintheactualconfiguration.
WCELidentification
WCELMCC/WCELMNC
Cid/Rncld
AdditionalparametersforWCEL
UARFCN
LAC/RAC
PriScrCode
earfcnDL,earfcnUL
phyCellId
tac
BTSidentification
cellId
locationAreaIdLAC,locationAreaIdMCC,locationAreaIdMNC
AdditionalparametersforBTS
rac
bsIdentityCodeBCC,bsIdentityCodeNCC
LNCELidentification
mcc,mnc
parentLNBTSID(title:MacroeNBidentifier)
lcrId
Opening search hits in CM Editor

YoucanopenthesearchhitsinCMEditor.YouneedtohaveCMEditoropentobe
abletoclickOpeninCMEditor...InCMEditor,themanagedobjectsinyoursearch
hitsareselectedintheactualconfigurationtree.

Operations with CM History

Thesectionscoveredinthefollowingtopics:
Generatingreportonparameterchanges
ViewinghistoricalconfigurationsnapshotsofNEs

371
Generating report on parameter changes

Context
TheTimelinetaballowsyoutosearchconfigurationchangesforaprovided
managedobjectDNinagiventimeslot.Thesearchscopecanbelimitedbya
desirededitorvieworbyaparticularchangecontextoption.Asaresult,yougeta
reportwithallthechangesmadeinthenetwork.Thisdatacanbeutilizedfor
searching,browsing,andanalyzingconfigurationchanges,which can help in
network troubleshooting.The results can be exported to a CSV fileforfurther
analysis.
Figure 231: CM History Operations: Generating Reports on Parameter

Changes
Performthefollowingstepstogeneratereportonparameterchanges:
Figure 232: Procedure: Generating Reports on Parameter Changes
Procedure
1 SelecttheTimelinetab.

2 Fromthedrop-downlist,selectascopeforthechanges.
Information
IfyouselecttheEntire networkoption,allnetworkconfigurationchangesare
displayed.YoucanalsoselectDNscontaining,andinthefieldnexttoityoucan
provideoneofthefollowing:
WholeDNofthemanagedobjectyouareinterestedin,andthenyouhave
onlyoneresultofthesearch.
ExactsegmentoftheDN,forexample,ANTL-1,whichshowsallMRBTSs
whichhaveANTL-1managedobject/
PartialDNwithasterisk,forexample,ifyoutype
MRBTS-1/LNBTS-1/LNCEL*,allLNCELmanagedobjectsunderthis
MRBTS-1/LNBTS-1withchildobjectsaredisplayed.
3 Fromthedrop-downlist,selectActual Configurationor
Reference Configuration.
4 FromthePastdrop-downlist,selectoneoftheoptionssuchas:24 hours,
7 daysor1 month.
Information
Youcanalsosettheexacttimeperiodbyclickingthesmallarrowsandselecting
thedatesfromthecalendarviews.Inthecalendar,clicktheNowbuttontoset
thecurrentdateandtime.
5 FromtheEditor Viewdrop-downlist,youcanselectadesirededitorviewto
limitthedisplayeddata.
6 ToupdatetheEditor Viewdrop-downlist,clicktheRefresh Editor Viewsicon

nexttoit.
Result of this step

AlltheeditorviewsvisibleinCM HistorywerecreatedinCMEditorandare
storedinthedatabase.
7 FromtheChange contextdrop-downlists,selectapairofvaluesyouare
interestedin.
Information
Change contextisadditionalinformationaboutchangesperformedonagiven
managedobject.
8 SelecttheInclude childrencheckboxtoseethechildrenoftheselected
managedobjectDN.
9 SelecttheShow only changescheckboxtoviewonlythemanagedobjects

whichcontainchangesforagivenDN.

373
10 ClicktheGenerate Reportbutton.
Information
IfyouhaveprovidedthewholeDNinthefield,thenthewholetreeisexpanded.
Iftherearefewsearchresults,thenonlythefirstlevelofmanagedobjectsis
shown.Duetotechnicallimitations,insomecasesitisnotpossibletoexpand
thewholetree.
Inthebracketsnexttothemanagedobjectslistedinthetree,therearea
numberofchangesonthisobjectanditschildrenperformedatdifferent
timestamps.
Expandthetreeasneededandselectoneormoremanagedobjects:
Inthetree,rightclickonamanagedobjectandfromthepop-upmenu
chooseSelectchildren.
Asaresult,allchangesoftheselectedmanagedobjectalongwiththe
changestoitschildobjectsareloadedintotheresultstable.Incaseofa
lackofvirtualmemoryonthesystem,resultsmaynotbedisplayed.Insuch
acase,narrowtheselectionscopebychoosingachildobjectunderthe
originallyselectedmanagedobject.
Alternatively,PresstheCtrlkeyandselectthedesiredmanagedobjects.
Asaresult,alltheirchangesareloadedintotheresultstable.
Alternatively,Inthetree,selectonemanagedobject.HolddowntheShift
keyandselectanadditionalmanagedobject.
Asaresult,allmanagedobjectsbetweentheselectedtwoareautomatically
selected.Onlyexpandedmanagedobjectswhicharevisibleinthetreeare
selected.Allchangesoftheselectedmanagedobjectsareloadedintothe
resultstable.Theirchildobjectsarenotloadedintotheresultstable.
Managedobject'sparametervaluechangesarepresentedinthetableon
therighthandsideofthewindow.
Result of this step

Ontheleftsideofthewindow,youcanseethenavigationtreewiththe
managedobjectshierarchymatchingtheearlierselectedsearchcriteria.
11 IntheCommentsfield,youcanprovideadditionalinformationontheselected
change.WhenyouclicktheSave commentbutton,thecommentforthe
selectedchangeissavedinthedatabase.
12 Underthemaintable,ontherighthandside,clicktheExportbuttontoexport
theresultstoaCSVfile.
Result of this step

Onlythechangesvisibleinthetableareexportedtoafile.Theexportedfilealso
containstheChange contextinformation.

Viewing historical configuration snapshots of NEs

Context
Thisfunctionalityallowsviewingahistoricalconfigurationsnapshotofanetwork
elementatagivenpointoftime.Youcandisplaytheconfigurationforbothactual
andreferenceconfiguration.Youcanselectasuitableeditorviewandincludeor
excludechildobjects.Asaresult,yougetaconfigurationsnapshotreportbasedon
yourselection.
TheView ConfigurationtablookandfeelisbasedonCMEditorandyoucansee
themanagedobjecthierarchyinthenavigationtree.Youcanviewparametersand
theirvaluesofaselectedmanagedobjectinaconfigurationsnapshotreport.
Additionally,youcanmanipulatethewaydataisdisplayedinageneratedreport
accordingtoyourpreferencesandfilterthereportcontent.
Figure 233: CM History Operations: Viewing Historical Configuration Snapshot

of NE
Performthefollowingstepstoviewhistoricalconfiguration:
Figure 234: Procedure: Viewing Historical Configuration Snapshot of NE

375
Procedure
1 OntheView Configurationtab,entertheentiremanagedobjectpath.
Information
ForexamplePLMN-PLMN/BSC-1/BCF-1,orexactsegment,forexample
BCF-1orBSC-1/BCF-1,intheDNcontainingfield.Usethe*(asterisk)
wildcardafterorbeforethemanagedobjectDNintheDNcontainingfieldto
searchforallmanagedobjectsconsistingofatypedstring.IfyoutypeBCF*,all
theBCFmanagedobjectswithchildobjectsaredisplayed.
2 DefinethetargetbyselectingeitherActual Configurationor
Reference ConfigurationintheTargetfield.
3 Definethedateandtimefortheselectedsnapshot.
4 Selectaneditorviewtolimitthecontentdisplayedintheconfigurationsnapshot
report.
a) IntheEditor Viewfieldclickthearrowontherightsideofthefieldandselect
adesiredview.
5 ClicktheRefresh Editor Viewsiconontherightsideoftheeditorviewfieldto

makesurethatthelatestchangesoneditorviewsareincluded.
Information
Ifyouwanttochangetheeditorview,youneedtopressthe
View Configurationbuttonafterchangingit.
6 ChecktheInclude childrencheckboxifyouwanttohavethechildobjects
includedanddisplayedintheconfigurationsnapshotreport.
Information
TheIncludechildrenoptionischeckedbydefault.Ifyouuncheckthisoption,
yougetthemanagedobject(s)definedintheDNcontainingfield.
Incaseofusingthe*(asterisk)wildcardafterthemanagedobjectDN,evenif
youunchecktheIncludechildrenoption,childobjectsareincludedinthe
configurationsnapshotreport.
7 ClickView Configuration.
Result of this step

Yougetaconfigurationsnapshotreportthatconsistsof:
Navigationtree
TableincludingtheParametercolumnwhichdisplaysallparametersandthe
Valuecolumnwhichshowsparametervalueswithintheselectedtargetand
timestamp
ParameterDescriptionpane

Lab exercise: HW Inventory Management

Context
Thissectionteststhestudentson:
EnsuringsynchronizationofNetActandtheNEs.
ExportoftheHWdata.
Figure 235: Lab exercise: HW Inventory Management
Procedure
1 PerformanuploadoftheNetworkElementsyouwanttosee.Ensuretoselect
theHWbuttonlocatedatthebottom.
Result of this step

Whyshouldweuploadbeforeanythingelse?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
2 FromCM operations manager,Performanexportactualconfigurationofthe

NEsyouneed.
Information
EnsureyouselecttheHWbuttonandunselecteverythingelsetoensureyou
onlygettheHWdata.
Result of this step

Whichtoolscanbeusedtoviewtheoutputofthiscommand?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________

377
Lab exercise: CM tools

Context
PerformthefollowingstepsforCMtools:
Figure 236: CM tools, 1/2
Figure 237: CM tools, 2/2
Procedure
1 Createanewplan.Modifyand/ordeletesomeobjectsinyourplan.
2 CreateanewWBTStoyourplan(underRNC-11).
a) AddWCELunderyourWBTS.
Information
Remembertofillallthemandatoryparameters.
b) CreateadditionaltwoWCELsunderyourWBTSbyusing
New MO from Selected MOfunctionality.
c) CreatenewSITEobjectandassignittoyourWBTS.

3 CreatenewANTE(antenna)objectunderANTC(Antennacollection).
a) CreatenewWCAL(WCDMACellAntennaLink)underyourANTE.
b) LinkyourWCALtooneofyourWCELs.
Information
EnterLinked Cell DNparameterfromWCALobjecttodothat.Youshould
nowbeabletoviewWCALasrelatedmanagedobjectunderyourWCEL.
Result of this step

Whatisthedifferencebetweendeletingandremovingobject?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
4 CreateyourownEditorview.
Information
Youcandecidethekindofviewyouwanttocreate.Forexample,viewfor
creating3GSites,WCELparameterretuningview.
5 CreateyourowntemplateforWBTSobject.
a) Createaplanbyusingyourowntemplate.
b) CreateanothertemplateforWCELbyusingvaluesof
PLMN-PLMN/WBTS-26/WCEL-261.
Information
Tocreatethetemplate,youhavetofirstcopyparametersfromactualto
(temporary)planandthenfromplantoactual.
c) CreateoneWCELunderyourWBTSbyusingthetemplateyoucreated.
6 MassmodifybyusingTableEditorandEditorViewcreatedinstep4.
7 UseSearchandModifytoselectallWCELsfromyouractualconfigurationand
createabackupplan.
8 UseSearchandModifytobuildasearchthatwillsearchallWCELsthathave
thecellidgreaterthan100andareHSDPAcapable.
Information
Savethesearchafteryouhavetestedit.

379
9 UseCM Analyzertoanalyzetheplanyoucreatedinstep1.
a) AddCreating_Sites_3Grulesettoyourcheck.
b) FixasmanyerrorsasyoucanwithCM Editorandkeepanalyzingyourplan.
10 UseCM Rule Editortocreaterulesofbothdifferenttypes(Compareand

Condition)andtestitwiththeCM Analyzer.
11 MakeActualdataexportwithCM Operations Managerofyouractual

configuration(SelectRNC-11and/orsomeMRBTSs)inRAMLformat.
12 ImportthedatayouexportedinthepreviousstepwithCM Operations Manager

asaplan.
a) ChecktheplanwiththeCM Editor.
13 CreateanewSITETemplateforeNodeB(useeNB26or27).
a) Inputnameanddescriptiontothetemplate.
b) OpenASC_template.xmlfilefromG:\driveinWarsawlabenvironment
andsaveitunderadifferentname.
c) EditthistemplatefilesothattheMRBTSsparameter
siteTemplateDescriptionismatchingthedescriptionthatyougaveto
yoursitetemplate.
d) FurthereditthetemplatefileandreplaceallXXXswithyour(unique)siteid
andsavethefile.
14 OpenworkflowenginefromCM Operationsmanagerandselect
Autoconfiguration eNodeBplanningworkflow.
a) Startexecutingtheworkflowwithyourowntemplate(nowaninitialplan).
b) ChecktheoutputofoperationsandchecktheplanfileintheCM Editor
betweenthesteps.
Result of this step

Whatdoesitcontainandhowdoesitchangeafterdifferentsteps?
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
15 ActivateautoidentificationfromworkflowengineandcheckifthePREBTS
objectwascreatedunderdedicatediOMS.

Optimizer
Optimizer Overview
NetActOptimizerisusedinthestatisticalnetwork-wideoptimizationprocessin
NetAct.Optimizerprovidesvisibilitytocurrentnetworkbehaviorbycombiningactual
GSM,WCDMAandLTEnetworkconfigurationparametersandmeasured
performancestatisticswithadvancedvisualizationandanalysisfunctionality.
Parameterscanbeoptimizedmanuallyforsmallchangesorautomaticallyby
choosingfromtherangeofoptimizationsolutionsprovidedbyOptimizer.Optimizer
canbeusedforasinglecellorforawholeregion,orevenacrossmultipleregions.
Theresultofoptimizationalgorithmscanbevisualizedonageographicalmap
beforedownloadingtheoptimizationplantothenetwork.Theplanwiththechanged
parametersissenttotheNetActConfiguratorwhereitisvalidatedandprovisioned
tothenetwork.
Optimizerusesstatisticalperformancemeasurementdata
Astheinputdataforalgorithmsisaccurate(measurementsofarealnetwork),
theoutputisalsomoreaccuratethanwithasignal-propagation-estimate-based
processinaplanningtool.
Usingmeasurementsmakesthetuningprocessfaster
Insteadofheavycalculationsbasedonrastermap-where,forexample,the
interferencematrixiscalculatedbyconsideringsignalstrengthsineachmap
pixel-amobilemeasurementreportisused.Whenthedataisprocessedin
Optimizer,onlysomeanalysisisneeded.
Increasedlevelofautomation
WithOptimizer,thewholeoptimizationcycleisfasterthanwithplanningtools.
AsOptimizerisimplementedintheNetActFramework,theactualconfiguration
dataandmeasurementreportsareavailableforprocessing.Thenetwork
topologyinOptimizerisalwaysconsistentwiththeactualnetworkdata.When
runningOptimizerforthefirsttime,somecustomizingisneeded,suchas
parametersneededtoguidethegenerationalgorithms.Oncetheparameters
areset,thenextoptimizationroundismoreeffortless.
SelfOrganizingNetworks(SON)solution
NetActOptimizerisakeycomponentintheNokiaSelfOrganizingNetworks
Suite.TheOptimizerforSONsolutionprovidescompleteelementlevel
optimizationforrealtimeSONfunctions.
TheOptimizersolutioniscomposedofbasicandoptionalfunctionalities.Thebasic
licensesforGSM,WCDMAandLTEinclude,forexample,visualizationbasedona
geographicalmapandmanualadjacencyandparametermanagement.The
followingfunctionalitiesareoptionalandrequireseparatelicenses:
GSMWCDMAautomatedadjacencyoptimization
GSMWCDMAperformanceoptimization
GSM-WCDMAcapacityanalysis
Calllocationanalysis
Antennatiltoptimization
OptimizationofintraLTEneighborrelations(adjacencyblacklisting)
Mobilityrobustnessoptimization
Multivendorsupport

381
Figure 238: Functionality Overview NetAct Optimizer
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheNetActoptimizerconcept.
Figure 239: NetAct Optimizer Concept

Optimizer main user interface
Figure 240: Optimizer : Main User Interface
Thefollowingfigureillustratestheefficientvisualizationandanalysis.
Figure 241: Optimizer: Efficient visualization and analysis
Thefollowingfigureillustratesseamlessmulti-vendornetworkoptimization.

383
Figure 242: Optimizer: Seamless multi-vendor network optimization
TheOptimizermainuserinterfaceconsistsofthefollowingpanes:theNavigator
pane,theMap/Toolpane,theBrowserpane,theScopespane,andtheCellGroups
pane.Thetoolviewsopenintothesepanes.Ifseveraltoolviewsopenintothesame
pane,eachtoolviewhasitsowntabthatyoucancloseifneeded.Themainuser
interfacealsocontainsthemainmenubarandthemaintoolbar.
TheavailabilityofatoolviewdependsonthepurchasedOptimizersoftwarelicense.
ThetoolviewscanbeaccessedfromtheToolsmenuofthemainmenubarorby
usingthepop-upmenusofNavigator,Browser,MaportheScopespane.
Thepracticaloptimizationandanalysisworkhappensalwaysinthecontextoftool
view(s)andwiththedefinedoptimizationscope(target).Theoptimizationscopeis
selectedfromthemainwindow,whichopensbydefaultwhenOptimizerisstarted.It
isthecoreworkspaceforobjectbrowsing,navigation,andmanualoptimization.
Eachtoolviewmayhavedifferentscopeselectedforoptimizationatthesametime.
Navigator pane
Bydefault,Navigatoropensintothispane.
Navigatoroffersfourtreeviewsthataresuitablefordifferentoptimizationpurposes:
theDefaultview,theHardwareTopologyview,theAdjacencyManagementview,
andtheCapacityManagementview.Forexample,youcanuseadifferenttreeview
presentationdependingonwhetheryouoptimizeadjacenciesorbrowseortune
objectsofthehardwaretopology.
Navigatorcontainsobjectsthatcanbeselectedforoptimizationandforcloser
viewingandmodifying.FromNavigator,theselectednetworkobjectscanalsobe
locatedonMapandlistedtoBrowser.
Right-clickinganobjectinNavigatoropensapop-upmenuthatallowsyouto,for
example,listelementstoBrowserorstartoptimizationtools.Thecontentsof
Navigatorspop-upmenudependontheviewthatiscurrentlyopeninNavigator,
whichobjecthasbeenselected,andwhatisthestatusoftheobject(actual,deleted,
modified,created).
Map/Tool pane
Bydefault,Mapopensintothispane.
Mapisusedtoshowthenetworkobjectsandrelatedconfigurationandperformance
data,andoptimizationresultsonageographical(scannedand/ordigital)map.Map
canalsobeusedformanualadjacencymanagement.

Cell Groups/Scopes
Bydefault,theScopestoolviewandtheCellGroupstoolviewopenintothispane.
IntheScopestoolview,youcancreate,modify,anddeletetailoredscopes.Youcan
usethetailoredscopeasastartingpointfordifferentoptimizationtools.Scopesare
alwaysglobal.
TheCellGroupstoolviewhelpsinvisualizingandmanagingcellgroups.Youcan
create,modify,delete,hide,unhideandrenamecellgroups,reverttodefaultcell
groupsandchangethegeneralityofthecellgroups.
Tobeabletomanagecellgroups(create,modify,andsoon)youneedeither
theOptimizerAdministratorroleortheOptimizerProvisioningUserrole
assignedtoyou.Otherthanadminuserscanonlyviewthecellgroupsas
wellascellgroupproperties.
ThecellgroupsarearrangedinaparticularorderbothintheCellGroups
paneandintheVisualizationpane,themostgeneralcellgroupbeinghighest
onthelistandtheleastgeneralcellgrouplowestonthelist.Thegenerality
ofthecellgroupscanbemodifiedusingtheMovecellgroupupandMove
cellgroupdowniconsintheCellGroupspanetoolbar.
Browser pane
Bydefault,BrowserandtheUseCasestoolviewopenintothispane.Notethat
BrowserisnotopenwhenOptimizerisstartedbutonlywhenanelementor
elementsarelistedtoBrowser.
InBrowser,youcanvisualizeCMorPMdataandanycombinationofCMandPM
data.WithBrowser,youcanbrowseandeditobjectsinatableview.Objectfiltering
andmasseditingaresupported.FromBrowser,youcanexportdatatoaCSV
(CommaSeparatedValues)file.Forinstructions,seeUsing the Find/Replace
functionality of BrowserandExporting data from BrowserinOptimizerHelp.
YoucanchangetheviewinBrowser.Youcanhiderowsbyusingfiltering,change
thecolumnorderbydragginganddroppingthem,andchangethecolumnstobe
displayedthrougheditingBrowserprofiles.Forinstructions,seeChanging the view
in BrowserinOptimizerHelp.
InBrowseryoucanviewandedittheparametervaluesofmultipleobjects.Youcan
sorttheobjectparametersinBrowserforthesessiononlyoronamorepermanent
basisbydefiningaprofile.Forinstructions,seeSorting objects in Browserin
OptimizerHelp.
WiththeBrowserprofilemanagementfunctionalityyoucancustomizetheviewof
theobjectparametersandtheobjectrelationsforyourownpurposes,oryoucan
shareyourprofileswithotherusers.TheBrowserprofilessupportobjecthierarchy
butarealwaysdeterminedaccordingtotheparentobject.Thelowerlevel(child)
objectscanbefreelyselected.Browserhasasetofdefaultprofiles(foreachobject
type)thatalluserscanalwaysusewhenOptimizerisopen.Formoreinformation,
seeManaging profiles in BrowserinOptimizerHelp.
Visualizations pane
ThispaneopensbyclickingtheVisualizationsiconontheMaptoolbar.The
VisualizationspaneallowsyoutodefinewhichobjectsarevisualizedonMapaswell
asqualityindicatorsfortheseobjects.Youcanalsomanagevisualizationprofilesin
thispane.

385
ThetabbedwindowsofOptimizer-forexampleMap,Browser,Key
PerformanceIndicators-canbeopenedinanewwindow.Todothis,right-
clickthetabandselectOpeninNewWindow.Thisfunctionalityisparticularly
usefulifyouhaveadual-screenmonitorinuse.

Summary: Configuration Management

Module Summary
management.
ExplaintheRadioOptimizationProcessinNetActandthemainfunctionalitiesof
Optimizer.

387
License management in NetAct

Module Objectives
DescribeNetActlicensingconcepts.
UseSoftwareAssetMonitoring.
NetAct licensing concepts

NetAct Licensing
TheNetActsystemassuchisdeliveredwithallthefunctions,calledtheNetAct
salesfeatures,thatareimplementedinaparticularrelease.Ontheotherhand,not
allfunctionsareavailableforuse.Youcanunlockthesefunctions,usinglicensekey
filesorderedfromNokia.Onlyavalidsoftwarelicenseallowsyoutousealicense-
basedapplication,service,solution,orfunction.Thisbehaviorisrelatedtothe
NetActsoftwareassetprotectionconceptwhichassumesthatalltheNetActsales
featuresareprotectedwithlicensekeysandwithouttheorderofproperlicense,the
NetActsoftwareisnotused.TheNetActsoftwareassetprotectionconcept
introduceslicenseprotectionfortheNetActfeatures,networkelementsintegration,
theNetActcapacity,theNetActsoftwarereleaseupgrade,aswellastermlicensing
model.
AsapartoftheNetActsoftwareassetprotectionconcept,NetActsoftwarerelease
upgrade,NetActhardlockandNetActlicensealarmsfunctionsareimplementedto
ensurepropersystemoperation,andlucidwayoftheNetActlicenseshandling.
LicenseManageristheapplicationthatisusedformanagingsoftwarelicensesin
NetAct.
SoftwareAssetMonitoringistheapplicationthatenablesmonitoringoftheNetAct
StandardSoftwarecapacityfeaturesforNetActRadio.
Figure 243: NetAct SW Licensing Overview
License keys
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthelicensekeys:

Figure 244: License types
NetActSalesFeaturesareprotectedwithLicenseKeys.Tounblockdesiredfeature
orfunctionyouneedtoorderandinstallaproperLicenseKey.
AllthelicensesareboundtoeachNetActinstancewithownTargetID,which
meanstheycannotbemovedbetweendifferentinstances.
NetActislicensedwithusingdifferenttypesoflicenses.Ingenerallicenses
canbedividedinto:
Termlicenses
Functionalandcapacitylicenses
Functional and capacity licenses

Thefunctionalandcapacitylicensesarecategorizedasfollows:
On/Offlicenses
On/Offlicensesenablefunctionsandpermittheuseoflicensedsoftware
functionalityforoneormorefeaturesorapplications.
Capacitylicenses
Capacitylicensesenablefunctionswithvolume/capacitylimitationbasedon
indicatorsagreedinthecontract.
Time based licensing notifications

Thefollowingfigureillustratesthetimebasedlicensingnotifications:

389
Figure 245: Time based licensing notifications

NetAct software asset protection

NetAct hard lock
Figure 246: Hard Lock mechanism
TheNetActsoftwareassetprotectionconceptincludestheNetActsoftwarerelease
upgradeprotection,theNetActhardlockprotection,andtheNetActalarms.
AsapartoftheNetActsoftwareassetprotectionconcept,NetActhardlockis
introduced.
NetActhardlockisassociatedwithvalidityofthelicensefileandaffectslicensed
featuresavailability.Hardlockistriggeredforlicensekeyswhichareexpiredorif
licensekeycapacityisexceededandresultsinturningfeaturesoffincaseofno
RTU(RightToUse).
Figure 247: NetAct capacity Standard SW: Concept
NetAct hard lock for capacity licenses

HardlockforNetActcapacitylicensesappliestotheNetActStandardsoftwaresales
features.Forcapacitylicenseshardlockisactivatedincaselicensedfeature
capacityiscrossed.Asaresultnewnetworkelementintegrationisblocked,aswell
asconfigurationmanagementfunctionality.
IftheSoftwareAssetMonitoringapplicationdetectsthatcapacityoftheNetAct
StandardSWlicenseisexceeded,criticalalarmisraisedandhardlockmechanism
startsafteronedaygraceperiod.Graceperiodlasts24hoursandallowsyouto

391
orderanewlicensekey.Otherwise,hardlockistriggered,andasaconsequence
newnetworkelementsintegrationisnotpossible.Whatismoreconfiguration
managementfunctions,likeuploadandprovisioning,donotwork.Toavoidhardlock
activationyouarenotifiedwithtwootheralarms,minorandmajor,withconfigurable
thresholdlimits.Itallowsyoutoorderanewlicensekeybeforehardlockactivation
andwithnoharmtoNetActoperability.Thehardlockforcapacitylicensesis
releasedandrelatedalarmisclearedafterinstallationofnewvalidlicensewith
additionalcapacityorafterunintegrationofelement.
NetAct hard lock for NetAct term licenses
HardlockfortheNetActtermlicensesconcernsalltheNetActSalesFeatureswhich
areprotectedwithOn/OfforCapacitylicenses.Fortermlicenseshardlockis
triggeredincaselicensekeyenddateexpires,whichmeansiflicensevalidityperiod
ends.Withoutavalidlicensekey,theNetActlicensedfunctionisblockedfromusage
orlicensecapacityisdeducted.
NetAct Alarms
ThefigureillustratestheNetActalarms.
Figure 248: NetAct Alarms
TheNetActalarmsfunctionalityisdesignedtoinformyouaboutclosingtheNetAct
softwarelicensekeysvalidityenddate,aswellasexceedingtheNetActsoftware
licensescapacitythresholds.AlarmsarerelatedtotheNetActhardlockprotection
functionfortheNetActsoftwarelicenses.Thepurposeofalarmsfunctionisto
remindyouaboutneedoforderingnewlicenses,andtoprovideseamlesslyNetAct
systemwork.
TheNetActalarmsaredividedintotwogroups:
AlarmsforNetActcapacitylicenses
TheresponsibilityofexceedingcapacityalarmsbelongstotheSoftwareAsset
Monitoringapplication.SoftwareAssetMonitoringmonitorsandreportsused
capacityofsoftwarelicensesandincaseofcapacitythresholdsarecrossed,
respectivealarmisraisedandvisibleintheNetActMonitorapplication.
AlarmsforNetActtermlicenses
ForalarmingaboutNetActsoftwarelicenseswhichareabouttoexpire,the
LicenseManagerisresponsible.TheLicenseManagerhandlesvaliditydatesof
termlicensesandincaseofvaliditytimecomestotheend,userisinformedwith
severallevelsofalarmswhichareshownintheNetActMonitorapplication.

Licenses for OEM software

ThefigureillustratestheOEMSWlicenses:
Figure 249: OEM SW licenses

ThenewLicenseManagementModelinNetActissplitintwoareas:
ThetraditionalmanagementoflicensekeyswiththeLicenseManagement
Application.TheMonitoringoftheusageoffeaturesforinvoicingaccordinglyasan
alternativeforthepaymentofafixedlicense.NetActLicenseManagerprovides
centralizedsolutionformanagingnetworkelementlicenses.However,inNetActthe
functionalityofLicenseManagerhasbeenextendedaswelltomanageNetAct
applicationslicenses.Alllicensekeymanagementoperationscanbeperformed
usingLicenseManager.SoftwareAssetMonitoringapplicationcollectsand
processestheconfigurationandmeasurementdatabasedoncustomerspecific
settings.Itgeneratesareportonthefeatureusageandforwardstheformatted
monitoringdatatothecustomerandNokiaCustomerTeamviaanencryptede-mail.
Theencryptede-mailcanbereadandvalidatedbyCustomerandNokiaCustomer
Teamonly.Thereportonthefeatureusageisusedtogenerateaninvoice.One
softwaremonitoringreportcomprisesinformationrelatedtooneNetActcluster.
SoftwareAssetMonitoringenablesspeedandefficiencywithfastsoftware
activationsthroughbypassingthepre-activationprocurementprocess,andapplying
alternativepricingmodelswhereinvoicingisbasedonnetworkconfigurationoron
usedfunctionality.ThisresultsinOPEXsavingsandinanincreasedflexibility.
MonitoringdataisConfigurationManagement(CM)parametersandPerformance
Management(PM)counters.SoftwareAssetMonitoringapplicationstoresthedata
forfurtherhandlingsuchaspre-processingtomakerawmonitoringdataismore
accurateandusable,forexample,datasizeisreducedanddataarepresentedin
moreconvenientwaytotheuser.Localstoringofdataisneededbeforeandafter
dataprocessing.Areportisperiodicallygeneratedbasedonmonitoringdataand
senttoNokiasidewherelateronitisusedforinvoicingpurposes.
TheMonitoringmodulesareproductspecificelements,whichallowanincorporation
ofspecificreportingmethods.Monitoringmodulesaredividedintotwogroups:PM
andCM,particularforeachnetworktechnology.

393
Figure 250: Monitoring as the alternative for license key management
Centralized License Server

SoftwareAssetMonitoringintroducessupportformonitoring-basedlicense
managementastheSoftwareEntitlementManager(SWEM).Monitoring-based
licensemanagementispartofanewlicenseprotectionconceptfornetwork-level
licensing.
Figure 251: Centralized License Server
MonitoringbasedlicensemanagementisapplicableforLTEandSingleRAN
technology.
Monitoringbasedlicensemanagementisamechanismthatenablesautomatic
monitoringoflicensedfeatureusageandlicensemanagementonthenetwork.The
newmechanisminvolvesSWEMthatmonitorsfeaturesusageandinterworkswith
CentralizedLicenseServertomanagelicensesonthenetwork.
InNetAct,anewlicenseprotectionconceptisintroducedfornetwork-levellicensing.
CentralizedLicenseServer(CLS)isanapplicationthatenablescentralized,semi-
automaticlicensemanagementinthewholenetwork.Licensemanagementtakes
placefromonecentralplace,CLS,formanyNetActRegionalClusters.CLS
reservesandreleasescapacityforaspecificfeaturebasedonanetworkelement

requestsentbySoftwareEntitlementManager(SWEM)andwithoutmanualwork.
Suchbehaviorensuresthatlicensingsmoothlyfollowschangesinnetwork
management.

395
License Manager to check licenses

License Management Overview
Figure 252: Managing License Keys Overview
Licensesareusedtoenablenewfeaturesorfunctionality.Forexample,youmay
neednewlicenseswhenyouwanttoupgradesoftwareorhardware,activatenew
services,addcapacityoroptimizeorexpandthenetwork.Licensesareordered
fromNokiaasanyotherfunctionality.Youmustthendistributethelicensetothe
networkelementsinordertomakethefeatureorfunctionalityavailableinthe
network.
License
Alicenseisanagreementfromtheownerofaproductthatgivespermissiontouse
orproducetheproductaccordingtotheagreedconditions.Theinformationthat
enablestheuseoflicensedsoftwareiscalledalicensekey.Nokiaimplements
licensekeysasNokia-specificlicensefiles.Eachlicensefilegivesthepermissionto
useoneorseveralfeaturesorfunctionalitiesinthespecifiednetworkelements.
Alicensefilecontainstheinformationtowhichnetworkelementthelicenseis
targeted.Thisisdonebyusingeachnetworkelement'suniqueidentifierwhichis
calledatargetidentifier.
Therearetwotypesoflicenses:
On/Offlicense
Capacitylicenses
NElicensesareinstalledtonetworkelementseitherusingtheLicenseManager
applicationorelementmanagers.
License Manager
TheLicenseManagerisaweb-basedapplication,whichisacentralizedsolutionfor
managinglicensefiles.

Figure 253: License Manager
Thegraphicaluserinterfacecanbeusedtoperformthefollowingoperations:
Figure 254: License Manager Features (1/2)
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthelicensefeatures:
Figure 255: License Manager Features (2/2)
YouneedtohavespecialpermissiontoperformoperationsusingLicense
Manager.
Licensing Concepts: NE Licensing

Networkelementlicensemanagementallowsyoutocontrolthenetworkelement
featurelicensesfromacentralizedlocation,takingintoaccountthenumberof
networkelementsinthenetworkandvarietyoflicensedfeatureswithinonenetwork
element.TheNElicensesareissuedforspecifictargetID.
Thenetworkelementstowhichyouwillusethelicenseshouldbeknownin
advance.Oncethelicenseisissuedforthespecifictarget,itisnotvalidforother
ones.NElicensesareinstalledtonetworkelementsusingeithertheLicense
Managerapplicationorelementmanagers.

397
NetworkelementslicenseconceptissupportedforAXC,BSC,CDS,FLEXINS,
HLR,MGW,MSC,RNC,SGSN,WBTSnetworkelements.
Thefollowingfigurebelowillustratesthenetworkelementlicenseconcept:
Figure 256: Licensing Concepts: NE Licensing

Licensing Concepts: Pool License

Poollicensescontainlicenseinformationforalargenumberofnetworkelementsof
thesametype.
TheyareusedforAXCs,WCDMABTSs,andFlexiDirectBTSs.Poollicensesare
specifictooneNetActclusterandtheycontaintheNetActTargetIDoftheNetAct
clustertowhichthepoollicensefileisdesignated.Theyalsocontainthesizeofthe
pool,whichisinterpreteddifferentlyforon/offlicensesandcapacitylicenses.
Foron/offlicenses
Thesizeofthepooldefinesthenumberofnetworkelements,whichare
permittedtousethefunctionality.Thismeansthatyoucancreatelicensesfor
thatnumberofnetworkelements.
Forcapacitylicenses
Thesizeofthepoolrepresentsthetotalamountofcapacity,whichcanbe
dividedbetweenthenetworkelements.Thismeansthatyoucangenerate
licenseswithdifferentamountsofcapacityforseveralnetworkelementsaslong
asthereiscapacityleftinthepool.
Inordertotakethelicenseintouseinthenetworkelements,alicensefileneedsto
begeneratedforthenetworkelementsfromthepoollicense.Thegeneratedfileis
calledanNMSgeneratedlicensefileanditcontainsthetargetidentifiersofthe
networkelements.Generatingalicensefromthepoollicensedecreasestheamount
offreecapacityinthepool.
Thefigureillustratesthepoollicenseconcept.
Figure 257: Licensing Concepts: License Pools

399
Licensing Concepts: License Sets

Licensesetsfunctionalityallowsdividingpoollicensesintogroupsandthen
assigningthem,bymeansoflicenseset,tochosenMaintenanceRegion(MR).This
conceptisusefulformanaginglicensesinmoreeffectivewayandgivesflexibilityof
managingpoollicenseconsumption.
Licensesetisanadvancedconfiguration,whichenablesturningfeatureson/off
duringautomatedlicensedistributionbyallocatingpoollicensestobeconsumedby
networkelementsrunningindedicatedmaintenanceregions.
Whenalicensebelongstoalicensesetwhichisassignedtosomemaintenance
region,itcanbeusedinautomaticlicensedistributiononlyifrequestednetwork
elementalsobelongstothismaintenanceregion.Inotherwords,networkelements
canonlyrequestlicensesassignedtothesamemaintenanceregion.
Whennetworkelementsendsarequesttogeneratealicenseforsomefeature,
LicenseManagercheckwhichmaintenanceregionthisNEbelongsto,andonly
useslicensesfromthepoolassignedtothatmaintenanceregion.
Alicensecannotbeassignedtwice,iflicenseisassignedtoonelicenseset,it
cannotbeusedagain.
Figure 258: Licensing Concepts: License Sets

License States
Thesectioncoverslicensestatesasfollows:
NetworkElementsandOSSGeneratedLicenses(NMSlicenses)
PoolandSWLicenses
Table 15: Network Elements and OSS Generated Licenses (NMS licenses)
License States Description
Distributed Thelicenseisdistributedtoitsnetworkelement.
NotDistributed Thelicensefilehasnotbeendistributedtothenetworkelement
whichisinthetargetidentifierlistoflicensefile.
Deleted Thelicensefilewhichwaspreviouslydistributedtoitsnetwork
element,hasbeenremovedfromthisnetworkelement.
Expired Thelicensevalidityperiodhasendedorthelicensesignature
certificatehasexpired.
Expiredstillin Thelicensefilehasbeendistributedtothenetworkelement,but
NE thevalidityperiodoflicensehasendedorthelicensesignature
NotIntegrated ThenetworkelementisnotintegratedtoNetActanymore.
Conflicting ThelicensefileintheNetActrepository,andthelicensefilein
theNEhavedifferentcontent.ForNElicensesthecorrect
licenseversionshouldbeidentified.
IncasethecorrectversionispresentintheNE,itshouldbe
reimportedtoNetAct.ForNMSlicenses,thelicenseshouldbe
deletedfromtheNE.IncasethecapacityisneededontheNE,
newcapacityshouldbedistributedfromvalidpoollicense.
Invalid Thelicensefileexistsinthenetworkelement,butitisnotused
bythenetworkelementbecausethenetworkelementdoesnot
acceptitorxmlfilehasbeencorrupted.
Table 16: Pool and SW Licenses

License Description
State
Valid ThelicensefilehasbeenacceptedbytheLicenseManager
application,whichmeansthelicensexmlfileandsignatureare
correct.
Expired Thelicensevalidityperiodhasendedorthelicensesignature
Invalid Thexmlfilehasbeencorruptedorthelicensefilehassignature,
signedwithatestcertificate,whichisnotaccepted.

401
Figure 259: NetAct Licenses
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthenetworkelementslicenses.
Figure 260: Network Elements Licenses

License Management Tasks

Licensemanagementtasksarecoveredinthefollowingsections:
LicenseImport
ViewingLicenses
UploadingLicenses
ExportingLicenses
DistributingLicenses
FeatureTemplates
NetworkElementAuditagainstFeatureTemplate
LicensePoolSubstitution
LicensesReports

403
License Import
Context
ImportoperationviewoftheLicenseManagerWebUImakesitpossibletointroduce
alicenseintothemanagementsysteminaveryeasyway.Importedlicensescanbe
totallynew,ornewversionsofalreadyexistinglicensesintheNetAct.
Individuallicensesor.ziparchivesofmultiplelicensescanbeimportedfromany
availablefolder.
Figure 261: License Import
PerformthefollowingstepstoimportlicensestoNetAct:
Figure 262: Procedure: License Import
Procedure
1 InthemainmenuclickLicenseandselectImport Licensefromthedrop-down
menu.

2 ClicktheUploadbuttonandbrowsethefolderwherethelicensefilesare
stored.
Information
TheLicensefilestableisrefreshedandshowsuploadedlicenses.Ifanylicense
isalreadyimported,itcontainsinformationaboutdateofpreviousimportinLast
importedcolumnandlabel,ifitwasassignedbeforetothislicense.Ifthe
uploadedlicenseexpiredorisfaulty,itdoesnotcontaincheckboxandcannot
beimported.Statuscolumninthetableprovidesdetailedinformationabout
licensefailure.
ToremovelicensesfromthetableclicktheClearbutton.
YoucanuploadlicensefileintheXMLformatoryoucanupload
multiple,archivedlicensesinthefollowingformats:zip,tgz,tar.gz.
Youcancheckthedetailedinformationaboutthelicensebyclicking
onthelicensefilename.
Result of this step

Theuploadoperationstartsandprogressbarappears.
3 Performthefollowingstepsforattachingalabeltothelicensefile.
a) Tocreateanewlabelandattachittoalicense(s),checkthelicense(s),click
theLabelsbuttonandselectCreatenew.Typeorpastenewlabelintotext
fieldandclickOK.
b) Toassignexistinglabeltothelicensefile,checkthelicense(s),clickthe
Labelsbuttonandselectanappropriatelabelfromthelist.
c) Toremovelabelfromthelicense,clicktheLabelsbuttonandselectRemove
currentfromthelist.
Information
Youcanattachthelabeltotheuploadedlicensefilesforaneasieridentification.
Youmustcreatealabel,beforeitisattachedtothelicensefile.
4 SelectlicensesyouwanttoimportandclicktheImportbutton.
Information
IfyoudonothaveLIC_ImportPermission,Importbuttonisdisabled.
Toseetheimportoperationdetails,followthelinkintonotification.TheRecent
Operationsviewappearswiththelatestoperationhighlighted.Inthetablebelow
therearelistedcertaintasksofselectedrequest.
SuccessfullyimportedlicensesareavailableintheLicenseKeyBrowserview.

405
Viewing Licenses
Context
YoucanbrowsealltypesoflicensesusingtheLicenseKeyBrowserview.Youcan
alsodownloadNElicensestonetworkelementsanddistributepoollicenses.
Figure 263: Viewing Imported Licenses and Licenses details
Performthefollowingstepsforviewinglicenses:
Figure 264: Procedure: Viewing Licenses
Procedure
1 InthemainmenuclickLicenseandselectLicense Key Browserfromthe

drop-downmenu.
Information
Youcanchooseatypeofdisplayedlicensesbyselectingappropriatetabinthe
License Key Browserview.
Ifyouhighlightalicensebyclickingonit,secondtableappearsbelowwith
informationaboutthelicensetarget.Youcanalsoclicklicensefilenametoget
thedetailedinformationaboutthelicense.
Result of this step

LicenseKeyBrowserviewappears.

2
Youcanfilterlicensesdisplayedinthetable.Tofilterlicenses,clickthe
button.
Information
Inordertobrowsetheinstalledlicenseeasier,youcanfilterouttheirrelevant
entries.Filtersettingsarememorizedforeachtab.Licensesinthefollowing
views:NetActSoftwareLicenses,NELicenses,PoolLicensesarefilteredby
licensetypeandthiscriterioncannotberemovedfromthefilteringcriteria.
Youcanfilterwhichlicensesareshown,accordingtothefollowingcriteria:
Targettype,FeatureCode,FeatureName,Label,Licensecode,Licensename,
Licensefile,Serialnumber,TargetID.
a) SelectacriterionfromFilterby:drop-downmenu.Youcanselectmultiple
criteriabyclickingtheAdd criterionicon.Toremovefilteringcriterion,click
theRemove criterionicon.
Information
Youcanmergethefilteringcriteriausing(OR)and(AND)operators.
Operator(OR)meansthatintheLicensekeystablealllicensesareshown
whichfulfillfirstorsecondcriterion.Ifyouselect(AND)operator,inthe
Licensekeystableonly,thelicenseswhichfulfillbothcriteriawillbeshown.
b) Youcandefinebycheckingthecheckboxes,ifexpiredlicensesand
downloadedtotheirallorfilteredtargetslicensesincaseofNElicenses,or
emptypool(capacityequalszero)incaseofpoollicenses,areshowninthe
LicenseKeystable.
c) ClicktheOKbuttontofilterlicensesintheLicensekeystableaccordingto
theselectedcriteria.
Result of this step

TheLicensekeystabledisplayslicensesaccordingtoselectedcriteria,which
arelistedabovethetable.
Information
Toclearfilteringcriteria,clickthe button.
Ifyoucheckedanexpiredoremptypool(remainingcapacityequals
zero)checkboxes,Clearfilterbuttondoesnotclearthischoice.If
youwanttouncheckthem,youmustdoitmanually.
TorefreshtheLicensekeysview,clickthe button.
Youcancheckthelicensedetailedinformationbyclickingthelicense
filename.
Result of this step

407
TheFilterdialogappears.
Edit the label of the license files

Youcanremovetheexistinglicenselabelorchangeit.Youcanalsoaddanewone
ifthelabeldoesnotexist.NMSgeneratedlicenseshavethesamelabelasthepool
license,itwasgeneratedfrom.
Toaddalabel,checkthelicense(s)andclicktheLabelsbutton.ThenselectCreate
newbuttonandtypeorpastenewlabelintoatextfieldandclickOK.
Toassignanexistinglabeltothelicensefile,checkthelicense(s),clicktheLabels
buttonandselectappropriatelabelfromthelist.
Toremovelabelfromthelicense,clicktheLabelsbuttonandselectRemove
current.
Exporting License Files
Youcanalsoexportlicensefilestothelocalworkstationbyclickingthe
Exportbutton.

Uploading Licenses
Thepurposeofuploadlicensestatusoperationistosynchronizethelatestlicense
andfeatureinformationfromthenetworkelementswiththeNetActdatabaseandto
keepLicenseManagerup-to-date.
Synchronizationisperformedbyuploadingthestatusofalllicensesfromthe
selectednetworkelements.
IncasetherearelicensesonnetworkelementswhicharenotpresentintheNetAct
database,theyareuploadedandaddedtotheNetActdatabase.
Youcanschedulelicenseinformationsynchronizationfordesirednetworkelements
ofparticulartype.
Figure 265: Uploading Licenses
Figure 266: Upload Licenses Scheduling

409
Exporting Licenses
Exportinglicenseisanoperationwhichallowsyoutodownloadlicensefiletoyour
localdrive.Youcandownloadonelicenseasa.xmlfileormultiplelicensesasa.zip
archive.
Figure 267: Export Licenses

Distributing Licenses
Distributinglicensefilesentailsdownloadingtheselectedlicensestothedesignated
networkelements.
Thefeaturescanthenbetakenintouseaccordingtothefeatureactivation
instructions.
Therearefollowingdistributionoptions:
NElicensedistributionisusedtodistributeNElicenses,andtoredistributeNMS
generatedlicenses.
PoollicensedistributionisusedtocreateanddistributeNMSgenerated
licenses.
Distributing NE licenses
NElicensedistributioninvolvesdownloadinglicensestonetworkelementsinoneor
multipleoperation.
NetActuserscandownloadanNElicense,oranNMSgeneratedlicensetoall
integratednetworkelementsmentionedinthelicensefileasasingleoperation.
Downloadcanbeexecutedinseveraloperationssothatonlysomeofthenetwork
elementsareselectedatatime.Ifnewtargetshavebeenaddedtothelicense,the
downloadoperationisneededonlyfortheaddedtargetnetworkelements.
Figure 268: License Distribution: Distributing NE licenses
Distributing Licenses from a Pool

Distributinglicensesfromapoolfunctionalityenablesmultiplepoollicense
distributiontomultiplenetworkelementsinoneoperation.
Whenalicensefromapoolisdistributed,networkelementspecificlicenses(NMS
generatedlicenses)arecreatedbytheLicenseManagerapplication.NMS
generatedlicensesarethenautomaticallydistributedtothenetworkelements.
Duringcapacityfeaturedistribution,theuserdefinestheamountofcapacityforeach
element.

411
Figure 269: License Distribution: Distributing Pool licenses 1/2
Figure 270: License Distribution: Distributing Pool licenses 2/2
Distributing Licenses Using Guided Distribution

Guideddistributionallowsyoutodistributemultiplelicenses,basedonafeature
template,tooneormultiplenetworkelements.
Duringguideddistributionoperation,licensesituationonnetworkelementis
comparedtotheoneinthefeaturetemplateandcapacityneededfordistributionis
calculatedandthensenttothenetworkelement.
Neededcapacityissummarizedfromremainingcapacityofdifferentpools.This
functionalityassuresthatnetworkelementswillreachfeaturetemplatedefinition.

Figure 271: License Distribution: Guided Distribution
Automatic Licenses Distribution

Automaticlicensedistributionfunctionalityallowstodistributelicensestonetwork
elementswithoutmanualoperationsandbasedonacertainconfiguration.
Mechanismofautomaticlicensedistributionprovidesthatlicensesautomatically
follownetworkconfiguration.
Automaticlicensedistributionisbasedonnetworkelementrequest.NErequestis
senttoaNetActsystemincasenetworkelementneedsnewlicenseorcapacity.
Theneededlicensesaregeneratedoutofavailablepoolandsenttothenetwork
elementautomatically.Forcapacitylicensesavailablepoolissummarizedfrom
remainingcapacityofdifferentpools.Deletedlicensescanalsobeconcernedasthe
availablepoolanddistributedautomatically,providedthatproperconfigurationfor
automaticlicensedistributionisset.
Availablepoolcanbedefinedbylicensesetsfunctionality.Duringautomaticlicense
distributionyoucanlimitapooloflicenseswhichcanbedistributed,byassigning
licensesettodesiredmaintenanceregion.
Figure 272: License Distribution: Automatic license key distribution 1/2

413
Figure 273: License Distribution: Automatic license key distribution 2/2

Feature Templates
Creatingfeaturetemplatesaretheoperationswhichallowyoutodefineasetof
featuresandtheircapacitydesiredonanetworkelement.Featuretemplates
conceptsareusedinguideddistributionoperationandduringauditingnetwork
elements.
Atemplatecanbedefinedbasedonexistingnetworkelementandasacustom
templatebyselectingfeaturesfromtheseavailableinapoollicenses.
Ifyougenerateatemplatefromanexistingnetworkelement,onlythe
distributedlicensesaretakenintoconsideration.
Allfeaturesandtheircapacityvalues,whicharedistributedtoanetwork
element,aregoingtobeincludedinthetemplate.Ifmultiplelicensesper
featureexistinthenetworkelement,theywillberepresentedinthetemplate
asasingleentryforthefeaturewithcapacityvaluewhichisequaltothesum
ofalllicensesforthefeature.
Bydefiningalabelinatemplate,youcannarrowdownthepoollicenses
whichwillbeusedintheguideddistribution.
Figure 274: Feature Templates 1/2
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthefeaturetemplate.
Figure 275: Feature Templates 2/2

415
Network Element Audit against Feature Template

LicenseManageroffersthepossibilitytoauditnetworkelementsagainstpreviously
definedfeaturetemplates.
Thisfunctionalitycomparesthelicensedfeaturesstatusofthenetworkelementwith
theonedefinedinafeaturetemplateandcheckifthenetworkelementshave
sufficientlicensesdistributed.
Thisoptionallowsusertoseeifnetworkelementstatusisinsufficient,equalor
exceedingagainsttothefeaturetemplateandtostartguideddistributiontoall
networkelementshavingtoolesslicenses.
Figure 276: Network Element Audit against Feature Template

License Pool Substitution

Thepoollicensesubstituteprocessallowsyoutoreplaceapoollicenseincaseyou
selectedawrongtargetinpoollicensedistributionorincaseofbrokenhardware.
Licensepoolsubstitutionprocessconsistofthreephases,registeringlicensesfor
poolsubstitution,exportinglicensepoolsubstitutionrequest,andimportinglicense
poolsubstitutepermission.
Ifyouhaveselectedawrongtargetinpoollicensedistribution,theonlywaytorevert
theallocationisbyapplyingthepoollicensesubstituteprocess.Theincorrect
licensecapacityisreleasedbacktothepool.Bydefault,thesubstitutionprocess
deletethesubstitutedlicensesfromthenetworkelement.
Figure 277: License Pool Substitution

417
Licenses Reports
YoucangeneratethefollowingreportsviathelicenseManagergraphicaluser
interface:
ReportonNetActsoftwarefeatures
Reportonoperationshistory
Reportonlicensefilesofnetworkelements
Reportonlicensesubstitutions
Reportonnetworkelementlicensefilesofgivenstate
Reportonlicensedfeaturesofnetworkelements
Reportonremainingcapacityinpoollicenses
Reportoncomparisonoftemplatestonetworkelement
Reportoncomparisonoftemplatestonetworkelementonfeaturelevel
ReportonNetActsoftwarefeatures
Thefollowinginformationisavailableinthisreport:Area,Featurename,Feature
code,Featuredescription,Salesitem,NetworkTechnology,Licensestate,Capacity,
Expirationdate.
Forallreportsyoucangenerateviagraphicaluserinterface,dataexporttoaCSV
filesisavailable.
Figure 278: License Reports
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthefeaturereports.

Figure 279: Feature Reports

419
Viewing Recent Operations

RecentoperationfunctionalityshowshistoryofoperationsperformedintheLicense
Managerapplicationandprovidesanoverviewofalloperationsperformedbythe
user,systemornetworkelement.Youareabletoseedetailedinformationabout
recentlyexecutedoperations,ongoingorfinished,withtheirstatusofcompletion.
Theoverviewofthefollowingoperationsareavailable:
Deletefromnetwork
Download
Featurestatechange
Guideddistribution
Import
Licensegenerationrequest
Licensestatechange
Pooldistribution
Substitution
Synchronizationrequest
TargetIdverification
Terminate
Uploadstatus
Figure 280: Viewing Recent Operations


Introduction to Software Asset Monitoring
Figure 281: Software Asset Monitoring
TheSoftwareAssetMonitoringapplicationcollectsandprocessestheconfiguration
andmeasurementdatabasedoncustomerspecificsettings.Itgeneratesareporton
thefeatureusageandforwardstheformattedmonitoringdatatothecustomerand
NokiaCustomerTeamviaanencryptede-mail.Theencryptede-mailcanberead
andvalidatedbyCustomerandNokiaCustomerTeamonly.Thereportonthe
featureusageisusedtogenerateaninvoice.Onesoftwaremonitoringreport
comprisesinformationrelatedtooneNetActcluster.
ForLTEandFlexiDirect,softwaremonitoringistheonlywayofusage
controlasLicenseKeysarenotimplementedforthesetechnologies.
Monitoringdataareconfigurationmanagement(CM)parametersandPerformance
Management(PM)counters.TheSoftwareAssetMonitoringapplicationstoresthe
dataforfurtherhandling,tomakerawmonitoringdatamoreaccurateandusable.A
reportisperiodicallygeneratedbasedonmonitoringdataandsenttoNokia,where
lateronitisusedforinvoicingpurposes.Monitoringmodulesareproductspecific
elements,whichallowanincorporationofspecificreportingmethods.Monitoring
modulesaredividedintotwogroups,PMandCM,particularforeachnetwork
technology.
Thefollowingmonitoringmodulesarecurrentlyavailable:

421
Table 17: Monitoring Module Types (1/3)

Monitoring Module Description
GSMCM MonitorsGSMconfigurationmanagementparameters.
IMSCM MonitorsIMSconfigurationmanagementparameters.
LTEFDDCM MonitorsLTEFDDconfigurationmanagement
parameters.
LTETDDCM MonitorsLTETDDconfigurationmanagement
parameters.
LTEFZCM MonitorsLTEFlexiZoneMicroconfiguration
managementparameters.
LTEFZCCM MonitorsLTEFlexiZoneControllerconfiguration
NetActRadio MonitorsNetActStandardSWconfiguration
NTHLRFECM MonitorsNTHLRFEconfigurationmanagement
parameters.
RACSCM Monitorsconfigurationmanagementparametersfrom
theRadioApplicationsCloudServers.
TheNetActRadiomonitoringmoduleisadefault,permanentmodulewhich
isnotconfigurable.

SRANCM MonitorsSingleRANconfigurationmanagement
parameters.
WCDMACM MonitorsWCDMAconfigurationmanagement
parameters.
FlexiNGPM MonitorsFlexiNGcounters.
FlexiNSPM MonitorsFlexiNScounters.
GSMPM MonitorsFlexiGSMcounters.
IMSPM MonitorsFlexiIMScounters.
LTEFDDPM MonitorsLTEFDDcounters.
LTETDDPM MonitorsLTETDDcounters.
LTEFZPM MonitorsLTEFlexiZoneMicrocounters.


LTEFZCPM MonitorsLTEFlexiZoneControllercounters.
NTHLRFEPM MonitorsNTHLRcounters.
One-EIRPM MonitorsOne-EIRcounters.
One-MNPPM MonitorsOne-MNPcounters.
One-NDSPM MonitorsOne-NDScounters.
OneTASPM MonitorsOneTAScounters.
WCDMAPM MonitorsWCDMAcounters.

423
Software Asset Monitoring Notifications

SoftwareAssetMonitoringsupportse-mailnotificationsandprovidesinformationfor
usersaboutgeneratingreports,aswellaswarnsusersaboutmisusingapplication
andcrossingcapacitythresholdsforfeatures.
E-mailnotificationsaresentrightafterreportgenerationincaseoneofthefollowing
eventsoccurs:
Summaryreport(monthlyorquarterly)hasbeengenerated.
Unauthorizedmodificationshavebeenmadetomonitoringdataorinformerly
generatedreport.
Featurethresholdvalue,setduringmodulecreation,hasbeenexceeded.
Notificationsareconfigurableglobally,aswellasforparticularfeatureduringmodule
creation.
SoftwareAssetMonitoringsupportsalsoalarmsforNetActsoftwarecapacity
licensesrelatedtoNetActhardlockprotectionforcapacitylicenses.
Figure 282: Notifications

Software Asset Monitoring Reports

ThepurposeofSoftwareAssetMonitoringistomonitorandreportfeaturesusage.
Asaresultofthisamonitoringreportiscreated.SoftwareAssetMonitoring
applicationallowstoviewreports,downloadreportsasCSVorXMLfile,andbackup
areportinformofrawmonitoringdata.
SoftwareAssetMonitoringapplicationcreatesfollowingtypesofreportsforCMand
PMbasedmonitoring:
Dailyreport
Itcontainsinformationaboutdailychangeoffeatures/countersusage.Incaseof
CMbasedmonitoringitcontainsfeatureparameterscollectedandreported
onceaday.IncaseofPMbasedmonitoringitcontainsinformationoncounters
whichhavebeencollectedduringadayandcountersvaluesarereportedfor
everyhour.
Periodicdetailedreport
Itcontainsinformationonfeatures/countersusageforeachdayofthewhole
invoicingperiod.IncaseofCMbasedmonitoringitassemblesfeatures/counters
dailyvalues.IncaseofPMbasedmonitoringitshowsresultswithaggregation
approachapplied.Reportingresultsarelistedforeachnetworkelement.
Periodicaggregatedreport
Periodicaggregatedreportshowsaggregatedfeatures/countersvaluesforthe
invoicingperiodbyapplyingthelogicasdefinedbySWAMparameters.Results
arelistedforeachnetworkelement.
Summaryreport
Summaryreportcontainssummaryvaluesforeachfeature/counterthatis
appliedforinvoicingduringtheinvoicingperiodforthededicatedNetActCluster.
InsummaryreportseverySalesItemislistedonlyonceasabasisforinvoicing.
Figure 283: Monitoring Reports
Thefollowingtablesshowtherowsandthecolumnswhichcanbevisibleinevery
Software Asset Monitoringreport.

425
Table 20: Monitoring Reports Content 1/3

Row Name Description Comment
Modulename Modulenamewhichisthe
samemodulenamethatis
createdduringmodule
creation.
Moduletype Representstechnologyfor
whichreportwascreatedand
indicateswhattypeofreportit
is,CM(configuration
management)orPM
(performancemanagement),
forexample:LTEFDDCM,
WCDMAPM.
Day/Period Itshowsforwhattimereport
wascreated.Incaseofdaily
reportsthereisaDay row,
which shows the exact day
forwhichreportwascreated.
Incaseofperiodicreports
thereisaPeriod row, which
shows the period of time for
whichreportwascreated.

Aggregation Thisrowinformsabouttypeof
aggregationwhichhasbeen
usedtocreateareport.
AvailableoptionsareOff,
NetAct Cluster,RNC,BSC,
Site.
Pricingmodel Typeofpricingmodelwhich ForCMreports
hasbeenusedtocreatea
report.
Nthhighestvalue NumberofNthhighestvalue ForPeriodicdetailed
usedforcalculation. report
SumupChannel Itshowsthewayinwhich ForWCDMAPM
Elementsuplink/downlink ChannelElementsuplinkand Dailyreport
downlinkvalueshavebeen
counted.


Processing Itshowsmethodofcalculating ForWCDMAPMreports
Sets processingsets.Availableoptions
are:Off,On,
Incremental capacity units.
HSxPA Showsunittakenintoaccountwhen ForWCDMAPMreports
Processing calculatingprocessingsets.Available usingProcessing Sets
Setstrigger optionsareUserand
User and Mbps.
ProcessingSet Itshowsifonlyprocessingset2is ForWCDMAPMreports
2only used. incaseof
Processing Sets = On
ProcessingSet Itshowstheweightofprocessingset ForWCDMAPMreports
3weightfactor 3comparetoprocessingset2. incaseofProcessing Set
2 only = No
TargetId IdentificationnumberofNetAct.
Customer Showsthecustomername
names
Excludeddays Showsperiodsexcludedfrom
monitoringscope.
Signature Hashvalueusedforcheckingthe
dataintegrity.

427
LTE and SRAN Licenses

LTE and SRAN License Management
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheLTEandSRANLicenseManagement.
Figure 284: LTE and SRAN License Management
Introduction to license management in LTE and Single RAN

FromNetAct16.2onwards,Nokiaintroducesanewsoftware(SW)license
management,whichisanevolutionofthemechanismcurrentlyexistinginWCDMA
RAN.Afteracustomersorder,SWLicenseKeyscanberetrievedbyNokiaCentral
LicensingSystem(CLicS),whichgeneratesSWLicenseKeys(LKs).TheLKshave
tobeuploadedtotheCentralizedSWLicenseServer(CLS).TheLKsareassigned
automaticallytotheSBTSs/LTEeNBsaccordingtotheusageofSWLKprotected
SalesItems.TheLKsarenotphysicallydownloadedtotheSBTSsandLTEeNBs.
TheyarekeptintheCLSfromwhereNetActSWEntitlementManager(SWEM)
assignedRightToUse(RTU)totheparticularNEs.ThereisoneCLSperthewhole
operatorsnetwork.TheCLScooperateswithSWEntitlementManagers(SWEMs)
inNetActRegionalClusters(NetActRCs).
Pool licenses in license management

PoollicensesareusedforSBTSsandeNBs.Allpoollicensesarestoredinthe
CLS.TheyareavailabletoallNetActRCsoftheoperatorsnetwork.
Poollicensesspecifythesizeofthepool.
Thesizeisinterpretedintwodifferentways:
On/Offlicenses
FortheOn/Offlicenses,thesizeofthepooldefinesthenumberofentities,for
examplenetworkelementsthatarepermittedtousethefunctionality.This
meansthatyoucancreatelicensesforaparticularnumberofentities.
Capacitylicenses
Forthecapacitylicenses,thesizeofthepoolrepresentsthetotalamountof
capacitythatcanbedividedamongnetworkelementsintheoperatorsnetwork.
ThismeansthattheCLScangrantordenyRight-To-Use(RTU)ofrequired
capacityavailableinthepool.

Components of the Single RAN SW License Management

NokiaintroducesthephysicalsoftwareLicenseKeys(SWLKs)conceptforthe
SBTSesinSingleRAN.Intheoperatorsnetworkthereisonenetwork-widepool
withinasingleCLS.ThepoolsoflicensesarenotsplitintotheNetActRCsasitwas
implementedforWCDMABTSes.
ThecomponentsoftheSingleRANSWLicenseManagementandtheirroles:
Figure 285: Single RAN SW License Management components
CentralLicensingSystem(CLicS)
TheClicSisanapplicationandinterfaceforcreatinganddeliveringSWlicense
keysthatNokiageneratesbasedonthecustomersorder.
CentralizedLicenseServer(CLS)
TheCLSisanapplicationthatprovidesacentralcontrolpointforgrantingor
denyingright-to-use(RTU)toNokiasoftware.ThereisoneCLSperawhole
customersnetwork.AllNetActClustersareconnectedtotheCLS.
NetActRegionalCluster(NetActRC)
TheNetActRCisaframeworkthatoffersaversatilenetworkandamobile
servicemanagementsolution.InSingleRANeachNetActRCrunsitsownSW
EntitlementManager(SWEM).
SoftwareEntitlementManager(SWEM)
TheSWEM,asacomponentofexistingSWAM,isasoftwarecomponent
locatedinaNetActRC.Itcontinuouslychecksconfigurationdataandcounter
informationprovidedbytheNetActRCforrelevantSalesItems(SIs).The
SWEMverifiestheactivationandthecapacityofStandard,High-value,and
Hardware(STD/HVF/HWA)features.TheSWEMcooperateswiththeCLSto
verifyifsufficientSWlicensecapacityexists.TheSWlicensekeysarenot
physicallyinstalledattheeNB.TheyarebookedintheCLSandSWEMasan
RTU.IncaseofmissingSWlicensecapacity,theSWEMgeneratesalimitation
commandtotherelatedSBTS.
SoftwareAssetMonitoring(SWAM)
Forthecustomerpurposes,theSWAMisaprocessofmonitoringthe
performancemanagement,chargingstatistics,andconfigurationmanagement
datathatisrelatedtosoftwareassetsinthecustomernetwork.TheSWEMand
theSWAMareusingthesamecalculationmethodsforcheckinglicenseusage.
Themonitoringhappensinthecustomernetwork,butitiscontrolledand
invoicedbyNokiaaccordingtothecustomercontract.
Migration from WBTS to SBTS

ThemigrationfromaWCDMABTS(WBTS)toanSingleRANBTS(SBTS)isa
simpleprocess.Thelicensecapacity,asrequiredforSBTSs,needstobeordered
andloadedtothepool.Afterstartup,accordingtotheconfigurationandusage,the

429
softwarelicensekeys(SWLKs)providecapacitywhichisautomaticallyallocated
fromthepool.Thepoolcapacityisreducedrespectively.Aftertheupgrade,theSW
LKsbecomeineffectiveastheyalreadyexistintheWBTS.Theydonotblockor
harmanything.Afterthemigration,theseSWLKscanberemovedwithoutany
impactonNEs.ForthenewSBTS,theSWLKsareintheCLS,whilstintheWBTS
theSWLKsarephysicallyinstalledontheNEs.Astheapproachesdifferinthe
WBTSandtheSBTS,nodirectmigrationispossible.
Figure 286: Before migrating WBTS to SBTS
ThefollowingfigureillustratestheafterstartupoftheBTS:
Figure 287: After startup of BTS
Planning and Ordering

Theprinciplesofplanningrequiredpoollicensesareasfollows:
TheSBTSHWneedstobedefinedforaninitialrolloutorforacapacity
upgrade.
TheSWfunctionalityneedstobedefinedandparametrized.
Theprocessoforderingrequiredlicensesisasfollows:
1. Networkplanningidentifiestheneedforacapacityupgradetoguaranteea
certainservice.
2. Theamountofrequiredcapacityisidentified.
3. Apurchaseorderforlicenseswiththerequiredcapacitiesisissued.
4. Nokiadeliversthelicensestakingrespectiveleadtimesintoaccount.
5. Thelicensesareimportedtothenetwork'sCLS.
6. Theoperationsdepartmentperformsthelicensedistributionsaccordingto
specifiedprocesses.

Summary: License management in NetAct

Module Summary
DescribeNetActLicensingconcepts.
UseSoftwareAssetmonitoring.

SoftwareManagement
431
Software Management
Module Objectives
reportingandimport.
Software Management
Software Management in NetAct
Configurationchangesareconstantlyneededtoevolvingnetworkstosecure,
maintain,orimprovetheservicelevelperceivedbytheendusers.Withthe
introductionofnewservices,networksareenhancedtomeethighdemandsofnew
generationconsumers.Theconfigurationchangestocomplexandlargenetworks
mustbewellplanned,documented,controlled,approved,andexecutedtoavoid
unplannedconflictsandsymptomsinthenetwork,whichmightcauseservicelevel
degradation.Softwaremanagementplayacentralroleinconfigurationchangesand
inthechangecontrolprocess.
Changerequestsincludingsoftwareupdatesinthenetworkcanoriginatefrom
varioussources,suchas:
Faultsincurrentsoftware,whichneedtobefixed
Changesinotherelements,whichcreatesaneedforcompatibilitychangesin
interfacingelements
Introductionofnewservices,andenhancementstoexistingones
Hardwarechangesinelements(forexample,capacityincrease)
Securitypatches
Endoflifeofproducts,causingsoftwarereplacements
Figure 288: Centralized software management 1/2
Thefollowingdescribesthemainfunctionalitiesandbenefitsofcentralizedsoftware
management.

Figure 289: Centralized Software Management 2/2

SoftwareManagement
433
Software Manager
SoftwareManagerallowsremotemanagementofsoftwareconfigurationsinnetwork
elements.Itallowstheusertouploadthesoftwareconfigurationinformationfrom
NEtoNokiaNetAct,downloadtheNEsoftwarefromNetActtoNE,importNESW,
andactivatetheNESW.Userscaneasilysearchandexaminesoftware
configurationdatafromaremotelocation.Thesystemsavesthesoftware
configurationinformationintheNetActdatabase,whichcanregularlybeupdated.
AnimportantfeatureofthisapplicationisalsothattheNEs'softwarecanbestored
totheNetActdiskandbedownloadedtothemanagedobjectsfromaremote
location.Allexecutedandongoingtaskscanbereviewedinthestatusview.
WithSoftwareManagerFunctionalities,theuserscan:
ViewthetaskandcorrespondingNEdetails
NetworkElementinformation
Latesttaskinformation
Softwaretree
Softwaredetails
UploadsoftwareconfigurationinformationfromNEtoNetAct
DownloadNEsoftwarefromNetActtoNE
ActivateNEsoftwareinnetworkelement
Comparenetworkelementssoftwareversions
Scheduletasksandmanageschedules
ManageSWpackagesincentralizedSoftwareArchive

Figure 290: Functionality in NetAct
Figure 291: Software Manager Tasks

SoftwareManagement
435
Software Manager Operations

TheSoftwareManageruserinterfaceconsistsoffollowingviews:
Figure 292: Operations
Network Status: Software

NetworkSoftwareStatusprovidesacentralizedsoftwareconfigurationregisterfor
thenetworkelementsoftwareofthemanagednetwork.
Network Operations
TheTasksviewisintendedformonitoringthestatusofthesoftwaremanagement
tasks.ThestatusoftheindividualoperationscanbeseenintheTasksmainview.
TheDetailstabincludesmoredetailedinformationofeachoperation.
Software Archive
SoftwareArchiveprovidesacentralizednetworkelementsoftwarestoragefor
networkelementreleasesandNetActchangedeliveries.Afterthesoftwareis
imported,thesoftwareisstoredintheNetActdisksinonedirectoryspecificper
networkelementtype.
Thefollowingsectionsarecoveredinthenexttopics:
SoftwareManagerGraphicalUserInterface
NetworkSoftwareStatus
ViewingDetailsofaManagedObject
UploadingsoftwareconfigurationinformationfromNEtoNetAct
NetworkOperations-Tasks
SoftwareArchive
Attaching/ViewingSoftwarePackage
ViewingCompatibleManagedObjects
ChangingstatusofsoftwarepackageinSoftwareArchive

Software Manager Graphical User Interface

Thefollowingfigureillustratesthegraphicaluserinterfaceoperations:
Figure 293: Operations: Graphical User Interface

SoftwareManagement
437
Network Software Status

NetworkSoftwareStatusimplementsacentralized,up-to-datesoftware
configurationstatusforthenetworkelementsoftwareofthemanagednetwork.
NetworkSoftwareStatusisespeciallyusefulintroubleshootingcasesandwhen
planningsoftwareinstallations.Thisisbecausethereisnolongerneedtouse
remoteMMLcommandsforviewingthesoftwareconfiguration,nortorecordthe
existingsoftwaremanuallyonspreadsheetdocuments.
NetworkSoftwareStatusprovidesthefollowingfunctionalities:
Viewthesoftwarestatus
Certainnetworkelementtypeinthewholenetwork.
Viewthesoftwareconfigurationofanetworkelement
Softwarebuilds,changedeliveries,changenotes,andfilesarelisted.
Uploadsoftwareconfigurationfromnetworkelement(s)
Youcanscheduleanuploadfromnetworkelement(s)totheSoftwareManager
atanytime.Itisalsopossibletodefinerepeatabletasks(daily,weekly,monthly).
UploadstatuscanbemonitoredinTaskstab.
Downloadsoftwaretonetworkelements
Youcanschedulesoftwaredownloadsothatthesystemautomatically
downloadssoftwaretothenetworkelementsasrequired.Downloadstatuscan
bemonitoredinTaskstab.
Activatecertainnetworkelements
Whenyoudownloadsoftwaretonetworkelements,youcansetthesoftwareto
beautomaticallyactivatedafterthedownload.ThisissupportedforMGW
networkelements.Youcanscheduletheactivationofdownloadednetwork
elementasrequired.ActivationstatuscanbemonitoredinTaskstab.
CompareSWstatusforselectedNEs
YoucancomparecurrentlyinstalledsoftwareforMSSandMGW(only)by
selectingthenetworkelementsandpressingCompareSWbutton.Youcanalso
usefilteringtoseeinwhichnetworkelementsaparticularCDsetisinstalled.
Searchnetworkelements
Youcanhavealistofthenetworkelementswhichfulfillthesearchcriteria.
Searchcanberunbasedonanysaveddatabaseinformation.
Managingownsets
Youcancreateownsetsofnetworkelements,exportfromandimportinto
SoftwareManager.Import/Exportfunctionalityallowsyoutouseothertools(for
exampleExcel)tomanagealistofnetworkelementstobedownloaded,
activated,oruploadedviaSoftwareManager.

Figure 294: Operations: Viewing Network Software Status

SoftwareManagement
439
Viewing Details of a Managed Object

Context
Thissectionallowsviewingdetailedinformationsuchassoftwareversion
informationortaskingrelatedinformationoftheselectednetworkelement.
Peformthefollowingstepsforviewingdetailsofamanagedobject:
Figure 295: Procedure: Viewing Details of a Managed Object
Procedure
1 SelecttheNetwork Statusview.
2 SelecttheSoftwaretab.
3 SelectParentfromViewdrop-downlist.
Information
YoucanalsochooseMaintenanceregionoption,toviewthenetworkdivided
intomaintenanceregions.
4 SelectmanagedobjecttypefromMOtypelist.

5 Selectparentmanagedobjectfromthelistlocatedontheleftsideofthe
window.
Information
IftheMaintenanceregionoptionwaschosenfromViewdrop-down
list,thenselectamaintenanceregioninthisstep.
6 Click (theShowNEDetailsicon)locatedontheleftofNEname.
Result of this step

Thedetailswindowappears.
YoucanviewdetailedinformationsuchasManagedObjectinformation,Latesttask
informationandSoftwaredetails.

SoftwareManagement
441
Uploading software configuration information from NE to NetAct

Context
Thissectiondescribeshowtouploadthesoftwareconfigurationinformationfrom
networkelementstoNetAct(synchronizeNEwithNetAct).Beforedownloadingand
activatingnewsoftwareinanynetworkelementitisnecessarytoknowtheprevious
configurationorsoftwareversioninformation.
IfataskisintheOngoingstateonaparticularnetworkelement,thenyou
cannotcreateanewtaskonthesamenetworkelementtoberun
immediately.Ifyoutrytocreatesuchatask,thenanerrormessageis
displayed.
Figure 296: Operations: Uploading SW Configuration
Performthefollowingstepstouploadthesoftwareconfiguration:
Figure 297: Procedure: Uploading software configuration information from NE

to NetAct
Procedure
1 SelectSoftwarefromtheNetwork Statusmenubar.

2 SelectParentfromView drop-downlist.
Information
YoucanalsochooseMaintenanceregionoption,toviewthenetworkdivided
intomaintenanceregions.
3 SelectmanagedobjecttypefromtheMO typelist.
4 Selectparentmanagedobjectfromthelistlocatedontheleftsideofthe
window.
Information
IftheMaintenanceregionoptionwaschosenfromViewdrop-downlist,then
selectamaintenanceregioninthisstep.
5 Selectthenetworkelementbyclickingthecheckboxplacedattheextremeleft
intheNetwork Elementstable.
6 ClickNew Task...button.
Result of this step

New Taskwizardappears.
7 Instep1ofthewizardselectSoftware UploadfromTask Typedrop-downlist

andclickNext.
Information
Youcanalsodothefollowing:
FillintheTask namefield.DefaultvalueisMOname.
WriteadescriptionofthetaskinTask descriptionfield.
Clicktheicontodisplayoperationdescriptionandthedefault
timeout.

SoftwareManagement
443
8 Instep2,decidewhentostartthetaskfromthefollowinginformation.
Information
IfFrequencyissettoImmediately,thetaskwillbestartedwhenthewizard
iscompleted.
IfFrequencyissettoOnce,filltheStartdatefield.
IfFrequencyissettoPeriodically,fillallfieldstoschedulethenumberof
taskexecutions.
ChoosethemethodofstartingtasksandclickNext.
Parallel-tasksonselectednetworkelementsarestartedsimultaneously.
Sequence-tasksonselectednetworkelementsarestartedsequentially.
CheckingtheInterruptonfailurecheckboxcausescancelingtasksbythe
systemiftheprevioustaskinthesequencefailed.
IftheInterruptonfailurecheckboxisnotchecked,systemretriesrunningtask
onthenetworkelementonwhichthetaskcouldnotbedoneatthefirsttime
becausetheothertaskwasintheOngoingstateonthatparticularnetwork
element.
Tasksingroup-determinesthenumberoftasksthatcanbestarted
simultaneously.
9 Instep3clickFinishtocreateSoftware Uploadtask.
Information
Inthisstepyoucanseethesummaryofthecreatedtask.Youcanalsocorrect
taskdatabyclickingthePreviousbuttonorclosethewizardwithoutcreatinga
newtaskbyclickingtheCancelbutton.
Result of this step

Aftercompletingallthesteps,anewSoftware Uploadtaskiscreated.
Stepsfrom6to9canbesubstitutedbypressingtheSynchronizebuttonthatalso
causesthatanewSoftware Uploadtaskiscreatedandcanbeseenfromthe
NetworkOperationsviewsTaskstab.
Iftherearemorethan250NEsselectedforatask,theyarenotviewedby
default.Ifyouwanttoviewthemall,clicktheavailablelink.
InthemainviewintheStatuscolumn,acurrentstatusoftheSoftwareUpload
(synchronization)operationisdisplayed.Ifyouhavefailedstatusyoucanclickthe
statustoseefurtherinformationonthefaileduploadsintheStatuscolumn.
Ifyouhavecompletedthestepssuccessfully,theNetworks Elementsare
synchronizedwithNetAct.

Network Operations- Tasks

Context
ForaselectedNEtype,youcanviewscheduled,ongoingandexecutedtasks.
Figure 298: Operations: Tasks
Performthefollowingstepsforviewingscheduled,ongoingandexecutedtasks.
Figure 299: Procedure: Network Operations- Tasks
Procedure
1 SelecttheNetwork Operationsview.
2 SelecttheTaskstab.

SoftwareManagement
445
3 SelecttheNEtypefromtheMO typedrop-downlist.
Information
Alltasksforselectedmanagedobjecttypearedisplayedinataskstableand
automaticallysorteddescendingbyStartdate.
4 ClickonStarted/Finishedtimeboxor(thecalendaricon)tosetthetimerangeof
displayedtasks.
Result of this step

Thepop-upcalendarappears,whereyoucanselectthedateandenterthe
hour.
5 SubmitchangesbyclickingtheApplybutton.
Information
Youcansortthedatainthetablebythecontentineachcolumn.
Sortinginthefollowingcolumns:MODN,MOname,Finished,
alternatestheorderofsubtasksinthesinglegroup.Sortinginthe
followingcolumns:TaskName,TaskType,Createdon,Startdate,
Creatoralternatestaskgroupsorder.
Result of this step

Thelistoftasksisupdatedaccordinglytoselectedtimerange.
Youcanviewallthetasksforselectednetworkelementtypeandtimerange.
6 Clicktheicontoexpandthetaskgroupontosingletasks.
7 FollowthelinkintheStatuscolumntoshowthedetailsofsingletask.

Software Archive
TheSoftwareArchivetaballowsmanagingsoftwarepackages,whicharealready
storedinSoftwareArchive.Youcanexaminethedetailsofasinglesoftware
package,seethelistofmanagedobjectscompatiblewiththebrowsedsoftware
packageanddownloadthepackagetocompatiblenetworkelements.Formanaged
objectsforwhichmultipackagemanagementisdefined,youcancreateavirtual
package,whichcombinephysicalsoftwarepackagesstoredinSoftwareArchiveinto
onevirtualsoftware.
TheoperationsavailableforSoftwareArchiveare:
Importsoftwaretothearchive
FortheselectedMOtype,theusercanimportsoftwarefromaCD,fromthe
workstation,orfromNetActdirectoryintothesoftwarearchiveandstorethemin
SoftwareArchive.TheimportSWoperationisexecutedwiththeSWImport
Managerjavaapplication.
Browseandviewarchivedsoftware
Youcanhaveaviewofthesoftwarestoredinthesoftwarearchive.
Removearchivedsoftware
Youcanremovesoftwarestoredinthesoftwarearchive.
Renamearchivedsoftware
Youcanrenamesoftwarestoredinthesoftwarearchive.
Change
Changetheinternallifecycleofsoftwarebuildstatus.
Declaredifferentstatuses
Declaredifferentstatusesforsoftwarebuildsaccordingtooperator-internal
businessprocess.
Additionally,theinformationabouttheSoftwareArchivecurrentdiskspacedivided
intodiskusageandavailablefreespaceisincludedintheupperrightcornerofthe
SoftwareArchivetab.
Figure 300: Operations: Software Archive
Thefollowingfigureillustratesthesoftwareimportmanageroperations:

SoftwareManagement
447
Figure 301: Operations: SW archive - Import manager

Attaching / Viewing Software Package Documentation

Context
IntheSoftwareArchivetabyoucanalsoattachadditionaldocumentationtothe
softwarepackages,bothforphysicalsoftwarepackagesandvirtualones.In
particular,fornetworkelementswhichrequireadditionalinstallationscriptsforsome
operations,youcanattachinstallationscriptstotheregularsoftwarepackages.
Documentationcanbeattachedonlytosoftwarepackagesthatarelocated
inSoftwareManagerrepository,bothforpackagesfromLocalrepositoryand
virtualpackages.
Figure 302: Operations: View / Attach Software package release

documentation
Performthefollowingstepstoattachdocumentationtothesoftwarepackages.
Figure 303: Procedure: Attaching / Viewing Software Package Documentation
Procedure
1 SelecttheSoftware Archivetab.
2 FromtheMOtypedrop-downlist,selectthemanagedobjecttypeorsubtype.

SoftwareManagement
449
3 Fromthelistlocatedontheleftsideofthewindow,selectapackagename
underadesiredreleasefolder.
Result of this step

Theselectedsoftwarepackageishighlightedwithbluecolor.
ThesoftwarepackageinformationispopulatedintheSummarytab.
4 ClicktheDocumentationtab.
5 ClicktheAttach...button.
Result of this step

TheAttachDocumentationtoSoftwarePackagedialogopens.
6 IntheAttach Documentation to Software Packagedialogclickthe

Attach file...button.
7 Byusingthefilechooser,selectthefileyouwanttoattachtothesoftware
package.
Information
ThemaximumfilesizeforimporttoSoftwareManageris25MB.
8 ClicktheOpenbutton.
Information
TheselectedfileisattachedtotheSoftwareArchive.Inthe
Attach Documentation to Software Packagedialog,youcanseetheprogress
messageoftheuploadedfile.
9 ClicktheClosebutton.
Information
Theselectedfileisaddedtothesoftwarepackage.IntheDocumentationtable
thereisinformationaboutfilesize.IntheActioncolumn,therearetwooptions
available.
Ifyouaddmorethanonefilewiththesamename,thenextfilesare
visibleintheDocumentationtableas<nameofthefile>_x.<file
extension>.
Where,
x-numbers{1,2,3,...}addedafterthefilenamedependingonthe
attachingfileswiththesamenameorder.
Example,Ifyouaddthreedocumentation.txtfilestheyarevisiblein
Documentationtableinthefollowingway:
documentation.txt
documentation_1.txt

Viewing Compatible Managed Objects

Context
Theconditionslistedbelowdeterminethesoftwarepackagecompatibility:
SoftwarepackageisassignedtothesameMOtype/subtypeandhasatleast
onecommonreleaseversion.
SoftwarepackageisassignedtothecommonMaintenanceRegionwhichis
definedbyLifecyclestatus.
Figure 304: Operations: View Compatible network elements for SW package

installation
Performthefollowingstepstoseethecompatiblemanagedobjects.
Figure 305: Procedure: Viewing Compatible Managed Objects
Prerequisites
Theprerequisiteforsearchingdatabaseagainstthecompatiblemanagedobjectis
thesupportoftheActiveSoftwareoperations,whichrequireasoftwarepackageas
aparameter(forexampleSoftwareDownload,SoftwareProvision).

SoftwareManagement
451
Procedure
3 Fromthenavigationtreelocatedontheleftsideofthewindow,selectapackage
nameunderadesiredreleasefolder.
Result of this step

4 ClicktheCompatible Managed Objectstabtoseeatablelistingmanaged

objectsthatarecompatiblewiththebrowsedsoftwarepackage.
Information
Thelistofcompatiblemanagedobjectstotheselectedvirtualpackageis
generatedbasedonthegivenvirtualpackageproperties(MOType,Release,
Lifecyclestatus).Inthatcase,thetargetdependenciesofphysicalsoftware
packagesformingthegivenvirtualpackagearenottakenintoaccount.
Result of this step

Allmanagedobjectsthatcanusetheselectedsoftwarepackagearelistedinthe
networkelementtable.
If,duringtheimportingofasoftwarepackagethemanagedobjectsubtypewas
defined,intheCompatibleManagedObjectsframeyoucanseethenetwork
elementtablefilteredbyMOtypeandsetMOsubtype.
IftheselectedMOtypedoesnotsupportthebackupoperations,thelastcolumn
showingthebackupinformationinthenetworkelementtablebecomeshidden.

Changing status of software package in Software Archive

Context
Figure 306: Operations: Setting Software package Lifecycle Status support

and software Quality Enforcement
TochangestatusofthesoftwarepackageintheSoftwareArchive,executethe
followingsteps:
Figure 307: Procedure: Changing status of software package in Software

Archive
Procedure

SoftwareManagement
453
3 Fromthelistlocatedontheleftsideofthewindow,selectapackagename
underadesiredreleasefolderbyclickingadesirednode.
Result of this step

ThesoftwarepackageinformationispopulatedintheSummarytab.
4 Clickchange status...linknexttotheLifecyclestatusattributeintheSummary
tab.
Result of this step

TheChangelifecyclestatusdialogopens.
5 Fromdrop-downlist,selectadesiredlifecyclestatus.
6 ClickOK.
Information
ClickSee historylinktoseethehistoryoflifecyclestatuschanges.Youcansee
maximum10previousstatusesinthelist.
Result of this step

TheLifecyclestatusisupdatedinSummarytab.

Network Element Backup

Network Elements Remote Backup from NetAct
Takingaregularbackupofthesoftwareanddatabasesofthenetworkelements
ensuresthatyouhaveafunctionalcopyofthesoftwarewhichyoucanuseifthere
areanyproblemwiththesoftwareorhardwareofthenetworkelement.Thisbackup
iscalledafallback.Howoftenyouneedtotakeafallbackdependsonvarious
factors.
Itisrecommendedtotakeafallbackbeforeandafterchangesinthesoftwareor
hardwareofanetworkelement.Makesurethatthenetworkelementworkswiththe
newsoftwareorhardwarebeforetakingafallbackafterthechanges.
Theprocedureofcreatingafallbackandstoringandcopyingthefallbackbuildofthe
networkelementdataremotelyfromaNetActServercomprisesthreemainphases:
1. Controllingafallbackofthenetworksoftwarebuild
Takeanautomaticfallbackofthenetworkelementsoftwarebuild.Thefallback
buildissavedonadiskinthenetworkelement.Thefallbackbuildmaycomprise
allfiles(fullfallback),datafiles(datafallback),oronlythechangedfiles(archive
fallback).
2. Copyingafallbackbuildintoanetworkelementlocalmedia
Therearetwooptionsavailableforcopyingafallbackbuildintoalocalmedia:
Youcancopythefallbackbuildfromthediskofthenetworkelementontoa
DDStapeinthenetworkelement.
Youcancopythefallbackbuildfromthediskofthenetworkelementontoa
magneticopticaldisk(MOD)inthenetworkelement.
3. CopyingafallbackbuildintothefallbackarchiveinNetAct
Youcancopythefallbackbuildfromthediskinthenetworkelementtoadiskin
NetAct(fallbackarchive)usingFTP.
Figure 308: NE Backup Support

SoftwareManagement
455
Network Elements Backup Archive

SoftwareManagersupportsFlexiPlatformbasedNetworkElements(OMS,mcRNC,
FlexiNG)datafilebackupfromNEtoNetAct.Datafilesarestoredinaglobaldiskin
NetAct.Thesizeofonefilemayexceed2GB,sotheglobaldiskspacecanbe
easilyconsumedafterseveralroundsofbackupoperations.Itisrecommendedto
estimatetheneededspaceforNEbackupsinordertohaveatleast30%ofthe
globaldiskfree.
Fillinguptheglobaldisktoitsmaximumcanendangerthecorrectoperations
ofthewholeNetActsystem.
InordertopreventdisturbancesinnormaloperationofNetAct,itispossible
tolinkthedefaultbackuprepositorytodifferentstoragelocation.Thedefault
solutionistoaddasharedstorageforNetActSoftwareManagerapplication
andlinkitasadefaultbackupstoragefolder.
ItisrecommendedtoperformthisoperationbyNSNTechnicalSupport.
TheNetwork Elements Backup Archiveviewdisplaysallexistingbackupsofthe

selectednetworkelement.Thecreatedbackupsarestoredonthenetworkelement's
disksandadditionallycanbesenttoanexternaldeviceortoNetAct.Withthe
Storagetypefiltercanbeusedtodisplaydatainadesiredmanner.
IfthebackupisstoredinNetActyoucanalsofindtheURLImages,fromwherethe
NetActusercandownloadthebackupfiles.
IntheupperrightcornerofthistabyoucanfindtheinformationabouttheBackup
Archivecurrentdiskspacedividedintodiskusageandavailablefreespace.
Figure 309: Network Elements Backup Archive
Creating Network Elements Backups

Abackupoperationallowstotransferimportantconfigurationinformationfroma
networkelement,storeitanduseitincaseofpossibledisaster.Youcancreate
backupdirectlyonthenetworkelementaswellasinanexternaldeviceorin
NetworkManagementSystem(NMS).Additionally,youcanproceedwithafull
backupoptionorchooseapartialbackup.Networkelementdefinesthecontentof
thepartialbackup.Dependingonthebackuptypeandthestoragetype,the
followingbackupoperationsareformed:
FullBackup
FullBackuptoExternalDevice

FullBackuptoNMS
PartialBackup
PartialBackuptoExternalDevice
PartialBackuptoNMS
Forsomenetworkelements,youcanalsocreatetheCustomBackuptoNMS
operation.Byusingthecustomattributesyoudeterminethescopeofdatato
backup.
Figure 310: Creating Network Elements Backups

SoftwareManagement
457
Summary: Software Management

Module Summary
UseSoftwareManagerfornetworkelementsoftwaresynchronization,reporting
andimport.

OS8212EN16GLA00 StudentHandout PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OS8212EN16GLA00 StudentHandout PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NokiaNetworks

Network Operations and

Safety statements in Student Handouts

Presents information to identify and warn of a situation where improper

Presents information to identify and warn of a situation where improper

Presents information to warn of a potentially hazardous situation where

Presents information to identify and warn of a potentially hazardous situation

Object Information Browser................................................................................ 61

Navigating in the view hierarchy....................................................................... 112

Creating an Alarm Filter....................................................................................172

Lab exercise: Enabling the FM Pipe Status......................................................236

Lab exercise: Object selection..........................................................................281

Adding managed objects to working set(s).......................................................332

Uploading Licenses.......................................................................................... 408

Basic Fault Management with NetAct

Advanced Fault Management with NetAct

Basic Performance Management with NetAct

Advanced Performance Management

License management in NetAct

Getting started with NetAct

Nokia Operations and Support System

Figure 1: Nokia and OSS portfolio

Nokia Cloud Application Manager

Figure 2: Nokia Cloud Application Manager Overview

Cloud Network Director

Figure 3: Nokia Cloud Network Director

NetAct Managed Network Model

Global Level Products

Figure 4: NetAct Managed Network Model

Knowledge Check: NetAct functionality

Knowledge Check: NetAct Managed Network Model

NetAct Architecture and virtualization

Business logic tier Businesslogictierhoststhebusinesslogicanddata

Data tier DatatierhostsNetActdatastorages,thatis,thedatabase

Figure 5: NetAct Architecture

Figure 6: NetAct Architecture - Virtual environment

Benefits of virtualization in NetAct

Figure 7: Benefits of virtualization

Scalability in virtualized infrastructure

Table 1: NetAct Deployments: EMC solution

Mainstream HPBL460cGen92p8c 6 VNX Medium:

Large 35 HPBL460cGen92p12c 6 VNX Large:

2x10GbELAN;fccontroller VNX Backup:

Table 2: NetAct Deployments: HP solution

Mainstream HPBL460cGen92p8c 6 HP Medium:

Large 35 HPBL460cGen92p12c 6 HP Large:

Figure 8: NetAct Interfaces - Northbound and Southbound

Knowledge Check: Virtualization

Knowledge Check: NetAct Deployments

Figure 9: Accessing NetAct

Figure 10: NetAct Start Page

New applications visualization modes

Figure 11: Start Page View modes

Lab exercise: Connecting to NetAct

Figure 12: Lab exercise: Connecting to NetAct

Result of this step

Lab exercise: NetAct Start Page

Figure 13: Lab exercise: NetAct Start Page

Result of this step

2 ChangethevisualizationmodeofNetActStartPagefromShow All Application

Result of this step

NetAct Application Categories

Table 3: NetAct Applications Categories